UA5000 Hardware Description Manual PDF

Chapter 1 Overview .........................................................................................
1-1
1.1 ONU Introduction....................................................................................

1.2 ONU Board Lists ....................................................................................
1.2.1 Board List of the ONU-60A ............................................................
1.2.2 Board List of the ONU-F01&02A ....................................................
1.2.3 Board List of the ONU-F01&02AF .................................................
1.2.4 Board List of the ONU-1000A ........................................................
1.2.5 Board List of the ONU-160B-T .......................................................
1.2.6 Board List of the ONU-F01D100 ....................................................
1.2.10 Board List of the ONU-F01D1000 ................................................
1.3 ONU Cables ...........................................................................................
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-6
1-8
1-11
1-13
1-15
1-17
1-19
1-20
1-22
Chapter 2 Introduction to Frames ..................................................................
2-1
2.1 UAFM Frame ..........................................................................................

2.1.1 Overview ........................................................................................
2.1.2 Frame Configuration ......................................................................
2.1.3 External Interface ...........................................................................
2.2 UAFS Frame ..........................................................................................
2.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................
2.3 UAM Frame ............................................................................................
2.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................
2.4 UAS Frame.............................................................................................
2.4.1 Overview ........................................................................................
2.5 UABM Frame..........................................................................................
2.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................
2.6 UAFX Frame ..........................................................................................
2.6.1 Overview ........................................................................................
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-9
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-12
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-14
2-16
2-16
2-16
2-17
2.7 PV8-10 Control Frame ...........................................................................

2.7.1 Overview ........................................................................................
2.8 RSP-10 Subscriber Frame .....................................................................
2.8.1 Overview ........................................................................................
2.9 RSP-14 Subscriber Frame .....................................................................
2.9.1 Overview ........................................................................................
2.10 RSP-19 Subscriber Frame ...................................................................
2.10.1 Overview ......................................................................................
2.10.2 Frame Configuration ....................................................................
2.10.3 External Interface .........................................................................
2-19
2-19
2-19
2-19
2-22
2-22
2-22
2-23
2-25
2-25
2-26
2-26
2-29
2-29
2-29
2-29
Chapter 3 Introduction to Boards ..................................................................
3-1
3.1 ATM Service Processing Board (H601APMA) .......................................

3.1.1 Overview ........................................................................................
3.1.2 Front Panel ....................................................................................
3.1.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane ............................
3.1.4 Subboard .......................................................................................
3.2 IP Service Process Board (H601IPMA) ..................................................
3.2.1 Overview ........................................................................................
3.2.2 Front Panel ....................................................................................
3.2.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................
3.3 V5 Protocol Processing and Control Board (H303PV8/H303PV4).........
3.3.1 Overview ........................................................................................
3.3.2 Front Panel ....................................................................................
3.4 V5 Protocol Processing and Control Board (H302PV8/H302PV4).........
3.4.1 Overview ........................................................................................
3.4.2 Front Panel ....................................................................................
3.5 V5 Interface Processing Board (H601PVU) ...........................................
3.5.1 Overview ........................................................................................
3.5.2 Front Panel ....................................................................................
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-3
3-4
3-8
3-8
3-9
3-11
3-11
3-12
3-12
3-13
3-16
3-20
3-22
3-22
3-23
3-26
3-29
3-31
3-31
3-32

3.6 Remote Subscriber Processing Board (H303RSP) ................................
3.6.1 Overview ........................................................................................
3.6.2 Front Panel ....................................................................................
3.7 Remote Subscriber Processing Board (H302RSP) ................................
3.7.1 Overview ........................................................................................
3.7.2 Front Panel ....................................................................................
3.8 Packet Voice Processing Board (H601PVM) .........................................
3.8.1 Overview ........................................................................................
3.8.2 Front Panel ....................................................................................
3.9 ATM Interface Board (H601AIUA) ..........................................................
3.9.1 Overview ........................................................................................
3.9.2 Front Panel ....................................................................................
3.9.3 Subboard .......................................................................................
3.10 16-port Circuit Emulation E1 Interface Board (H601DEHA) .................
3.10.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.10.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.10.3 DIP Switches ................................................................................
3.10.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane ..........................
3.11 32-port Analog Subscriber Board
(CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL) ...............................................................
3.11.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.11.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.12 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CC09ASL) .....................................
3.12.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.12.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.13 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CC0KASL/CC0MASL) ...................
3.13.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.13.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.14 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CB36ASL/CB37ASL).....................
3-35
3-37
3-38
3-38
3-38
3-40
3-43
3-45
3-45
3-45
3-47
3-49
3-51
3-51
3-52
3-53
3-53
3-55
3-55
3-55
3-57
3-58
3-59
3-59
3-60
3-60
3-63
3-64
3-64
3-65
3-65
3-66
3-66
3-66
3-67
3-67
3-67
3-68
3-68
3-68
3.14.1 Overview ......................................................................................

3.14.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.15 16-port ADSL Board (POTS Splitter Inside) (H601ADLA) ....................
3.15.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.15.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.15.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ..........................................................
3.16 16-port ADSL2+ Subscriber Board (H602ADMB) ................................
3.16.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.16.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.17 16-port ADSL2+ Subscriber Board (H602ADMC) ................................
3.17.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.17.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.18 Subscriber Board Combining POTS and ADSL (H601CSLA) ..............
3.18.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.18.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.19 16-port VDSL board (H601VDLA) ........................................................
3.19.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.19.2 Front panel ...................................................................................
3.20 2/4-Wire E&M Interface Board (H601ATIA/H301ATI) ..........................
3.20.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.20.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.21 Direct Dial-in Subscriber Interface Board (H301CDI/H601CDIA).........
3.21.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.21.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.22 Digital Subscriber Board (CB02DSL/CB03DSL) ..................................
3.22.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.22.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3-68
3-69
3-69
3-69
3-69
3-70
3-70
3-70
3-71
3-71
3-72
3-72
3-72
3-73
3-73
3-73
3-74
3-74
3-75
3-75
3-75
3-76
3-77
3-77
3-77
3-77
3-78
3-78
3-79
3-79
3-80
3-82
3-83
3-85
3-85
3-86
3-87
3-88
3-88
3-89
3-90
3.23 High Speed Subscriber Board (H302HSL) ...........................................

3.23.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.23.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.24 High Speed Subscriber Board (H303HSL) ...........................................
3.24.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.24.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.24.5 Notes ............................................................................................
3.25 SHDSL Interface Board (H521SDL) .....................................................
3.25.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.25.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.26 16-Port SHDSL Board (H601SDLA) .....................................................
3.26.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.26.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.27 Voice Frequency Interface Board (CB02VFB) .....................................
3.27.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.27.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.28 Railway Collinear Voice Frequency Interface Board (CB03VFB).........
3.28.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.28.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.29 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H301HWC) .........................
3.29.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.29.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.30 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H601HWCA) .......................
3.30.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.30.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.31 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H301HWT) ..........................
3.31.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.31.2 External Interfaces .......................................................................
3.32 Environment & Power Supply Monitoring Board (H302ESC) ...............
3-91
3-91
3-91
3-93
3-94
3-95
3-95
3-95
3-97
3-98
3-100
3-100
3-100
3-100
3-102
3-104
3-106
3-106
3-106
3-106
3-107
3-107
3-107
3-108
3-109
3-111
3-111
3-111
3-111
3-113
3-113
3-113
3-113
3-113
3-115
3-115
3-115
3-115
3-115
3-116
3-116
3.32.1 Overview ......................................................................................

3.32.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.33 Environment & Power Monitoring Board (H303ESC) ...........................
3.33.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.33.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.34 Subscriber Test Board (CC08TSS) ......................................................
3.34.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.34.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.35 Subscriber Test Board (H601TSS) .......................................................
3.35.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.35.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.36 Secondary Power Supply Board (CC03PWX) ......................................
3.36.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.36.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.37 Secondary Power Supply Board (CC04PWX) ......................................
3.37.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.37.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.37.3 DIP Switches ................................................................................
3.38 Secondary Power Supply Board (H601PWX/H301PWX) ....................
3.38.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.38.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.39 155 Mbit/s SDH Optical Transmission Board (H302ASU) ....................
3.39.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.39.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.40 8 E1 SDH Optical Transmission Board (H601ATUB)...........................
3.40.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.40.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................
3.41 16 E1 SDH Optical Transmission Board (H601ATUA) .........................
3.41.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3-116
3-117
3-117
3-118
3-118
3-119
3-120
3-121
3-121
3-122
3-123
3-123
3-125
3-125
3-126
3-127
3-127
3-130
3-130
3-130
3-131
3-132
3-132
3-133
3-134
3-136
3-136
3-136
3-138
3-139
3-139
3-140
3-142
3-146
3-147
3-147
3-148
3-151
3-153
3-155
3-155
3.41.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................

3.42 Fan Control Board (H601FCB) .............................................................
3.42.1 Overview ......................................................................................
3.42.2 Description of Front Panel ...........................................................
3.42.3 Description of DIP Switches and Jumpers ...................................
3-155
3-158
3-161
3-162
3-162
3-163
3-163
Chapter 4 Introduction to Front Access Cables ...........................................
4-1
4.1 Digital Trunk Cables ...............................................................................

4.1.1 Trunk Cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H .................................
4.1.2 Trunk Cable From APMA/AIUA to DDF .........................................
4.1.3 IPMA Subtending Cable .................................................................
4.1.4 FE Upstream Cable of IPMA Board ...............................................
4.1.5 Trunk Cable From ATUA/DEHA to DDF ........................................
4.1.6 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H ............................
4.1.7 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB ...................................
4.1.8 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to DDF ..............................................
4.1.9 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to APMA ...........................................
4.1.10 Trunk Cable From H601ATUB to DDF ........................................
4.1.11 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H521SDLto DDF ..........................
4.1.12 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H303HSL to DDF .........................
4.1.13 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H
SS42SP1 ................................................................................................
4.1.14 V.35 DCE/FE1 Trunk Cable From H302HSL to DDF ..................
4.2 Subscriber Lines .....................................................................................
4.2.1 Shielded Subscriber Line for 32-port Subscriber Board .................
4.2.2 Shielded Subscriber Line for 16-port Subscriber Board .................
4.2.3 Shielded Subscriber Line for 8-port Subscriber Board ...................
4.2.4 ATIA Communication Cable ...........................................................
4.2.5 ADLA Subscriber Line ....................................................................
4.2.6 ADMB/ADMC Subscriber Line .......................................................
4.2.7 CSLA Subscriber Line ....................................................................
4.2.8 SDLA Subscriber Line ....................................................................
4.2.9 VDLA Subscriber Line ....................................................................
4.3 Maintenance Cables and Network Cables .............................................
4.3.1 Local Maintenance Serial Port Cable.............................................
4.3.2 Network Cable ...............................................................................
4.4 Signal Cables .........................................................................................
4.4.1 HW Cable.......................................................................................
4.4.2 Test Alarm Cable ...........................................................................
4-1
4-1
4-5
4-6
4-9
4-9
4-12
4-19
4-22
4-24
4-28
4-31
4-34
4-36
4-39
4-42
4-42
4-44
4-45
4-45
4-46
4-46
4-47
4-47
4-47
4-47
4-47
4-48
4-50
4-50
4-52
Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear Access Cables ............................................
5-1
5.1 Digital Trunk Cable .................................................................................

5.1.1 IMA E1 Cable From APMA to OptiX155/622H ...............................
5.1.2 IMA E1 Cable From APMA to OptiX155C (H601ATU) ..................
5.1.3 Cable From APMA to OptiX 155/622B ...........................................
5.1.4 Cable From APMA to DDF .............................................................
5.1.5 Cable From APMA to MD5500 E8IT ..............................................
5.1.6 CES E1 Cable From PV8 to APMA ...............................................
5.1.7 CES E1 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to APMA .....................................
5.1.8 IPMA Subtending Cable .................................................................
5.1.9 FE Upstream Cable of IPMA ..........................................................
5.1.10 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622H ............................................
5.1.11 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622B ............................................
5.1.12 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622 ..............................................
5.1.13 Cables From PV8 to OptiX 155C .................................................
5.1.14 Cable From PV8 to B75 ...............................................................
5.1.15 Cable From PV8 to DDF ..............................................................
5.1.16 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H .................................
5.1.17 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622B ..................................
5.1.18 Cable Connecting PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622 ..........................
5.1.19 Cables From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155C.......................................
5.1.20 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to B75 .....................................................
5.1.21 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622H .........................................
5.1.22 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622B .........................................
5.1.23 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622 ...........................................
5.1.24 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155C ................................................
5.1.25 Cable From RSPA to B75 ............................................................
5.1.26 16-E1-Interface Cable From ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF .............
5.1.27 4-E1-interface 75ohm Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF.........
5.1.28 Cable From H303HSL to OptiX155/622H ....................................
5.1.29 Trunk Cable From H303HSL to DDF ...........................................
5.2 Subscriber Line ......................................................................................
5.2.1 16-port Subscriber Line..................................................................
5.2.2 32-port Subscriber Line..................................................................
5.2.3 ATI Cable .......................................................................................
5.2.4 SRX Cable .....................................................................................
5.2.5 H302HSL Cable .............................................................................
5.2.6 H303HSL Cable .............................................................................
5.2.7 DDU Cable .....................................................................................
5.2.8 SDL Subscriber Line ......................................................................
5-1
5-1
5-6
5-8
5-10
5-12
5-13
5-15
5-18
5-19
5-19
5-23
5-24
5-26
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-36
5-40
5-41
5-43
5-46
5-47
5-53
5-54
5-57
5-59
5-59
5-61
5-63
5-64
5-66
5-70
5-72
5-73
5.2.9 ADLA Subscriber Line ....................................................................

5.2.10 ADMB/ADMC Subscriber Line .....................................................
5.2.11 CSLA Subscriber Line..................................................................
5.2.12 SDLA Subscriber Line..................................................................
5.2.13 VDLA Subscriber Line..................................................................
5.3 Maintenance Cable and Network Cable .................................................
5.3.1 Serial Port Cable ............................................................................
5.3.2 Network Cable ...............................................................................
5.4 HW Cable ...............................................................................................
5-74
5-74
5-75
5-75
5-75
5-75
5-75
5-76
5-78
Appendix A Abbreviations ..............................................................................
A-1
HUAWEI
HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit

Hardware Description Manual
V100R003/V100R005/V100R007

Manual Version
T2-052596-20040910-C-1.70
Product Version
V100R003/V100R005/V100R007
BOM
31250196
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support
and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Copyright 2004 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET,
, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,
TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium,

M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye,
Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co.,
Ltd.
All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
About This Manual

Release Notes
This manual applies to three versions of the HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit,
including V100R003/V100R005/ V100R007.
Related Manuals
The related documents consist of the following:
BOM
Manual
31010206
HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-60A User Manual
31013681
HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-F01D100 User Manual
31013392
31013393
HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-F01D500 user manual
31013169
31011368
31013491
HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-F01&02AF User Manual
31013500
HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-F01&02A User Manual
31250196
HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit Hardware Description Manual
Organization
HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit Hardware Description Manual introduces
boards and cables of the ONU series.
There are five chapters and one appendix in this manual.
Chapter 1 Overview introduces the ONU series, and lists the boards in brief due to the
detailed ONU equipment.
Chapter 2 Introduction to Frames describers the frames used in the ONU equipment.
Chapter 3 Introduction to Boards gives a detail introduction to all kinds of board
which used in ONU.
Chapter 4 Introduction to Front Access Cables covers the cable used in front
maintenance equipment in detail.
Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear Access Cables covers the cable used in rear
maintenance equipment in detail.
Appendix Abbreviations lists all the abbreviations in this manual.
Intended Audience
The manual is intended for the following readers:
z
Technical engineers of HONET Integrated Services Access Network
Telecom administrators
Installation and maintenance engineers of HONET Integrated Services Access

Network
Conventions
The manual uses the following conventions:
I. General conventions
Convention
Description
Arial
Normal paragraphs are in Arial.
Arial Narrow
Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips are in Arial Narrow.
Boldface
Headings are in Boldface.
II. Symbols
Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of
special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:
Caution: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.

Note: Means a complementary description.
Environmental Protection
This product has been designed to comply with the requirements on environmental
protection. For the proper storage, use and disposal of this product, national laws and
regulations must be observed.

Table of Contens
Table of Contents
Table of Contents .............................................................................................................................. i
Chapter 1 Overview ....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 ONU Introduction ............................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 ONU Board Lists ................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.2.1 Board List of the ONU-60A ..................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2 Board List of the ONU-F01&02A............................................................................. 1-3
1.2.3 Board List of the ONU-F01&02AF........................................................................... 1-6
1.2.4 Board List of the ONU-1000A ................................................................................. 1-8
1.2.5 Board List of the ONU-160B-T .............................................................................. 1-11
1.2.6 Board List of the ONU-F01D100 ........................................................................... 1-13
1.2.10 Board List of the ONU-F01D1000 ....................................................................... 1-20
1.3 ONU Cables..................................................................................................................... 1-22
Chapter 2 Introduction to Frames................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1 UAFM Frame ..................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Frame Configuration ............................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.3 External Interface .................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2 UAFS Frame ...................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.3 UAM Frame........................................................................................................................ 2-8
2.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.4 UAS Frame ...................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-11
2.4.2 Frame Configuration ............................................................................................. 2-11
2.4.3 External Interface .................................................................................................. 2-12
2.5 UABM Frame ................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-14
2.6 UAFX Frame .................................................................................................................... 2-16
i

Table of Contens
2.6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-16

2.7 PV8-10 Control Frame..................................................................................................... 2-19
2.7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-19
2.8 RSP-10 Subscriber Frame............................................................................................... 2-22
2.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-22
2.9 RSP-14 Subscriber Frame............................................................................................... 2-25
2.9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-25
2.10 RSP-19 Subscriber Frame............................................................................................. 2-29
2.10.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 2-29
2.10.2 Frame Configuration ........................................................................................... 2-29
2.10.3 External Interface ................................................................................................ 2-29
Chapter 3 Introduction to Boards ................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 ATM Service Processing Board (H601APMA) .................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Front Panel.............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane ..................................................... 3-3
3.1.4 Subboard................................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2 IP Service Process Board (H601IPMA) ............................................................................. 3-8
3.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 3-8
3.2.2 Front Panel.............................................................................................................. 3-9
3.2.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-11
3.2.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane ................................................... 3-11
3.3 V5 Protocol Processing and Control Board (H303PV8/H303PV4).................................. 3-12
3.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-12
3.3.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-13
3.4 V5 Protocol Processing and Control Board (H302PV8/H302PV4).................................. 3-22
3.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-22
3.4.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-23
3.5 V5 Interface Processing Board (H601PVU) .................................................................... 3-31
3.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-31
ii

Table of Contens
3.5.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-32

3.6 Remote Subscriber Processing Board (H303RSP) ......................................................... 3-38
3.6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-38
3.6.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-38
3.7 Remote Subscriber Processing Board (H302RSP) ......................................................... 3-45
3.7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-45
3.7.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-45
3.8 Packet Voice Processing Board (H601PVM) .................................................................. 3-51
3.8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-51
3.8.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-52
3.9 ATM Interface Board (H601AIUA) ................................................................................... 3-55
3.9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 3-55
3.9.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-55
3.9.3 Subboard............................................................................................................... 3-57
3.10 16-port Circuit Emulation E1 Interface Board (H601DEHA).......................................... 3-59
3.10.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-59
3.10.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-60
3.10.3 DIP Switches ....................................................................................................... 3-60
3.10.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane ................................................. 3-63
3.11 32-port Analog Subscriber Board (CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL)........................... 3-64
3.11.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-64
3.11.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-65
3.12 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CC09ASL) .............................................................. 3-66
3.12.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-66
3.12.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-66
3.13 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CC0KASL/CC0MASL) ............................................ 3-67
3.13.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-67
3.13.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-68
3.14 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CB36ASL/CB37ASL).............................................. 3-68
3.14.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-68
iii

Table of Contens
3.14.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-69

3.15 16-port ADSL Board (POTS Splitter Inside) (H601ADLA)............................................. 3-69
3.15.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-69
3.15.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-70
3.15.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-70
3.16 16-port ADSL2+ Subscriber Board (H602ADMB) ......................................................... 3-71
3.16.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-71
3.16.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-72
3.17 16-port ADSL2+ Subscriber Board (H602ADMC) ......................................................... 3-73
3.17.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-73
3.17.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-73
3.18 Subscriber Board Combining POTS and ADSL (H601CSLA)....................................... 3-75
3.18.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-75
3.18.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-75
3.19 16-port VDSL board (H601VDLA) ................................................................................. 3-77
3.19.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-77
3.19.2 Front panel .......................................................................................................... 3-77
3.20 2/4-Wire E&M Interface Board (H601ATIA/H301ATI) ................................................... 3-79
3.20.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-79
3.20.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-80
3.21 Direct Dial-in Subscriber Interface Board (H301CDI/H601CDIA).................................. 3-85
3.21.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-85
3.21.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-86
3.22 Digital Subscriber Board (CB02DSL/CB03DSL) ........................................................... 3-88
3.22.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-88
3.22.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-89
3.23 High Speed Subscriber Board (H302HSL) .................................................................... 3-91
3.23.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-91
iv

Table of Contens
3.23.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-91

3.24 High Speed Subscriber Board (H303HSL) .................................................................... 3-95
3.24.1 Overview ............................................................................................................. 3-95
3.24.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-95
3.24.5 Notes ................................................................................................................. 3-100
3.25 SHDSL Interface Board (H521SDL) ............................................................................ 3-100
3.25.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-100
3.25.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-100
3.25.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................................... 3-102
3.25.4 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane ............................................... 3-104
3.26 16-Port SHDSL Board (H601SDLA) ............................................................................ 3-106
3.26.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-106
3.26.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-106
3.27 Voice Frequency Interface Board (CB02VFB)............................................................. 3-107
3.27.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-107
3.27.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-107
3.28 Railway Collinear Voice Frequency Interface Board (CB03VFB)................................ 3-111
3.28.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-111
3.28.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-111
3.29 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H301HWC) ................................................ 3-113
3.29.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-113
3.29.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-113
3.30 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H601HWCA) .............................................. 3-115
3.30.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-115
3.30.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-115
3.31 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H301HWT)................................................. 3-115
3.31.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-115
3.31.2 External Interfaces ............................................................................................ 3-116
3.32 Environment & Power Supply Monitoring Board (H302ESC)...................................... 3-116
3.32.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-116
3.32.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-117

Table of Contens
3.33 Environment & Power Monitoring Board (H303ESC) .................................................. 3-118

3.33.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-118
3.33.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-119
3.34 Subscriber Test Board (CC08TSS) ............................................................................. 3-121
3.34.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-121
3.34.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-122
3.35 Subscriber Test Board (H601TSS) .............................................................................. 3-125
3.35.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-125
3.35.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-126
3.36 Secondary Power Supply Board (CC03PWX)............................................................. 3-130
3.36.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-130
3.36.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-130
3.37 Secondary Power Supply Board (CC04PWX)............................................................. 3-132
3.37.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-132
3.37.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-133
3.37.3 DIP Switches ..................................................................................................... 3-134
3.38 Secondary Power Supply Board (H601PWX/H301PWX) ........................................... 3-136
3.38.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-136
3.38.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-136
3.39 155 Mbit/s SDH Optical Transmission Board (H302ASU)........................................... 3-139
3.39.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-139
3.39.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-140
3.40 8 E1 SDH Optical Transmission Board (H601ATUB).................................................. 3-147
3.40.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-147
3.40.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-148
3.41 16 E1 SDH Optical Transmission Board (H601ATUA)................................................ 3-155
3.41.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-155
3.41.2 Front Panel........................................................................................................ 3-155
3.42 Fan Control Board (H601FCB) .................................................................................... 3-162
vi

Table of Contens
3.42.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-162

3.42.2 Description of Front Panel................................................................................. 3-163
3.42.3 Description of DIP Switches and Jumpers........................................................ 3-163
Chapter 4 Introduction to Front Access Cables......................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Digital Trunk Cables .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Trunk Cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H .......................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Trunk Cable From APMA/AIUA to DDF .................................................................. 4-5
4.1.3 IPMA Subtending Cable.......................................................................................... 4-6
4.1.4 FE Upstream Cable of IPMA Board ........................................................................ 4-9
4.1.5 Trunk Cable From ATUA/DEHA to DDF ................................................................. 4-9
4.1.6 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H................................................... 4-12
4.1.7 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB .......................................................... 4-19
4.1.8 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to DDF ..................................................................... 4-22
4.1.9 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to APMA .................................................................. 4-24
4.1.10 Trunk Cable From H601ATUB to DDF ............................................................... 4-28
4.1.11 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H521SDLto DDF................................................. 4-31
4.1.12 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H303HSL to DDF................................................ 4-34
4.1.13 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1............. 4-36
4.1.14 V.35 DCE/FE1 Trunk Cable From H302HSL to DDF ......................................... 4-39
4.2 Subscriber Lines .............................................................................................................. 4-42
4.2.1 Shielded Subscriber Line for 32-port Subscriber Board ....................................... 4-42
4.2.2 Shielded Subscriber Line for 16-port Subscriber Board ....................................... 4-44
4.2.3 Shielded Subscriber Line for 8-port Subscriber Board.......................................... 4-45
4.2.4 ATIA Communication Cable.................................................................................. 4-45
4.2.5 ADLA Subscriber Line........................................................................................... 4-46
4.2.6 ADMB/ADMC Subscriber Line .............................................................................. 4-46
4.2.7 CSLA Subscriber Line........................................................................................... 4-47
4.2.8 SDLA Subscriber Line........................................................................................... 4-47
4.2.9 VDLA Subscriber Line........................................................................................... 4-47
4.3 Maintenance Cables and Network Cables ...................................................................... 4-47
4.3.1 Local Maintenance Serial Port Cable.................................................................... 4-47
4.3.2 Network Cable....................................................................................................... 4-48
4.4 Signal Cables................................................................................................................... 4-50
4.4.1 HW Cable .............................................................................................................. 4-50
4.4.2 Test Alarm Cable .................................................................................................. 4-52
Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear Access Cables.......................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Digital Trunk Cable ............................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1 IMA E1 Cable From APMA to OptiX155/622H........................................................ 5-1
5.1.2 IMA E1 Cable From APMA to OptiX155C (H601ATU) ........................................... 5-6
5.1.3 Cable From APMA to OptiX 155/622B.................................................................... 5-8
5.1.4 Cable From APMA to DDF.................................................................................... 5-10
5.1.5 Cable From APMA to MD5500 E8IT ..................................................................... 5-12
vii

Table of Contens
5.1.6 CES E1 Cable From PV8 to APMA....................................................................... 5-13

5.1.7 CES E1 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to APMA ............................................................ 5-15
5.1.8 IPMA Subtending Cable........................................................................................ 5-18
5.1.9 FE Upstream Cable of IPMA................................................................................. 5-19
5.1.10 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622H................................................................... 5-19
5.1.11 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622B ................................................................... 5-23
5.1.12 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622 ..................................................................... 5-24
5.1.13 Cables From PV8 to OptiX 155C ........................................................................ 5-26
5.1.14 Cable From PV8 to B75 ...................................................................................... 5-28
5.1.15 Cable From PV8 to DDF ..................................................................................... 5-29
5.1.16 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H ........................................................ 5-30
5.1.17 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622B......................................................... 5-32
5.1.18 Cable Connecting PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622 ................................................. 5-33
5.1.19 Cables From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155C.............................................................. 5-34
5.1.20 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to B75............................................................................ 5-35
5.1.21 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622H................................................................ 5-36
5.1.22 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622B ................................................................ 5-40
5.1.23 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622 .................................................................. 5-41
5.1.24 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155C ....................................................................... 5-43
5.1.25 Cable From RSPA to B75 ................................................................................... 5-46
5.1.26 16-E1-Interface Cable From ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF .................................... 5-47
5.1.27 4-E1-interface 75 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF.................................... 5-53
5.1.28 Cable From H303HSL to OptiX155/622H ........................................................... 5-54
5.1.29 Trunk Cable From H303HSL to DDF .................................................................. 5-57
5.2 Subscriber Line ................................................................................................................ 5-59
5.2.1 16-port Subscriber Line......................................................................................... 5-59
5.2.2 32-port Subscriber Line......................................................................................... 5-61
5.2.3 ATI Cable .............................................................................................................. 5-63
5.2.4 SRX Cable............................................................................................................. 5-64
5.2.5 H302HSL Cable .................................................................................................... 5-66
5.2.6 H303HSL Cable .................................................................................................... 5-70
5.2.7 DDU Cable ............................................................................................................ 5-72
5.2.8 SDL Subscriber Line ............................................................................................. 5-73
5.2.9 ADLA Subscriber Line........................................................................................... 5-74
5.2.10 ADMB/ADMC Subscriber Line ............................................................................ 5-74
5.2.11 CSLA Subscriber Line......................................................................................... 5-75
5.2.12 SDLA Subscriber Line......................................................................................... 5-75
5.2.13 VDLA Subscriber Line......................................................................................... 5-75
5.3 Maintenance Cable and Network Cable .......................................................................... 5-75
5.3.1 Serial Port Cable ................................................................................................... 5-75
5.3.2 Network Cable....................................................................................................... 5-76
5.4 HW Cable......................................................................................................................... 5-78
viii

Table of Contens
Appendix A Abbreviations ...........................................................................................................A-1
ix

Chapter 1 Overview
Chapter 1 Overview
As the functional unit of the Optical Network Unit (ONU), the UA5000 integrated access
unit (referred to UA5000 hereinafter) provides various narrowband and broadband
subscriber interfaces to access services. This chapter covers ONU series, board lists of
all ONUs and their cables.
1.1 ONU Introduction

There are multiple types of ONUs, according to the application environment or
maintenance mode:
z
According to the environment: Indoor series and Outdoor series.
According to the maintenance mode: Rear access and Front access.
As shown in Figure 1-1, these ONUs can meet the requirements of different capacity,
different application environment and different maintenance modes.
Rear access
512A512A
F01A
F01A
F02A
1000A
F01D100
Indoor
Indoorseries
series
F01AF
F01AF
F01D1000
Outdoor
Outdoorseries
series
60A
F01D200
F01D200
F02AF
F01D600
F01D500
F01D500
Front access
Front access: the cabinet can be placed against the wall, board plugging/unplugging, cabling, and maintenance and
operation can be done at the front.
Rear Access: the cabinet cannot be placed against the wall. Cables are routed at the rear, while board
plugging/unplugging is conducted at the front.
Figure 1-1 ONU series
1-1

Chapter 1 Overview
1.2 ONU Board Lists

1.2.1 Board List of the ONU-60A
Table 1-1 Board list of the ONU-60A
Board
Category
Board
H303PV4: V5 Protocol
Processing and Control Board
Narrowband control board.

Controlling the narrowband boards in the same frame.
Providing four upstream E1 interfaces for narrowband
services.
H303RSP: Remote Subscriber

Processing Board

Providing one or four upstream E1 interfaces for narrowband
services.
CC0HASL: 32-port Analog

Subscriber Board
Providing the BORSCHT function for 32-pair analog subscriber

lines. Besides, 16th and 17th ports provide reversal polarity.
CC0NASL/CC0RASL: 32-port
Analogue Subscriber Board
Providing the BORSCHT function and reversal polarity for

32-pair analog subscriber lines.
CC0KASL: 16-port Analog

Subscriber Board
Providing the BORSCHT function for 16 pairs of analog

subscriber lines, among which, the 8th and 9th ports provide
the reversal polarity.
CC0MASL/CC09ASL: 16-port

CB36ASL: 16-port Analogue

Subscriber Board

16-pair analog subscriber lines. Besides, it can also provide
12/16KC charging signals.
CB37ASL: 16-port Analog

Subscriber Board
Providing the BORSCHT function and reversal polarity for 16

pairs of subscriber lines.
H301CDI: Direct Dial-in

Subscriber Interface Board
Implementing the transparent transmission at the analog

subscriber port.
Not to be installed in the UA5000 frame.
CB03DSL: Digital Subscriber

Board
Providing eight 2B+D interfaces.
H303HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board
Providing two E1 interfaces and two SHDSL interfaces.
H521B08: 8-port ADSL Board
Providing eight ADSL interfaces.
H521LSL: LAN Access Board
Providing four downstream 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interfaces and

four upstream E1 interfaces.
Control board
Subscriber
board
Function
1-2

Chapter 1 Overview
Note:
The meanings of BORSCHT are listed below.
B: Battery
O: Overvoltage and Overcurrent protection
R: Ringing
S: Supervision
C: Codec
H: Hybrid
T: Test
1.2.2 Board List of the ONU-F01&02A

Table 1-2 Board list of the ONU-F01&02A
Board Category
Control board
ATM interface
board
Subscriber
board
Board
Function
H601APMA: ATM Service

Processing Board
ATM broadband control board.

Controlling the UA5000 broadband boards.
H601IPMA: IP Service
Processing Board
IP broadband control board.


Providing eight upstream E1 interfaces to control the
narrowband subscriber boards in the same frame.

Providing four upstream E1 interfaces to control the
narrowband subscriber boards in the same frame.

Processing Board
Narrowband control board of UA5000 slave frame or the

control board of RSP frame.
H601PVM: Packet Voice

Management Board

Providing two FE interfaces.
H601AIUA: ATM Interface

Board
Implementing the remote cascading of the UA5000.

Subscriber Board

Analog Subscriber Board



Subscriber Board

subscriber lines, among which, the 8th and 9th pairs provide
1-3

Board Category
Subscriber
board
Chapter 1 Overview
Board
Function

Subscriber Board


Subscriber Board

H602ADMC: 16-port ADSL2+

Board
Providing 16 ADSL2+ interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces, with

the built-in relay.
Providing the testing function to internal and external
subscriber lines.
Installed in the UA5000 frame.
H602ADMB: 16-port ADSL2+

Board
Providing 16 ADSL2+ interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces,

without the built-in relay.
H601CSLA: Combined
Subscriber Board with POTS
and ADSL
Providing 16 ADSL interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces.

Installed in the UAM/UAF frame.
H301ATI: 2/4-wire E&M

Interface Board
Providing six 2/4-wire E&M interfaces.

Installed in the RSP frame instead of the UA5000 frame.
H601ATIA: 2/4-wire E&M

Interface Board

Installed in the UAM/UAS frame.

Implementing the transparent transmission of analog

subscriber port.
CB02DSL/CB03DSL: Digital
Subscriber Board
H302HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board
Providing two V.35 interfaces and two E1 interfaces with the

rate of N 64 kbit/s (1N31).
H303HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board
CB02VFB: Voice Frequency

Interface Board
Providing 16 2-wire or eight 4-wire voice frequency interfaces.
CB03VFB: Railway Collinear

Audio Frequency Interface
Board
Providing interfaces for terminals of railway collinear dispatch

system and common 2/4-wire audio frequency interfaces.
Installed only in the RSP/PV8 frames.
Providing eight ADSL subscriber interfaces and four upstream

E1 interfaces.
H521BSL: 16/8-port ADSL

Board
Providing 16 ADSL interfaces and four upstream E1 interfaces.

H521SDL: 4-port SHDSL Board
Providing four SHDSL interfaces in the TDM mode and four E1

interfaces.
1-4

Board Category
Subscriber
board
Board
Power board
Other board
Function
H601SDLA: 16-port SHDSL

Board
Providing 16 SHDSL interfaces in the ATM mode.

Board

the
built-in
POTS
splitter.
H601VDLA: 16-port VDSL

Board
Providing 16 VDSL interfaces.
H601CSLA: Combined
and ADSL
Providing 16 ADSL interfaces or 16 POTS interfaces.
H601DEHA: 16-port Circuit

Emulation E1 Interface Board
Providing independent 16 E1 interfaces.

Supporting the unstructured (UDT) CES.
H601ATUB: 8-E1 SDH Optical

Transmission Board
Standard transmission equipment.

Compatible with the OptiX155/622 on optical path, 2M
tributary, clock, controlling and orderwire.
H302ASU: 155 Mbit/s SDH

Optical Transmission Board
Providing dual STM-1 optical interfaces, up to 16 E1 electrical

interfaces, RS-232 transparent transmission serial port and
Ethernet interface.
Installed in the RSP frame.
H303ESC: Environment &

Power Monitoring Board
Controlling fans.
Monitoring the equipment room and cabinet, including
temperature, humidity, access control, infrared and smoke
sensor (Infrared and smoke sensor needs corresponding
external sensors).
CC08TSS: Subscriber Test

Board
Providing two testing channels to test the analog subscriber

interface (Z interface) and digital subscriber interface (U
interface).
H601PWX/H301PWX:
Secondary Power Supply Board
Providing three outputs: +5V DC/30A, 5 V DC/10 A and 75 V

AC/1 A.
CC03PWX: Secondary Power

Supply Board
Providing three outputs: +5 V/20 A, 5 V/5 A and 75 V AC/0.4

A.
CC04PWX: Secondary Power

Supply Board
Providing three outputs: +5 V DC/30 A, 5 V DC/10 A and 75 V

AC/400 mA.
H301HWC: Differential HW
Level Conversion Board
Implementing the level conversion between HW signal and

clock signal, providing 32 differential HWs.
Installed in the UAM and PV8-10 frames.
Transmission
board
Monitoring &
Test board
Chapter 1 Overview
1-5

Chapter 1 Overview
1.2.3 Board List of the ONU-F01&02AF

Table 1-3 Board list of the ONU-F01&02AF
Board Category
Board
Function

Processing Board
Broadband control board.

Controlling the UA5000 broadband subscriber boards.
Processing Board


Controlling the narrowband subscriber boards.
Providing eight upstream E1 interfaces.

Controlling the narrowband subscriber boards.
Providing four upstream E1 interfaces.

Processing Board
Narrowband control board of the UA5000 slave frame.

Management Board

ATM interface
board
H601AIUA: ATM Interface Board
Implementing the remote cascading function of the UA5000.
Subscriber
board

Subscriber Board
Providing the BORSCHT function for 32-pair analog

subscriber lines. Besides, 16th and 17th ports provide
reversal polarity.

CC09ASL/CC0MASL: 16-port

pairs of analog subscriber lines.

Subscriber Board
Providing the BORSCHT functions for 16 pairs of analog

subscriber lines, among which, the 8th and 9th pairs provide

Subscriber Board


Subscriber Board

H601ADLA: 16-port ADSL Board
Providing 16 G.DMT/G.Lite ADSL interfaces and 16 POTS

interfaces, with the built-in POTS splitter.

Board

with the built-in relay.
subscriber lines.
Control board
1-6

Board Category
Subscriber
board
Chapter 1 Overview
Board
Function

Board

H601CSLA: Combined
Subscriber Board with POTS and
ADSL
H301ATI: 2/4-wire E&M Interface

Board

Implementing the transparent transmission at the analog

subscriber port.
Not to be installed in theUA5000 frame.
Subscriber Board
Providing eight ISDN BRA (2B+D) ports.
H302HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board

H303HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board

Interface Board
Providing 16 2-wire or eight 4-wire voice frequency

interfaces.
Providing eight ADSL interfaces and four upstream E1

interfaces.
H521BSL: 16/8-port ADSL Board
Providing 16 ADSL interfaces and four upstream E1

interfaces.

Providing four SHDSL interfaces in the TDM mode and four

E1 interfaces.

Board

Board

with the built-in POTS splitter.
subscriber lines.

Board

without the built-in POTS splitter.
H601VDLA: 16-port VDSL Board
H601CSLA: Combined
Subscriber Board with POTS and
ADSL
1-7

Board Category
Transmission
board
Monitoring
Test board
&
Power board
Chapter 1 Overview
Board
Function



Transmission Board
Standard
STM-1
transmission
equipment.
Compatible with the OptiX155/622 in optical path, 2M
tributary, clock, control and orderwire.
H303ESC: Environment & Power

Monitoring Board
Controlling
fans.
external sensors).

Board

interface).
H601PWX/H301PWX:
Providing three outputs: +5 V DC/30 A, 5 V DC/10 A and 75

V AC/1 A.
H601HWCA: Differential HW
Implementing the level conversion of HW signals and clock

signals.
Providing 32 differential HWs.
H601FCB: Fan Control Board
Adjusting the fan speed and detecting the fan state, and
reporting the fan status to the ESC board.
Or communicating with the control board through the RS-485
interface to report fan alarm and to adjust the fan speed.
Other boards
1.2.4 Board List of the ONU-1000A

Table 1-4 Board list of the ONU-1000A
Board Category
Control board
Board
Function

Processing Board
Control board of the UA5000 master frame.

Processing Board

Processing and Control
Board

Controlling the narrowband boards in the same frame and
provides eight upstream E1 interfaces for narrowband services.
Board

Providing four upstream E1 interfaces for narrowband services.
H303RSP: Remote
Subscriber Processing Board
Narrowband control board of UA5000 slave frame or the control

board of RSP frame.

Management Board

1-8

Board Category
Subscriber
board
Subscriber
board
Chapter 1 Overview
Board
Function

Subscriber Board

CC0NASL/CC0RASL:
32-port Analog Subscriber
Board

CC09ASL/CC0MASL :
Board


Subscriber Board

subscriber lines, among which, the 8th and 9th pairs provide the
reversal polarity.

Subscriber Board


Subscriber Board

H601ADLA: 16-port ADSL

Board
Providing 16 G.DMT/G.Lite ADSL interfaces and 16 POTS

interfaces, with the built-in POTS splitter.

Interface Board


Implementing the transparent transmission of analog subscriber

port.
Subscriber Board
Providing eight ISDN BRA (2B+D) interfaces.
H302HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board
Providing two V.35 interfaces and two E1 interfaces with the rate
of N 64kbit/s (1N31).
H303HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board

Interface Board

Board
Providing interfaces for the terminals of railway collinear

dispatch system and common 2/4-wire audio frequency
interfaces.
Installed in the RSP/PV8 frames only.

H521SDL: 4-port SHDSL

Board

interfaces.

Board
1-9

Board Category
Subscriber
board
Board
Power board
Other board
&
Function

Board
H601CSLA: Combined
and ADSL


H601ATUB: 8-E1 SDH


Compatible with the OptiX155/622 in optical path, 2M tributary,
clock, control and orderwire.
H302ASU: 155 Mbit/s SDH

Providing the dual STM-1 optical interfaces, up to 16 E1

electrical interfaces, RS-232 transparent transmission serial port
and Ethernet interface.
Installed in the RSP frame.

Power Supply Monitoring
Board
Monitoring the environment and power supply inside the cabinet,

including temperature, humidity, primary power supply, access
control and main distribution frame.
Controlling the under-voltage switch-off of the battery and the
fan status.
Managing the equalizing and floating charging to the storage
battery by the primary power supply.

Controlling fans.
external sensors).

Controlling or monitoring the temperature, humidity, access

control and fan.
Connecting with the intelligent power equipment and
environment monitoring equipment through serial ports.
Communicating with the host through serial ports.

Board

interface).
CC03PWX: Secondary
Power Supply Board
Providing three outputs: +5 V/20 A, 5 V/5 A, and 75 V AC/0.4 A.
H301PWX: Secondary Power

Supply Board
Providing three outputs: +5 V DC/30 A, 5 V DC/10 A, 75 V AC/1

A.
H301HWT: Differential HW
Controlling the PV8-12 control frame and PV8-19 main control

frames.
Implementing the level conversion of the HW signal and clock
signals.
Transmission
board
Monitoring
Test board
Chapter 1 Overview
1-10

Chapter 1 Overview
1.2.5 Board List of the ONU-160B-T

Table 1-5 Board list of the ONU-160B-T
Category
Control board
ATM interface
board
Subscriber
board
Board
Function

Processing Board
ATM broadband control board.

Processing Board

Processing and Control board


Processing Board

board of RSP frame.

Management Board

H601AIUA: ATM Interface

Board
Implementing the remote cascading of the UA5000.

Subscriber Board

subscriber lines. The 16th and 17th pairs provide the reversal
polarity.

subscriber lines. All the pairs provide the reversal polarity.
CC09ASL/CC0MASL: 16-port

subscriber lines. All the pairs provide the reversal polarity.

Subscriber Board

reversal polarity.
CC0MASL: 16-port Analog

Subscriber Board

subscriber lines. All the ports provide the reversal polarity.

Subscriber Board

subscriber lines as well as the 12/16KC charging signal. All the
ports provide the reversal polarity.

Subscriber Board

subscriber lines as well as the 12KC charging signal. All the
ports provide the reversal polarity.

Interface Board

Subscriber Board
H302HSL:
High
Subscriber Board
of N 64 kbit/s (1N31).
Speed
1-11

Category
Board
H303HSL:
High
Subscriber Board
Subscriber
board
Transmission
board
Monitoring &
Test board
Chapter 1 Overview
Function
Speed

Interface Board
Providing four downstream 10Mbit/s Ethernet interfaces and


interfaces.

Board

Board

the built-in relay.
Providing the testing function to internal and external subscriber
lines.

Board

H601CSLA: Combined
and ADSL

Board
Providing 16 VDSL subscriber interfaces.



Transmission Board

clock, control and order wire.

Controlling fans.
external sensors).
CC08TSS:
Board
Subscriber
Test

interface).
1-12

Chapter 1 Overview
1.2.6 Board List of the ONU-F01D100

Table 1-6 Board list of the ONU-F01D100
Board Category
Control board
ATM interface
board
Subscriber
board
Board
Function

Processing Board

Processing Board

Board

H303RSP: Remote
Subscriber Processing
Board

board of RSP frame.

Management Board

H601AIUA: ATM interface

board
Enables the UA5000s remote subtending function.
CC0NASL/CC0RASL:
Board
Providing the BORSCHT function and reversal polarity for 32-pair

analog subscriber lines.
CC09ASL/CC0MASL:
Board


Subscriber Board

reversal polarity.

Subscriber Board

analog subscriber lines. Besides, it can also provide 12/16KC
charging signals.

Subscriber Board


Interface Board

Subscriber Board
H302HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board
of N 64kbit/s (1N31).
H303HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board
1-13

Board Category
Board
Monitoring
Test board
&
Function

Interface Board

Interface Board

interfaces.

Board
H602ADMC: 16-port
ADSL2+ Board
Providing 16 ADSL2+ interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces, with the

built-in relay.
lines.
H602ADMB: 16-port
ADSL2+ Board
Providing 16 ADSL2+ interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces, without

the built-in relay.
H601CSLA: Combined
and ADSL

Board

Emulation E1 Interface
board

H601ATUB: 8-E1 SDH



Controlling fans.
temperature, humidity, access control, infrared and smoke sensor
(Infrared and smoke sensor needs corresponding external
sensors).

Board

interface).
Subscriber
board
Transmission
board
Chapter 1 Overview
1-14

Chapter 1 Overview

Board Category
Control board
Subscriber
board
Board
Function

Processing Board

Processing Board

board

Providing eight upstream E1 interfaces for narrowband services.
board

H303RSP: Remote
Board

board of RSP frame.

Management Board


Subscriber Board

CC0NASL/CC0RASL:
Board

CC09ASL/CC0MASL :
Board


Subscriber Board

reversal polarity.

Subscriber Board

Providing 12/16KC charging signals.

Subscriber Board


Interface Board



port.
Subscriber board
Providing eight ISDN BRA (2B+D) interfaces.
1-15

Board Category
Chapter 1 Overview
Board
Function
H302HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board
H303HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board

Interface Board

Board

interfaces.

Board
H602ADMC: 16-port
ADSL2+ Board
Providing 16 ADSL2+ interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces, with the

built-in relay.
lines.
H602ADMB: 16-port
ADSL2+ Board
Providing 16 ADSL2+ interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces, without

the built-in relay.
H601CSLA: Combined
and ADSL

Board

Installed in any service board slot of the UA5000 frame.

Emulation E1 Interface
board

H601ATUB: 8-E1 SDH



Board

interface).
Power board
H601PWX/H301PWX:
Secondary Power Supply
Board

AC/1 A.
Other board
Implementing the level conversion of HW signal and clock signal.

Installed in the UAFM frame.
Subscriber
board
Transmission
board
Monitoring
Test board
&
1-16

Chapter 1 Overview

Board Category
Board
Processing Board

Processing Board


Providing eight upstream E1 interfaces for narrowband
services.

Providing four upstream E1 interfaces for narrowband
services.
H303RSP: Remote
Narrowband control board of UA5000 slave frame or the

control board of RSP frame.

Management Board


Subscriber Board




Subscriber Board


Subscriber Board


Interface Board

Subscriber board
H302HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board

H303HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board

Interface Board
Control board
Subscriber board
Function
1-17

Board Category
Chapter 1 Overview
Board
Function

Board

interfaces.

Board

Board

the built-in relay.
subscriber lines.

Board

H601CSLA: Combined
and ADSL

Board

interfaces.

Board



Transmission Board


Board

interface).
Power board
H601PWX/H301PWX:
Board

AC/1 A.
Other board

signals.
Subscriber board
Transmission
board
Monitoring
Test board
&
1-18

Chapter 1 Overview

Board Category
Control board
Subscriber board
Board
Function
board

board

H303RSP: Remote
Board

board of RSP frame.
CC0HASL: 32-port

CC0NASL/CC0RASL:
32-port Analog
Subscriber Board

CC0KASL: 16-port
Providing the BORSCHT function for 16 pairs of analog subscriber

lines, among which, the 8th and 9th pairs provide the reversal
polarity.
CC0MASL/CC09ASL:
16-port Analogue
Subscriber Board
Providing the BORSCHT function and reversal polarity for 16 pairs

of analog.
CB36ASL: 16-port

lines as well as the 12/16KC charging signal.
CB37ASL: 16-port

lines as well as the 12KC charging signal.
H301ATI : 2/4-wire E&M

Interface Board
Providing six 2/4-wire E&M interfaces, installed in the RSP frame

instead of the UA5000 frame.

Subscriber Interface
Board

port.
CB02DSL/CB03DSL:
Digital Subscriber board
H302HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board
Providing two V.35 interfaces and two E1 interfaces with the rate of
N 64 kbit/s (1N31).
H303HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board
CB02VFB: Voice
Frequency Interface
Board
1-19

Board Category
Chapter 1 Overview
Board
Function
CB03VFB: Railway
Collinear Audio
Frequency Interface
Board
Providing interfaces for the terminals of railway collinear dispatch

system and common 2/4-wire audio frequency interfaces.
H521BSL/B08: 16/8-port
ADSL Board
Providing 16/8 ADSL subscriber interfaces and four upstream E1

interfaces.
Monitoring &
Test board
CC08TSS: Subscriber
Test Board

interface (Z interface) and digital subscriber interface (U interface).
Power board
H601PWX/H301PWX:
Board
Providing three outputs: +5 V DC/30 A, 5 V DC/10 A and 75 V AC/1

A.
Other board
H301HWC: Differential
HW Level Conversion
Board
Implementing the level conversion between HW signal and clock

signal.
Installed in the UAM frame and PV8-10 frame.
Subscriber board

Board Category
Control board
Subscriber
board
Board
Function

Processing Board

Processing Board

board

board

H303RSP: Remote

board of RSP frame.

Management Board


Subscriber Board

1-20

Board Category
Subscriber
board
Chapter 1 Overview
Board
Function
CC0NASL/CC0RASL:
Board

CC0MASL/CC09ASL:
16-port Analogue Subscriber
Board

pairs of analog.

Subscriber Board

reversal polarity.

Subscriber Board


Subscriber Board


Interface Board

Subscriber Board
H302HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board
H303HSL: High Speed

Subscriber Board

Interface Board

Board

interfaces.

Board

Board

the built-in relay.
lines.

Board

H601CSLA: Combined
and ADSL

Board

interfaces.
1-21

Board Category
Chapter 1 Overview
Board
Function

Board


H601ATUB: 8-E1 SDH



Board

interface).
Power board
H601PWX/H301PWX:
Board

AC/1 A.
Other board

signals.
Transmission
board
Monitoring
Test board
&
1.3 ONU Cables

The ONU cable falls into two types: front access cable and rear access cable. The front
access cable is used in the front access ONU, while the rear access cable in the rear
access ONU.
z
The front access ONU includes: ONU-60A, ONU-F01A&02AF, ONU-F01D100,

ONU-F01D200, ONU-F01D500, and ONU-F01D1000.
The rear access ONU includes: ONU-F01&02A, ONU-512A, and ONU-1000A.
Note:
The ONU-F01D600 uses the rear access cable.
1-22

Chapter 2 Introduction
Chapter 2 Introduction to Frames

2.1 UAFM Frame
2.1.1 Overview
The UAFM frame is used in the ONU-F01AF, ONU-F02AF, ONU-F01D1000,
ONU-F01D200 and ONU-F01D500.
The UAFM provides 18 slots. Both the narrowband control boards and broadband
control boards support the dual-system hot backup. When being configured with one
secondary power supply board (PWX), the UAFM can house up to 10 subscriber
boards. It supports the intermixing of broadband and narrowband subscriber boards.
The ATM interface board can only reside in slot 7.
2.1.2 Frame Configuration

The height of the UAFM frame is either 1 U (1 U=44.45 mm) or 12 U, corresponding to
the backplane used: 601HUBE or H602HUBE. The UAFM frame contains the following
boards.
z
APMA) or IPMA
PV8/PV4, PVM
Broadband subscriber boards, such as ADLA, VDLA, SDLA
Narrowband subscriber boards, such as ASL, A32, HSL, DSL
HWCA
PWR IO
PWX
TSS
Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 show the configuration of the UAFM frame.
2-1

PWR H H
IO W W
07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
16 17
PWX
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
TSS
APMA
APMA
PV8
PV8
PWX
02 03 04 05 06
ATM/Subscriber board
Cabling Area
C C
00 01
Fan Frame
Figure 2-1 Configuration of the UAFM frame (11 U)
H H
PWR
IO W W
C C
Cabling Area
Fan Frame
17
PWX
APMA
PV8
PV8
Interface/Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
TSS
APMA
PWX
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Cooling and Cabling Area
Figure 2-2 Configuration of the UAFM frame (12 U)
2.1.3 External Interface

Figure 2-3 shows the external interfaces on the backplane of the UAFM frame.
2-2

Figure 2-3 External interfaces on the backplane of the UAFM frame

Table 2-1 describes the interfaces on the backplane of the UAFM frame.
Table 2-1 Interfaces on the backplane of the UAFM frame
Interface
Interface function category
xSL 7xSL 16
External subscriber line
Signal description
Each socket
subscriber lines.
provides
32
Note: 716 refer to board slots.
Upstream E1/E3 trunk interface
The XPM E1 socket provides 16

channels of E1 signal, while both
PV4 E1 and PV8 E1 provide eight
E1 channels of E1 signals. All of
them can use different cables and
matching impedance to adapt to
the 75-ohm or 120-ohm matching
modes.
Upstream FE network interface
These interfaces correspond to the

FE upstream interfaces of the two
broadband control boards.
Broadband FE/LVDS subtending
Each socket provides one LVDS

interface or two FE interfaces.
Ringing current mutual assistance
Ringing current 1 A.
5 V power mutual assistance
+5 V current is 16 A, while 5 V
current is 2 A.
Power module equalized current signal
Both signals are weak signals, in

the level of mA.
XPM E1: E1 interface for the

broadband control board.
PV4 E1: The first four E1 interfaces
for the two PV8/PV4 boards.
PV8 E1: The last four E1 interfaces
for the two PV8 boards.
FEA0/FEA1: FE upstream interface
on the left IPM board.
FEB0/FEB1: FE upstream interface
on the right IPM board.
LINKA0/LINKA1/LINKA2/LINKA3:
The broadband subtending interface
on the left APM/IPM board.
LINKB0/LINKB1/LINKB2/LINKB3:
The broadband subtending interface
on the right APM/IPM board.
P&R-IN:
Inter-frame
mutual-aid input interface.
power
P&R-OUT: Inter-frame power

mutual-aid output interface.
2-3

Interface
TEST&ERROR: Inter-frame test bus
and power alarm signal subtending
interface.

Circuit/loop-line test bus
Power alarm
Signal description
Circuit/loop-line test bus and
power alarm signal inter-frame
subtending.
ESC0/ESC1
Environment and power monitoring
The power and environment

monitoring serial ports of a
narrowband control board and a
broadband control board share a
connector.
FAN
Fan frame alarm
A digital signal.
N-B
The narrowband is managed through

broadband channel.
Eight PINs. The NMS interface for

broadband and narrowband
control boards are connected by
cables when the broadband and
narrowband
are
managed
uniformly through the broadband
channel.
SCC
NMS
The NMS serial ports of the two

narrowband control board share
one connector.
ISDN
ISDN test
This interface is used to maintain

and test the ISDN interface of the
equipment.
Subscriber line test system
Subscriber line test
It provides external meter or

subscriber line test interface.
VoIP
Voice over IP (VoIP) extension of the

right IPM board
It provides two FE interfaces.
Note:
The jumpers JS2 and JS3 on the UAFM backplane are used to set the narrowband control board as PV8
or RSP:
z
When JS2 and JS3 are connected by short circuit cables, the narrowband control board corresponds
to PV8.
When JS2 and JS3 are disconnected, the narrowband control board corresponds to RSP.
The jumpers have been set on delivery.
2-4

2.2 UAFS Frame

2.2.1 Overview
The UAFS frame is used in the ONU-F01AF, ONU-F02AF, ONU-F01D1000,
ONU-F01D200 and ONU-F01D500.
The UAFS frame provides various narrowband service interfaces by cooperating with
the upper control board.
The UAFS frame has 18 slots. Slot 17 only supports the narrowband subscriber board.
The UAFS frame can house two narrowband standby control boards and one
broadband standby control board. Two narrowband standby control boards support the
load sharing and mutual power assistance. The UAFS frame can house up to 13
narrowband subscriber boards or 12 broadband subscriber boards. The same as the
subscriber board in the UAFM frame, subscriber boards of the UAFS frame can be
intermixed.

The height of the UAFS frame is either 11 U or 12 U, corresponding to the backplane
H601HUBF or H602HUBF.
The UAFM frame contains the following boards:
z
APMA and RSP
Broadband subscriber board, such as ADLA, VDSL, SDLA
Narrowband subscriber board, such as ASL, A32, HSL, DSL
PWR IO
PWX
Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-5 show the configuration of the UAFS frame.
2-5
02 03 04 05 06
07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2-6
Narrowband Subscr. Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Narrowband Subscr. Board
PWR
IO
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
02 03 04 05 06
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
PWR
IO
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
00 01
APMA/IPMA
RSP
RSP
Subscriber Board
PWX
00 01
APMA/IPMA
RSP
RSP
Subscriber Board
PWX

Cabling Area
17
Fan Frame
Figure 2-4 Configuration of the UAFS frame (11 U)
Cabling Area
Fan Frame
17
Cooling and Cabling Area
Figure 2-5 Configuration of the UAFS frame (12 U)
Figure 2-6 shows the interfaces on the backplane of the UAFS frame.

Figure 2-6 Interfaces on the backplane of the UAFS frame

Table 2-2 describes the interfaces on the backplane of the UAFS frame.
Table 2-2 Interfaces on the backplane of the UAFS frame
Interface
xSL5xSL17
XPM E1: E1 interface for the
broadband control board
Signal Description
Each socket provides 32 subscriber lines.
Subscriber line
Upstream E1/E3 trunk interface
16 E1 signals are provided in the socket of

XPM E1, which eight E1 signals are provided
in the RSP E1 socket.
HW:
UAFS
narrowband
cascading interface
HW subtending
Each interface provides eight HWs.
FEA0/FEA1
Upstream FE network interface
These interfaces correspond to the FE

upstream interfaces of the two broadband
control boards.
LINKA0/LINKA1/LINKA2/LINKA3
Broadband FE/LVDS cascading
Each socket provides one LVDS interface or

two FE interfaces.
Ringing
current
assistance
The ringing current is 1 A.
RSP E1: E1 interface of two RSP

boards
P&R-IN: Inter-frame power

mutual-aid input interface
P&R-OUT: Inter-frame power
mutual-aid output interface
TEST&ERROR: Inter-frame test

bus and power alarm signal
cascading interface
mutual
5 V power mutual assistance
+5 V current is 16 A, which 5 V current is 2 A.
Power module
current signal
Two signals are weak signals, with the level as

mA.
equalized
Circuit/loop-line test bus
Circuit/loop-line test bus and inter-frame

subtending of the power alarm signal.
Power alarm
Altogether there are two TEST&ERROR

interfaces.
2-7

Interface

and
power
Signal Description
The interface is only provided for the power
and environment monitoring serial ports of the
narrowband interface control board.
ESC
Environment
monitoring
FAN
Fan frame alarm
A digital signal.
NMS
Broadband NMS
Broadband NMS RS232 interface.
2.3 UAM Frame

2.3.1 Overview
The UAM frame is used in the ONU-F01&02A. Adopting the high speed backplane of
multiple buses, it is the control core in the UA5000. When slave frames are configured,
the UA5000 can converge traffic from multiple subscriber frames.
Two PWX boards in the UAM frame supports load sharing and mutual power
assistance. Both two narrowband control boards and two broadband control boards
support the dual-system hot backup. When one PWX is configured, there are up to nine
slots for subscriber board. Subscriber boards can be intermixed in the UAM frame.

The backplane of the UAM frame is the HUNM. The frame contains the following
boards.
z
APMA or IPMA
PV8/PV4 or PVM
HWC
PWX
TSS
Figure 2-7 shows the configuration of the UAM frame.
2-8

17
PWX
07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
HWC
PV8
PV8
APMA/IPMA
APMA/IPMA
Interface/Subscr. Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
02 03 04 05 06
TSS
Subscriber Board
PWX
00 01
Figure 2-7 Configuration of the UAM frame

Figure 2-8 shows the external interfaces on the backplane of the UAM frame.
Figure 2-8 External interfaces on the backplane of the UAM frame

Table 2-3 describes the external interfaces of the UAM frame (excluding the interfaces
on the HEADER).
2-9

Table 2-3 Interfaces of the UAM frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER)
Interface ID
Connection description
Function
F1, F4
Connected to the 5 A fuse.
Providing the B48V feed safety.
F2
Providing the S48V safety.
JA1
Power alarm socket, connected to power alarm cables from

other frames in the subtending of multiple frames.
Providing the subtending of power

alarms.
JA2
Power alarm socket, connected to the last but six pin of the
lower HEADER on the TSS.
Providing the power alarms.
JA3
B48V monitoring socket, connected to the ESC.
Providing the B48V monitoring.
JA4, JA5
Equalized current socket. In the subtending of equalized

current of multiple frames, JA4 is for output and JA5 for input.
Providing the subtending

equalized current.
JA6, JA7
Subscriber line testing socket. In the subtending of subscriber

line test, JA6 is for input and JA7 for output.
For the subscriber line test.
JC1
Broadband environment monitoring interface (RJ45),

connected to the ESC through cables.
Providing serial ports to the ESC.
JC2, JC3
ESC serial ports socket (RJ45). JC2 (corresponding to the left

PV8/PV4 board) and JC3 (corresponding to the right
PV8/PV4 board) are connected to the ESC through cables.
Providing serial ports to the ESC.
JC6
Management series port socket (RJ45).
Providing NM serial port for the left

PV8/PV4.
JD1
B48V power socket, connected to the B48V.
Providing feed and ringing current

power.
JD2
48V power socket, connected to the B48V.
Providing the working power

supply.
JE1, JE2
Power mutual assistance socket. JE1 is for input and JE2 for
output.
Providing the mutual aid of

inter-frame power and ringing
current.
JF1
GND socket , connected to the GND.
Providing the GND connection.
JL1
PGND socket, connected to the PGND.
Providing the PGND connection.
JT1, JT2
Testing the bus socket, connected to the TSS test bus from
other frames. JT1 is for input and JT2 for output.
Providing the subtending interface

of test bus.
of
Table 2-4 Interfaces on the HEADER of the UAM frame

Board type
16-port
subscriber
board ASL
HEADER interface description

Pins 18 (eight channels) of the upper HEADER and pins 2532 (eight channels) of the
lower HEADER on the ASL board are connected with subscriber lines. They correspond to
116 subscribers respectively.
As for the DSL board, the eight pins of its upper HEADER are not connected with subscriber
lines.
2-10

Board type
32-port
subscriber
board A32
Pins 18, pins 916 of the upper HEADER and pins 1724 and pins 2532 of the lower
HEADER are connected with subscriber lines. They correspond to 32 subscribers.
PV8/PV4 board
Pins 1724 and pins 2532 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 18 of the
PV8/PV4.
APMA board
Pins 14 and pins 69 of the lower J4 or J8 connector correspond to E1 interfaces 18 of the

APMA.
The last but six pin of the lower HEADER is connected with the power alarm cable.
y
For the ISDN diagnosis test
Connect the upper HEADER of the TSS as follows: the last but seven pin is connected with
the cable from the DSL, working as the ISDN auxiliary interface. The last but six pin is
connected with the ISDN telephone set.
TSS board
For the telephone set test
Connect the upper HEADER of the TSS as follows: the seventh pin is connected to the cable
from the ASL, working as the auxiliary test port.
Pins 18, 916, 1724, 2532, 3340, 4148, 4956 and 5764 of the HEADER on the
HWC provide eight differential HW cables, connected to the differential interfaces of RSP-14
subscriber frame.
HWC board
2.4 UAS Frame

2.4.1 Overview
The UAS frame is used in the ONU-F01&02A. Adopting the high speed backplane of
multiple buses, the UAS frame can house both broadband and narrowband subscriber
boards.
Under the control of the UAM frame, the UAS frame can provide more subscriber
interfaces. When an ONU needs to access broadband and narrowband services, and
the port capacity is small, you can only configure the UAS frame and connect it to the
Optical Line Terminal (OLT).
The UAS frame has two narrowband control boards and one broadband control board.
Two narrowband control boards have the functions of load sharing and mutual
assistance. The UAS frame has up to 13 subscriber slots and supports the intermixing
of broadband and narrowband subscriber boards.

The backplane of UAS frame is the HUBS. The frame contains the following boards.
z
RSP
2-11

Broadband subscriber board, such as ADLA, VDLA, SDLA
Broadband subscriber board, such as ASL, A32, HSL, DSL
PWX
Figure 2-9 shows the configuration of the UAS frame.

17
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
RSP
RSP
APSA
Subscriber Board
07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
02 03 04 05 06
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
PWX
00 01
Figure 2-9 Configuration of the UAS frame

Figure 2-10 shows the external interfaces of the UAS frame (excluding the interfaces
on the HEADER).
Figure 2-10 External interfaces of the UAS frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER)
2-12

Table 2-5 describes the interfaces of the UAS frame.

Table 2-5 External interfaces of the UAS frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER)
Interface ID
Function
F1
Connected to the 5 A safety fuse.
F2
Providing the S48V feed safety.
F3
Providing the 24 V feed safety.
JA1, JA2
Power alarm socket, connected to power alarm cables from

other frames in the subtending of multiple frames. JA1is for
input, while JA2 for output.

alarms.
JA3
B48V monitoring socket, connected to the ESC board.
JA4, JA5
Equalized current socket. In the subtending of equalized

current of multiple frames, JA4 is for output and JA5 for input.
Providing the subtending of

equalized current.
JC1
Broadband environment monitoring interface

connected to the ESC board through cables.
Providing serial ports for the ESC

board.
JD1
B48V power socket, connected to B48V power.
Providing the feed and ringing

current.
JD2
S48V power socket, connected to S48V.
Providing the working power

supply.
JE1, JE2
Power mutual assistance socket, JE1 is for input and JE2 for
output.

current.
JF1
GND socket, connected to the GND.
JL1
JT1, JT2
Bus socket, connected to the TSS test bus from other frames.
JT1 is for input and JT2 for output.
Providing
the
subtending
interfaces of test bus.
(RJ45),
Table 2-6 Description of interfaces on the HEADER

Board type
16-channel subscriber
board ASL
Pins 18 (eight channels) of the upper HEADER and pins 2532 (eight channels) of the
lower HEADER on the ASL are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 16
subscribers.
As for the DSL, eight pins of its upper HEADER are not connected with subscriber lines.
32-channel subscriber
board A32
Pins 18 and pins 916 of the upper HEADER, and pins 1724 and pins 2532 of the lower
HEADER on the A32 are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 32 subscribers.
PV8/PV4 board
Pins 1724 and pins 2532 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 18 of the
PV8/PV4.
APMA board
Pins 14 and pins 69 of the lower J4 or J8 connector correspond to E1 interfaces 18 of the

APMA.
2-13

2.5 UABM Frame

2.5.1 Overview
The UABM frame is used in the ONU-1000A. It adopts multiple-bus high speed
backplane. It is the control core of the UA5000.
The UABM frame uses the board with the height of 6 U. It supports the load sharing and
mutual aiding of PWX. Both narrowband control boards and broadband control boards
provide the dual-system hot backup function. The UABM frame supports the
intermixing of broadband and narrowband subscriber boards.

The backplane of UABM frame is the HUBB board. The frame contains the following
boards.
z
APMA or IPMA
PV8/PV4 or PVM
TSS
PWX
25
TSS
PWX
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
HWC
PV8
PV8
APMA/IPMA
APMA/IPMA
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
02 03 04 05 06
Subscriber Board
Subscriber Board
PWX
00 01
Figure 2-11 Configuration of the UABM frame

Figure 2-12 shows the external interfaces on the backplane of the UABM frame.
2-14

Figure 2-12 External interfaces on the backplane of the UABM frame

Table 2-7 describes the external interfaces of the UABM frame (excluding the
interfaces on the HEADER).
Table 2-7 External interfaces of the UABM frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER)
Interface ID
Description
RING_OUT,RING_IN
Input and output interfaces of inter-frame ringing current and 5 V power mutual aid.
JK1 JKX1JK4 JKX4
Backup circuit of the ringing current.
ESC_0,ESC_1
Environment and power monitoring interfaces, corresponding to the active and standby
narrowband control boards.
ESC_A/B
Environment and power monitoring interfaces, corresponding to the active and standby
broadband control boards.
NMS_A/B
NMS interface, corresponding to the active and standby broadband control board.
PC_IN, PC_OUT
Inter-frame input and output interfaces of equalized current.
ERR_IN, ERR_OUT
Inter-frame input and output interfaces of alarm signal.
TEST_IN,TEST_OUT
Inter-frame input and output interfaces of test signal.
112_IN,112_OUT
Subscriber line test interface, providing interfaces for external meters or subscriber line test
devices.
B48V
48 V power input interface, which supplies power for the PWX.
S48V
48 V power input interface, which supplies power for the ringing current of the frame.
PGND
Protection ground.
Table 2-8 describes the interfaces on the HEADER.
2-15

Table 2-8 External interfaces on the HEADER of the UABM frame

Board type
16-channel
subscriber board
ASL
Pins 18 (eight channels) of the upper HEADER and pins 2532 (eight channels)
of the lower HEADER on the ASL are connected with subscriber lines,
corresponding to 16 subscribers. As for the DSL board, the eight pins of its upper
HEADER are not connected with subscriber lines.
32-channel
subscriber board
A32
Pins 18 and pins 916 of the upper HEADER, and pins 1724 and pins 2532 of
the lower HEADER on the A32 are connected with subscriber lines,
corresponding to 32 subscribers.
PV8/PV4
Pins 1724 and pins 2532 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces
18 of the PV8/PV4.
APMA
Pins 14 and pins 69 of the lower J4 or J8 connector correspond to E1

interfaces 18 of the APMA.
2.6 UAFX Frame

2.6.1 Overview
The UAFX frame is used in the ONU-F01D100. It has up to six slots for subscriber
boards. Both narrowband control boards and broadband control boards provide the
dual-system hot backup function. The UAFX frame integrates the AC/DC 4810 module
and DC/DC 4805 module.

The backplane of the UAFX frame is the HUBL. The frame contains the following
boards.
z
APMA or IPMA
PV8/PV4 or PVM
TSS
Figure 2-13 shows the configuration of the UAFX frame.
2-16

4
8
0
5
4
8
0
5
E
S
C
Cabling Area
FAN
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
4
8
1
0
T
S
S
X X
P P
M M
PWR
IO
P
V
X
A
I
P U
V /
X X
S
L
X
S
L
X
S
L
X
S
L
X
S
L
X
S
L
Figure 2-13 Configuration of the UAFX frame

Figure 2-14 shows the external interfaces on the backplane of the UAFX frame.
Figure 2-14 External interfaces on the backplane of the UAFX frame

Table 2-9 describes the external interfaces of the UAFX frame.
2-17

Table 2-9 External interfaces of the UAFX frame

Interface ID
Interface description
JD4
Serial port.
TMP-HU
Providing the temperature and humidity monitoring interface.
JTD1
Providing the state monitoring interface of the lightening arrester.
JTD2
Providing the state monitoring interface of the heat exchanger.
JTD3
Providing the state monitoring interface of the heater.
JTD4
Standby.
JTD5
Standby.
JTD6
Standby.
JTD7
Standby.
JTD8
Standby.
DOOR
Providing the monitoring interface of the access control.
PXJ
Providing the monitoring interface of the distribution frame.
CTRL
Compatible with the jumper and DIP switch.
SDH
Providing the power supply interface of transmission unit.
HEX
Providing the monitoring interface of heat exchanger.
DC-LIGHT
DC light socket.
JF3
Fan and power interface of the storage battery compartment.
BAT
Battery interface.
NMS
RS-232 interface of the broadband NMS.
TEST
Subtending interface of the test bus.
PV8-SCC
Maintenance of the PV8 and the communications serial port of the MNS.
APM-E1
Upstream E1/E3 trunk interface, providing 16 E1 interfaces.
PV4-E1
Upstream E1/E3 trunk interface, providing eight E1 interfaces.
XSL0XSL5
External subscriber line. Each socket can be connected with provides 32 subscriber lines.
2-18

2.7 PV8-10 Control Frame

2.7.1 Overview
The PV8-10 control frame resides in the ONU-F01&02A with the 19-inch cabinet. It
provides multiple types of service interfaces. When two PWX boards are configured,
the PV8-10 frame supports 10 subscriber boards. When one PWX board is configured,
the PV8-10 frame supports 11 subscriber boards. The PV8-10 control frame can be
subtended with eight RSP-14 subscriber frames.

The backplane of the RV8-10 control frame is the HGB. The frame contains the
following boards.
z
PV8, PV4
TSS
HWC
Subscriber boards, such as ASL, A32
PWX
Figure 2-15 shows the configuration of the PV8-10 control board.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112131415 16 17
P
W
X
T A A A A A H P P A A A A A
S S S S S SW V V S S S S S
S L L L L L C 8 8 L L L L L
P
W
X
Figure 2-15 Configuration of the PV8-10 control frame

Figure 2-16 shows the rear view of the PV8-10 control frame.
2-19

Figure 2-16 Rear view of the PV8-10 control frame

Table 2-10 describes the external interfaces of the PV8-10 control frame (excluding the
Table 2-10 External interfaces of the PV8-10 control frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER)
Interface ID
Function
F1, F4
F2
F3
Providing the 24 V power safety.
JA1
Power alarm socket, connected to the last but six pin of the
lower HEADER on the TSS board.
JA2
Power alarm socket, connected to the power alarm cable from

other frames while multiple cascading.

power alarms.
JA3
JA4, JA5
Equalized current socket. In the equalized current subtending

of multiple frames, JA4 is for output and JA5 for input.

equalized current.
JA6, JA7
Subscriber line testing socket. JA6 is for input and JA7 for
output while subtending test.
For the subscriber line test.
JC1
Providing NMS serial ports for the

left PV8/PV4.
2-20

Interface ID
Function
JC2, JC3

PV8/PV4) and JC3 (corresponding to the right PV8/PV4) are
connected to the ESC through cables (RJ45).
Providing serial ports for the

ESC.
JC4, JC5
Ethernet interface socket (RJ45). JC4 corresponds to the left

PV8/PV4 and JC5 corresponds to the right PV8/PV4.
Providing Ethernet interfaces.
JD1
B48V power socket, connected to the B48V power.

current.
JD2
S48V power socket, connected to the S48V.
Providing the working power.
JD3
24V power socket, connected to the 24V.
Providing the 24 V power.
JE1, JE2
Power mutual aid socket. JE1 is for input and JE2 for output.

current.
JF1
JL1
JT1, JT2
Test bus socket, connected to TSS test bus from other frames.
JT1 is for input and JT2 for output.
Providing
the
subtending
interface of test bus.
JT3
Test bus socket.
Providing the second test bus.
Caution:
Do not connect power cables incorrectly if there are B48V, S48V and 24 V are present at the same time.
Table 2-11 Interfaces on the HEADER of thePV8-10 control frame

Board type
HEADER description
16-channel
subscriber board ASL
Pins 18 (eight channels) of the upper HEADER and pins 2532 (eight channels) of the lower
HEADER on the ASL are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 16 subscribers.
As for the DSL board, the eight pins of its upper HEADER are not connected with subscriber
lines.
32-channel
subscriber board ASL
Pins 18 and 916 of the upper HEADER, and pins 1724 and pins 2532 of the lower
PV8/PV4 board
Pins 1724 and 2532 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 18 of the
PV8/PV4.
Between
left
PV8/PV4 board and
right PV8/PV4 board
Pins 512 of the upper HEADER are connected by short circuit cables, so are pins 18, 1724
and 2532 of the lower HEADER.
2-21

Board type
HEADER description
The last but six pin of the lower HEADER is connected to power alarm cable.
y
For the ISDN diagnostic testing
Connect the upper HEADER of the TSS as follows: the last but seven pin is connected with
the cable from the DSL, working as the ISDN auxiliary interface. The last but six pin is
connected with the ISDN telephone set.
TSS board
Connect the upper HEADER of the TSS as follows: the seventh pin is connected to the cable
from the ASL, working as the auxiliary test port.
Pins 18, 916, 1724, 2532, 3340, 4148, 4956 and 5764 of the HEADER on the HWC
provide eight differential HW cables, connected to the differential interfaces of RSP-14
subscriber frame.
HWC board
Note:
In the power mutual aid between the PV8-10 control frame and RSP-14 subscriber frame, there shall be
two or three frames.
2.8 RSP-10 Subscriber Frame

2.8.1 Overview
The RSP-10 subscriber frame is used in the ONU-F01&02A. It supplies multiple types
of service interfaces through cooperating with upper-layer control boards. It can
provide various convergence ratios, such as 1:1, 1:2, 1:4 and 1:8. When two PWX
boards are configured, the frame supports 10 subscriber boards. When one PWX
board is configured, the frame supports 11 subscriber boards.

The backplane of the RSP-10 frame is the HGB. The frame contains the following
boards.
z
RSP
TSS
Analog subscriber board, such as ASL, A32
PWX
Figure 2-17 shows the configuration of the RSP-10 subscriber frame.
2-22

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112131415 16 17
P
W
X
T A A A A A
S S S S S S
S L L L L L
R R A A A A A
S S S S S S S
P P L L L L L
P
W
X
Figure 2-17 Configuration of the RSP-10 subscribe frame

Figure 2-18 shows the rear view of the RSP-10 subscriber frame.
Figure 2-18 Rear view of the RSP-10 subscriber frame

Table 2-12 describes the external interfaces of the RSP-10 subscriber frame (excluding
the interface on the HEADER).
Table 2-12 External interfaces of the RSP-10 subscriber frame
Interface ID
Function
F1, F4
Connected to the 5A fuse.
F2
F3
Providing the 24 V power

safety.
2-23

Interface ID
Function
JA1
Power alarm socket, connected to the last but six pin of the lower
HEADER on the TSS.
JA2
Power alarm socket, connected to power alarm cables from other

frames in the power alarm subtending of multiple frames.

power alarms.
JA3
B48V monitoring socket, connected to the ESC.
JA4, JA5
Equalized current socket. In the equalized current subtending of

multiple frames, JA4 is for output and JA5 for input.

equalized current.
JA6, JA7
Subscriber line testing socket. In the subtending of subscriber line

test, JA6 is for input and JA7 for output.
For subscriber line test.
JC1
Providing NM serial ports for the

left PV8/PV4.
JC2, JC3

PV8/PV4 board) and JC3 (corresponding to the right PV8/PV4
board) are connected to the ESC board through cables (RJ45).
Providing serial ports for the

ESC.
JC4, JC5
Reserved.
Reserved.
JD1

current.
JD2
JD3
24 V power socket, connected to the 24 V.
Providing the 24 V power

supply.
JE1, JE2
Power mutual assistance socket. JE1 is for input and JE2 for
output.

current.
JF1
JL1
Providing
connection.
JT1, JT2
Testing the bus socket, connected to TSS test bus from other
frames. JT1 is for input and JT2 for output.
Providing the subtending

interface of test bus.
JT3
Test bus socket.
Providing the second test bus.
the
PGND
Caution:
2-24

Table 2-13 Interfaces on the HEADER of the RSP-10 subscriber frame

Board type
HEADER description
ASL board
HEADER on the ASL are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 16 subscribers. As for
the DSL board, the eight pins of its upper HEADER are not connected with subscriber lines.
A32 board
RSP board
Pins 1724 and pins 2532 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 12, 34 of the RSP
respectively.
The last but six pin of the lower HEADER is connected to the power alarm cable. In practical, pins
2532 of the lower HEADER provide an AMP connector. When CC04PWX/H301PMX is
configured, the power alarm cable is not needed.
y
Connect the upper HEADER of the TSS as follows: the last but seven pin is connected with the
cable from the DSL, working as the ISDN auxiliary interface. The last but six pin is connected with
the ISDN telephone set.
TSS board
Connect the upper HEADER of the TSS as follows: the seventh pin is connected to the cable from
the ASL, working as the auxiliary test port.
Note:
z
If eight E1 channels are connected to the RSP-10 subscriber frame, four E1 channels are connect to
the left RSP, and the other four to the right RSP.
To realize the inter-frame power mutual aid, the RSP-10 subscriber frame can only cooperate with
other RSP-10 subscriber frames or the RSP-14 subscriber frame. The mutual aid happens between
every two frames.

2.9.1 Overview
The RSP-14 subscriber frame is used in the ONU-F01&02A. It supplies multiple types
of service interfaces through cooperating with upper-layer control boards. It can
provide various convergence ratios, such as 1:1, 1:2, 1:4 and 1:8. The frame can house
up to 14 subscriber boards.
2-25


The backplane of the RSP-14 subscriber frame is the HUNM. The frame contains the
following boards.
z
RSP
PWX
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112131415 16 17
P
W
X
A A A A A A A R R A A A A A A A
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L P P L L L L L L L
Figure 2-19 Configuration of the RSP-14 subscriber frame

Figure 2-20 shows the rear view of the RSP-14 subscriber frame.
2-26

Figure 2-20 Rear view of the RSP-14 subscriber frame

Table 2-14 describes the external interfaces of the RSP-14 frame (excluding the
Table 2-14 External interfaces of the RSP-14 frame (excluding the interfaces on the HEADER)
Interface ID
Function
F1, F2
F3
F4
Providing the 24V power safety.
JA1, JA2
Power alarm socket, connected to power alarm line from

other frame while multiple cascading. JA1is for input,
while JA2 for output.

alarms.
JA3
JA4, JA5
Equalized current socket. In the equalized current

subtending of multiple frames, JA4 is for output and JA5
for input.
Providing the subtending of equalized

current.
JC1, JC2
ESC serial ports socket (RJ45). JC2 (corresponding to

the left PV8/PV4) and JC3 (corresponding to the right
PV8/PV4) are connected to the ESC through cables
(RJ45).
Providing serial ports for the ESC.
JD1
Providing the feed and ringing current.
2-27

Interface ID
Function
JD2
JD3
24 V power socket, connected to the 24 V.
Providing the 24 V power.
JE1, JE2
Power mutual assistance socket. JE1 is for input and JE2

for output.
Providing the mutual aid of inter-frame

power and ringing current.
JF1
GND socket, connected to the GND.
JL1
JT1, JT2
Test bus socket, connected to the TSS test bus from

other frames. JT1 is for input and JT2 for output.
Providing the subtending interface of test

bus.
Note:
Table 2-15 Interfaces on the header of the RSP-14 frame

Board type
HEADER description
ASL board
HEADER on the ASL board are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 16
subscribers. As for the DSL board, the eight pins of its upper HEADER are not connected to
with subscriber lines.
A32 board
RSP board
Pins 1724 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 12 of the RSP. Pins 2532 of
the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 34.
Mark: In the quasi-local mode, both pins 1724 and pins 2532 of the lower HEADER on the left and right RSPs can
provide eight differential interfaces.
Note:
z
If eight E1 channels are connected to the RSP-14 subscriber frame, four E1 channels are connected to
the left RSP board, and four to the right one.
The RSP-14 subscriber frame has only one PWX. To ensure the reliable running of the system, the
RSP-14 subscriber frame shall has the mutual aid of power and ringing current with other
control/subscriber frames. The mutual aid may happen between two frames, or between every two
frames when there are three frames.
The RSP-14 subscriber frame does not support the TSS. To test subscriber boards, connect the frame
with the TSS test buses of other frames through the test bus socket JT1 and JT2.
2-28


2.10.1 Overview
The RSP-14 subscriber frame is used in the ONU-1000A and is at the subscriber side.
It can provide various service interfaces to subscribers. Each frame contains 19
subscriber boards.

The backplane of the RSP-19 subscriber frame is the HCB. The frame contains the
following boards.
z
RSP
TSS
PWX

00 01
02 03 04 05 06
07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
P A AAA A A AA AA RR A AAA A A AA AT P
W SSSS SSSSSSSS SSSS SSSSSS W
X L L L L L L L L L L PP L L L L L L L L L S X
Figure 2-21 Configuration of the RSP-19 subscriber frame

Figure 2-22 shows the external interfaces of the RSP-19 subscriber frame.
2-29

Figure 2-22 External interfaces of the RSP-19 subscriber frame

Table 2-17 describes the external interfaces of the RSP-19 subscriber frame (excluding
the interface on the HEADER).
Table 2-16 External interfaces of the RSP-19 subscriber frame (excluding the interface on the HEADER)
Interface ID
Function
F1
Providing the fuses of the feed and ringing

current
F2-F3
Providing the safety fuse of the power supply
J0
Connected to the coaxial cable from the clock

frame.
Providing the extended external clock source.
JA1
Connected to the cable from the last but six pin of

the lower HEADER on the TSS.
Providing power alarms.
JA2
Connected to the power alarm cable from other

frames
Providing the subtending of power alarms.
JP1-JP5
Connected to PGND, B48V, S48V1, GND and

S48V2 respectively.
Providing the power supply and grounding.
JP6
Reserved.
Reserved.
JP8-JP9
Connected to the monitoring cable from the ESC.
Providing the monitoring

environment and power.
JP10-JP11
Connected to the printing cable from the RSP.
For debugging only
JT1-JT2
Connected to the TSS test bus of other frames.
Providing the subtending interface of the test

bus.
JT3-JT4
Reserved.
Reserved.
2-30
interface
for

Interface ID
Function
XR1, XR8
Connected to the coaxial E1 input cables of the

left and right RSPs respectively.
Providing the first E1 input interface of both the

left and right RSPs.
XT1, XT8
Connected to the coaxial E1 input cables of the

left and right RSPs respectively.
Providing the first E1 input interface of both the

left and right RSPs.
Caution:
z
Do not connect the B48V, S48V1 and S48V2 power cables to the JP7 socket. Otherwise, the board will
be damaged.
The environment and power monitoring interface JP8 is connected to the RSPL, and JP9 to the RSPR.
When the ESC is configured with the left RSP, the DB-9 connector of the environment and power
monitoring cable shall be connected to JP8.
Table 2-17 Interfaces on the HEADER of the RSP-19 subscriber frame

Board type
Interface description
ASL board
HEADER on the ASL are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 16 subscribers. As for
the DSL, the eight pins of its upper HEADER are not connected with subscriber lines.
A32 board
Pins 18 and pins 916 of the upper HEADER, pins 1724 and pins 2532 of the lower HEADER on
the A32 are connected with subscriber lines, corresponding to 32 subscribers.
RSP board
Pins 1724 of the upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 12 of the RSP. Pins 2532 of the
upper HEADER correspond to E1 interfaces 34 of the RSP.
In the quasi-local mode, pins 1724 and pins 2532 of the lower HEADER on the left and right RSPs
provide 18 differential interfaces.
The last but six pin of the lower HEADER is connected to the power alarm cable.
y
TSS board
Connect the upper HEADER of the TSS as follows: the last but seven pin is connected with the
cable from the DSL, working as the ISDN auxiliary interface. The last but six pin is connected with
the ISDN telephone set.
y
Connect the upper HEADER of the TSS as follows: the seventh pin is connected to the cable from
the ASL, working as the auxiliary test port.
2-31

Note:
z
If eight E1 channels are connected to the RSP-19 subscriber frame, four E1 channels are connect to
the left RSP, and four to the right one.
When the RSP-19 subscriber frame is connected to the PV8, it is connected to the HWC or PV8
through differential interfaces. The differential interfaces are at pins 1724 and pins 2532 of the lower
HEADER on the left and right RSPs. In this case, E1 interfaces are unavailable. When the RSP
subscriber frame is connected to the transmission unit or trunk board through E1 interfaces, the
differential interfaces are also unavailable.
2-32

Chapter 3 Introduction to Boards

3.1 ATM Service Processing Board (H601APMA)
3.1.1 Overview
The H601APMA board is the ATM service processing board, also called the broadband
control board. It controls the UA5000 broadband subscriber boards, and provides the
broadband switching resources, clock frequencies and various interfaces for upstream
broadband services. Two H601APMA boards work in hot backup mode.
The H601APMA board has two interfaces for subboards:
z
One is at the front panel side for the ATM optical interface subboard (supporting
155 Mbit/s) or the VP Ring optical interface board (supporting 622 Mbit/s).
The other is at the backplane side for CES subboard, IMA E1 subboard or ATM E3
subboard.
3.1.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-1 shows the front panel of the H601APMA board.
3-1

RUN
ETH
CON
High speed signal interface
ACT
APMA
RESET
Figure 3-1 Front panel of the H601APMA board

Table 3-1 describes the front panel.
Table 3-1 Front panel description of the H601APMA board
Name
Color
Meaning
Description
Indicating the work status of the board.
Blinking at the rate of 0.5 Hz (ON for one second, OFF for
one second periodically): the board is running normally.
RUN
Red
Running
indicator
ACT
Green
Active-standby
indicator
RESET
NA
Manual
resetting switch
Resetting the system.
CON
NA
Maintenance
serial port
Providing the local maintenance and remote maintenance.

The system is configured through the command lines with
the tools such as hyper terminal.
ON: the board is active.

OFF: the board is standby.
3-2

Name
ETH
High
speed
signal
interface
Color
Meaning
Description
NA
Maintenance
network
interface
Providing the 10Base-T network management interface for

the system maintenance and configuration.
NA
High
speed
signal interface
Providing different high speed signal interfaces in the front

panel by applying different subboards, including 155 Mbit/s
ATM optical interface and 622 Mbit/s VP Ring optical
interfaces.
3.1.3 Pin Assignment between Board and Backplane

See Figure 3-2 for the pin assignment between the H601APMA board and backplane.
(It's the front view of the backplane.)
Lower connector J8 signal pin
a b c d e
Lower connector J4 signal pin
25
25
20
20
15
15
10
10
1
a b c d e
Figure 3-2 Pin assignment between the H601APMA board and backplane
J4 and J8 in Figure 3-2 are the lower connectors in the H601APMA backplane,
corresponding to two slots of broadband control boards. E1 cables connect to pin rows
1-4 and pin rows 6-9 at the lower part. Table 3-2 lists the signal definitions of pin rows
1-9.
3-3

Table 3-2 Signal definition of the H601APMA backplane pins

Column
TXA1-R
TXA1-T
PGND
RXA1-R
RXA1-T
TXA5-R
TXA5-T
PGND
RXA5-R
RXA5-T
TXA2-R
TXA2-T
PGND
RXA2-R
RXA2-T
TXA6-R
TXA6-T
PGND
RXA6-R
RXA6-T
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
PGND
TXA3-R
TXA3-T
PGND
RXA3-R
RXA3-T
TXA7-R
TXA7-T
PGND
RXA7-R
RXA7-T
TXA4-R
TXA4-T
PGND
RXA4-R
RXA4-T
TXA8-R
TXA8-T
PGND
RXA8-R
RXA8-T
Row
See Figure 3-3 for the description of the numbering.
TXA1-T
T for tip
R for ring
T for transmitting Serial number of

R for receiving
E1 signal cable
Figure 3-3 Pin numbering
3.1.4 Subboard
I. Overview
Table 3-3 lists the subboards supported by the H601APMA board.
Table 3-3 Description of subboards supported by the H601APMA board
Name
Interface
Description
1310 nm, single-mode, 15 km, SC.
H601V2HAF
Two 622 Mbit/s VP

Ring optical interfaces
Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel side.

This subboard is used when one APMA board is configured
and the UA5000 is used as an ONU.
1310 nm, single-mode, 15 km, SC.
H602V2HAF
Two 622 Mbit/s VP


This subboard is used when the UA5000 is used as an
ONU.
3-4

Name
Interface
H601V2HAG
Two 622 Mbit/s VP

H602V2HAG
Two 622 Mbit/s VP

H602V1HAF
One 622 Mbit/s VP

H602V1HAG
One 622 Mbit/s VP

H602V1HTF
One 622 Mbit/s VP

Ring optical interface
H602V1HTG
One 622 Mbit/s VP

H602V2HCF
Two 622 Mbit/s VP

H602V2HCF
Two 622 Mbit/s VP

H602V2HCG
Two 622 Mbit/s VP

H602V1HCF
One 622 Mbit/s VP

H602V1HCG
One 622 Mbit/s VP

Description
1310 nm, single-mode, 40 km, SC. Subboard of the
H601APMA at the front panel side.
ONU.
ONU.
One-port, single-mode, 15 km, or one-port multi-mode 2
km, SC. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel side.
ONU.
One-port, single-mode, 40 km, or one-port multi-mode 2
ONU.
One-port, single-mode, 15 km, SC, one electrical interface.
ONU.
One-port, single-mode, 40 km, SC, one electrical interface.
ONU.
It has stratum-3 clock, which is used for the VP Ring when
the UA5000 one-layer networking mode is adopted.
One-port, single-mode 15 km, or one-port multi-mode, 2
One-port, single-mode, 40 km, or one-port, multi-mode, 2
3-5

Name
H602V1HEF
H602V1HEG
Interface
One 622 Mbit/s VP

One 622 Mbit/s VP

H601O1CN
H
One-port
155
M
single-mode
optical
interface board, 60 kM
H601O2CN
H
Two-port
155M
single-mode
optical
interface board, 60 km
Description
One-port, single-mode, 15 km, SC, or one electrical
interface. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel
side.
One-port, single-mode, 40 km, SC, or one electrical
interface. Subboard of the H601APMA at the front panel
side.
ONU.
ONU.
Single-mode, 30 km, SC. Subboard of the H601APMA at
the front panel side.
H601O2CN
G
Two 155 Mbit/s ATM

optical interfaces
H601O2CNB
Two 155 Mbit/s ATM

optical interfaces
H601CESA
Eight E1 interfaces
Provides the circuit emulation service. Its the subboard at

the H601APMA side.
H601E8IA
Eight IMA E1 electrical

interfaces
Subboard of the H601APMA at the backplane side.
H601E23A
Two ATM E3/DS3(T3)

electrical interface
H601E13A
One ATM E3/DS3(T3)

electrical interface

ONU.
Multi-mode, 2 km, SC. Subboard of the H601APMA at the
front panel side.
ONU.
II. DIP switches and jumpers of H601CESA

There are four sets of DIP switches S1-S4 on the H601CESA board. S1 and S4 are
used to select the matching resistance of E1 port, S2 and S3 are used to set the
grounding of E1 port.
3-6

Table 3-4 DIP switchesS1 and S4 description of the H601CESA board

Switch
S1
75 cable
ON for Bits 18
120 cable
Note
OFF for Bits18
Bits 1-8 corresponding to E1 ports 18.

Used for the host query, consistent with S1.
S41
ON for Bits 14
OFF for Bits14
Only S41 is applied, others are reserved by

the system.
Table 3-5 DIP switchesS2 and S3 description of the H601CESA board

Switch
Connected to PGND
Suspended
Note
S1
ON
OFF
Used to set E1 ports 14
S4
ON
OFF
III. DIP switches and jumpers of H601E8IA

There are five sets of DIP switches S1S5 on the H601E8IA board:
S1 is used to query the port resistance, which should be consistent with S2 and
S4.
S2 and S4 are used to select the matching resistance of the port. The settings of
all 8 E1 ports should be the same.

S3 and S5 are used to select the balancing/unbalancing transmission (whether to
ground the E1 port).

Table 3-6 S1, S2 and S4 DIP switches description of the H601E8IA board
Switch
75 cable
Note
120 cable
S1
ON
OFF
Only S11 is applied, others are reserved.
S2
ON
OFF
S4
ON
OFF
Table 3-7 S3 and S5 DIP switches description of the H601E8IA board

Switch
Connected to PGND
Suspended
Note
S3
ON
OFF
S5
ON
OFF
3-7

3.2 IP Service Process Board (H601IPMA)

3.2.1 Overview
The H601IPMA board controls the UA5000 broadband subscriber boards, processes
various broadband services, such as ADSL, ADSL2+, VDSL, SHDSL and FE services,
and provides the IP upstream service.
The H601IPMA board provides the broadband switching resources. It works in
active/standby mode, and supports the active/standby switchover.
The FE interface provided by the IPMA board can be configured as:
z
Downstream interface, providing the Ethernet access service.
Subtending interface connecting slave frames.
Ethernet upstream interface (provided by the GE/FE interface of the subboard) for
connection with the MD5500.
See Figure 3-4 for details.

Backplane
1FE
PVM
1FE
1FE
PVM
1FE
4 LVDS subtending
interfaces
2FE/1GE
4 LVDS subtending
interfaces
IPMA
2 FE/GE upstream
interfaces
4FE
4FE
GE
Figure 3-4 External interfaces of the IPMA board

The board provides the following interfaces:
z
One FE interface (through the backplane) for connection with PVM board,
providing the IP channel for the VoIP service.
Four LVDS subtending interfaces.
Four FE interfaces.
Two FE/GE upstream interfaces (on the front panel).
One GE interface (through the backplane), providing broadband access service,

or serving as upstream interface.
See Table 3-8 for the subboards of the IPMA board.
3-8

Table 3-8 List of IPMA subboards

Subboard
Description
H601E2FN
2-port 10/100 M Ethernet electrical interface subboard
H601O2FNF
2-port 10/100 M Ethernet optical interface subboard (1310 nm, single-mode, 15 km,
LC interface)
H601O2FNB
2-port 10/100 M Ethernet optical interface subboard (1310 nm, multiple-mode, 2 km,
LC interface)
H601O1FNF
1-port 10/100 M Ethernet optical interface subboard (1310 nm, single-mode, 15 km,
LC interface)
H601O1FNB
1-port 10/100 M Ethernet optical interface subboard (1310 nm, multiple-mode, 2 km,
LC interface)
H601O1GNE
1-port GE optical interface subboard (1310 nm, single-mode, 10 km, LC interface)
H601O1GNA
1-port GE optical interface subboard (850 nm, multiple-mode, 500 m, LC interface)
H601O1GNG
1-port GE optical interface subboard (1510 nm, single-mode, 40 km, LC interface)
3.2.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-5 shows the front panel of the H601IPMA board.
3-9

RUN
ACT
ETH
COM
Ethernet
interface
IPMA
RESET
Figure 3-5 Front panel of the H601IPMA board

Table 3-9 describes the front panel of the H601IPMA board.
Table 3-9 Front panel description of the H601APMA board
Name
RUN
Color
Red
Meaning
Indicating the
work status of
the board.
Description
Blinking at the frequency of 8 Hz: the system is starting up.
Blinking at the frequency of 0.5 Hz: the board is working
normally.
Constantly ON or OFF: the board is faulty.
ACT
Green
Active-standby
indicator
ON: the board is active. OFF: the board is standby.
RESET
NA
Manual resetting
switch
Used to reset the system.
COM
NA
Maintenance
serial port
RJ45 interface, providing the local and remote

maintenance functions.
3-10

Name
Color
Meaning
Description
ETH
NA
Maintenance
network
interface
RJ45 interface, providing the 10Base-T network

management interface for the system maintenance and
configuration.
Ethernet
interface
NA
Ethernet
interface
The H601IPMA board can provide different Ethernet

interfaces, such as FE optical (electrical) interface and GE
optical interface, through its subboards.
3.2.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers

There is no DIP switch or jumper on the IPMA board.

Figure 3-6 shows the pin assignment between the H601IPMA board and backplane.
(It's the rear view of the backplane.)
Back connector of the IPMA board
J6 signal pin
in the
middle/upper
connector
J2 signal pin
in the
middle/upper
connector
J1
J5
25
25
20
20
15
15
10
10
J2
J6
J3
J7
J8
a b c d e
J4
a b c d e
a b c d e
J4 signal
pin in the
lower
connector
J8 signal
pin in the
lower
connector
25
25
20
20
15
15
10
10
1
a b c d e
Figure 3-6 Signal definition for the H601AIUA board connectors

In Figure 3-6, J6 and J2 are the upper and middle connectors; J8 and J4 are the lower
connectors of the H601IPMA board.
z
The four subtended LVDS signal cables are connected to 1st4th and 6th96th
rows of pins in J2 and J6.
The four FE signal cables are connected to 1st4th and 6th96th rows of pins in
J8 and J4.
Table 3-10 and Table 3-11 define the 1st96th rows of pins.
3-11

Table 3-10 Definition of J6 and J2 connectors of the H601IPMA backplane

Pin serial number of J6 and J2 connectors (row)
9
LVDS signal
First LVDS signal
8
7
Second LVDS signal
6
5
NA
Third LVDS signal
3
2
Four LVDS signal
Table 3-11 Definition of J4 and J8 connectors of the H601IPMA backplane

Pin serial number of J4 and J8 connectors (row)
9
FE interface
First FE interface
8
7
Second FE interface
6
5
NA
Third FE interface
3
2
Fourth FE interface
3.3 V5 Protocol Processing and Control Board

(H303PV8/H303PV4)
3.3.1 Overview
The H303PV8/H303PV4 board is the V5 protocol processing and control board, also
called the narrowband control board. It controls the narrowband subscriber boards, and
provides the upstream E1 interface, switching resources and working clock for
narrowband services.
3-12

The H303PV8/H303PV4 board is usually used in pair, with two boards working in
active/standby mode to make the system more reliable. However, E1 interfaces do not
work in active/standby mode. When two H303PV8/H303PV4 boards are applied, the
E1 interface will be double.
z
Each H303PV8 board provides 8 E1 interfaces, 8 TTL HW interfaces and 32

extended differential HW interfaces.
A pair of H303PV8 boards can provide 16 E1 interfaces, 8 TTL HW interfaces and

32 extended differential HW interfaces.
The difference between the H303PV8 board and the H303PV4 board is: the H303PV4
board has 4 E1 interfaces.
Through these E1 interfaces, the H303PV8/H303PV4 board can be interconnected or
cascaded with local exchange, optical line terminal or optical network unit.
Depending on the interconnected upstream equipment, the H303PV8/H303PV4
software varies and possesses different features accordingly.
I. Interconnected with local exchange and HONET GV5

The H303PV8/H303PV4 supports V5 interface. The system clock can be synchronized
to any one of 16 E1 channels. Moreover, the local oscillator clock can work as the
system clock. The system monitors the status of timing source at any time, implements
the protection switchover according to the preset priority of clock source (up to 8 clock
source priorities).
II. Interconnected with MD5500

The H303PV8/H303PV4 does not support V5 interface. The MD5500 controls the
H303PV8/H303PV4 board through internal protocol. The system clock is preset at port
0 of two H303PV8/H303PV4 boards (synchronized to E1 channel) and the local
oscillator clock of two H303PV8/H303PV4 boards. H303PV8/H303PV4 monitors the
status of the timing source in real time, selects the clock source and implements the
protection switchover according to the priority of the clock source. The priority (from
high to low) of the clock sources is set as follows.
1)
The first E1 interface of the active H303PV8/H303PV4 board
2)
The first E1 interface of the standby H303PV8/H303PV4 board
3)
The active local oscillator clock
4)
The standby local oscillator clock
3.3.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-7 shows the front panels of the H303PV8 and H303PV4 boards.
3-13

RUN
RUN
CLK
CLK
V5S
V5S
V5L
V5L
MSL
MSL
COM
COM
E1S
E1S
NOD
NOD
ETN
ETN
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(3)
(4)
(4)
PV8
PV4
(1) Reset switch
(2) DIP switch
(3) NM serial port
(4) Reserved serial port
Figure 3-7 Front panels of the H303PV8 and H303PV4 boards

Table 3-12 describes the front panels of the H303PV8 and H303PV4 boards.
Table 3-12 Front panel description of the H303PV8 and H303PV4 boards
Name
RUN
Color
Red
Meaning
Description
Running indicator: It
indicates the running
status, active/standby
board status, and
loading status of the
board program.
ON for one second and OFF for one

second periodically: the active board
is
normal.
ON for 0.1 seconds and OFF for 1.9
seconds periodically: standby board
is
normal.
seconds
periodically:
smooth
switching from standby mode to
active
mode.
ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for
0.25 seconds periodically: the
system is being loaded, or the
active-standby mode is not yet
determined.
Blinking at a rate of higher than 4 Hz:
the loading program is being
decompressed.
3-14
Normal
status
Active board:
ON for one
second and
OFF for one
second
periodically.
Standby
board: ON for
0.1 seconds
and OFF for
1.9 seconds
periodically.

Name
CLK
Meaning
Description
Green
Indicator
of
active/standby status
of the board clock
ON: this board clock is active.

OFF: this board clock is standby.
ON/OFF
For the active board:
If the V5
interface is
provided, the
active board
is constantly
ON, and the
standby
board
is
constantly
OFF.
ON: all interfaces are normal.

OFF: all interfaces are abnormal.
V5S
Green
Indicator of interface
status
Blinking: some interfaces are

abnormal. The more abnormal
interfaces, the higher the blinking
frequency.
Constantly OFF.
If no V5
interface is
provided,
both
the
active
and
standby
boards are
constantly
OFF.
If the V5
interface is
provided, the
active board
is constantly
ON, and the
standby
board
is
constantly
OFF.
For the standby board:
ON: all links are normal.

OFF: all links are abnormal.
V5L
Normal
status
Color
Green
link status
Blinking: some links are abnormal. If

there are more abnormal links, the
blinking frequency is higher.
Constantly OFF.
MSL
Green
Indicator
of
active/standby board
communication link
status
COM
Green
NM
serial
indicator
port
3-15
If no V5
interface is
provided,
both
the
active
and
standby
boards are
constantly
OFF.
ON for 1. 9 seconds and OFF for 0.1

seconds periodically: links are
normal.
OFF: links are abnormal.
ON for 1. 9
seconds and
OFF for 0.1
seconds
periodically.
ON: communication is normal.

OFF: communication is abnormal.
ON

Name
E1S
Color
Green
Normal
status
Meaning
Description
E1 interface status
indicator
Display the status of E1 interface of

this board through the DIP switch on
the
panel.
ON: E1 interface is normal.
OFF: E1 interface frame is out of
synchronization or loses carrier.
seconds periodically: bit slip.
seconds: remote frame is out of
synchronization.
ON

0.25 seconds periodically: failed to
communicate with the host.
second: start to run normally after
configuration.
ON for one
second and
OFF for one
second
periodically.
NOD
Green
Master/slave
node
communication
indicator
ETN
Green
Reserved
NA
ON
Reset
switch
NA
Reset switch
Used for resetting the board.
NA
NM serial
port
NA
NM serial port
RS-232 serial port, RJ-45 connector,

used as the front-access network
management interface.
NA

Figure 3-8 shows the layout of the H303PV8 board.
3-16

H303PV8
J902
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
1 2
J1000
J1400
1 2
1 2
J1100
J1500
1 2
1 2
J1200
J1600
1 2
1 2
J1300
J1700
S102
J903
HGB
HFB
HCB
HDB
Figure 3-8 Layout of the H303PV8 board

H303PV4
J902
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
J1000
1 2
J1100
1 2
J1200
1 2
J1300
S102
J903
HGB
HFB
HCB
HDB
Figure 3-9 Layout of the H303PV4 boards
3-17

I. DIP switch S102

When the system is powered on or reset, the DIP switches S102-X (Figure 3-7 (2))
determines the BIOS working mode. Table 3-13 lists its specific functions.
Table 3-13 Settings of the S102 (in the case that the system is powered on or reset)
Status
ON
DIP switch
OFF
S102-1
Load program
Not to load program
S102-2
Load data
Not to load data
S102-3
Program and data are not written to the

Flash memory/Load logic
Program and data are written to

the Flash memory/Load logic
S102-4
Reserved
II. Set the DIP switch S102-3 as follows:

1)
Setting the S102-3 to ON is only for delivery test and cannot be performed by
users.
2)
When the S102-1 or the S102-2 is set to ON and the S102-3 is set to OFF, the
loaded program or data will be written into the Flash memory for the power-off
protection.
During the normal operation of the system, the setting of DIP switch S102 will specify
the E1 channel whose status is to be displayed by the E1S indicator. See Table 3-14 for
details, where 0 stands for OFF, and 1 for ON.
Table 3-14 Settings of the S102 of the H303PV8/H303PV4 board
DIP switch S102-321
E1 number
000
1
001
2
010
3
011
4
100
5
101
6
110
7
111
8
III. Jumpers J1000, J1100, J1200, J1300, J1400, J1500, J1600 and J1700
These jumpers are used to select the matching impedance at the E1 receiving end.
See Table 3-15.
Table 3-15 Settings of jumpers of the H303PV8/H303PV4 board
Status
ON
DIP Switch
OFF
Factory setting
Control
1#E1
J1000-1
75
120
ON
J1000-2
75
120
ON
Control
J1100-1
75
120
ON
3-18

Status
ON
DIP Switch
OFF
Factory setting
2#E1
J1100-2
75
120
ON
Control
3#E1
J1200-1
75
120
ON
J1200-2
75
120
ON
J1300-1
75
120
ON
J1300-2
75
120
ON
J1400-1
75
120
ON
J1400-2
75
120
ON
J1500-1
75
120
ON
J1500-2
75
120
ON
J1600-1
75
120
ON
J1600-2
75
120
ON
J1700-1
75
120
ON
J1700-2
75
120
ON
Control
4#E1
Control
5#E1
Control
6#E1
Control
7#E1
Control
8#E1
75 and 120 are the matching impedances of the E1 transmission terminal.

z
For the 75 matching impedance, use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable) for
transmission.
For the 120 matching impedance, use the balanced cable (differential symmetric
pair) for transmission.
IV. Jumper J902

Jumper J902 is used to specify whether to ground the shielding layer of the E1 sending
end. Table 3-16 lists the setting methods.
Table 3-16 Settings of jumper J902
Status
DIP switch
ON
OFF
Factory setting
1#E1
J902-1
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
2#E1
J902-2
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
3#E1
J902-3
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
4#E1
J902-4
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
5#E1
J902-5
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
6#E1
J902-6
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
3-19

Status
DIP switch
ON
OFF
Factory setting
7#E1
J902-7
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
8#E1
J902-8
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
V. Jumper J903
This jumper is reserved for the system. By default, the end with silk-screened HGB is
short circuited. If the applied backplane is not the HGB, the other end will be short
circuited.

Figure 3-10 and Figure 3-11 show the connection between the H303PV8/H303PV4
boards and backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)
Figure 3-10 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the H303PV8/H303PV4 board
3-20

Figure 3-11 Signal definition of lower HEADER connector on the H303PV8/H303PV4 board
The PV8 board provides up to 8 E1 interfaces, distributed on the 17th32nd rows of pins
(in columns A and C), as shown in Figure 3-11. See below for the meanings of the
characters on the pins.
z
R and T at the very beginning: receiving and transmitting of E1 signal for the
PV8.
Number: E1 number.
R and T at the end: ring and tip of the shielding layer of E1 signal cable.
The table below lists the definitions of other signals.

Table 3-17 Definitions of other signals
Signal
Definition
SCCRXD
Receiving signal end of maintenance and network management communication serial

port.
SCCTXD
Transmitting signal end of maintenance and network management communication serial

port.
H2ML
Output, 2 M clock signal, for the left half of the frame (front view of the frame).
H2MR
Output, 2 M clock signal, for the right half of the frame (front view of the frame).
HFSL
Output, 8 k clock frame head signal, for the left half of the frame (front view of the frame).
HFSR
Output, 8 k clock frame head signal, for the right half of the frame (front view of the frame).
PGND
Protection ground.
3-21

Signal
Definition
GND
Working ground.
+5 V
+5 V power supply.
3.4 V5 Protocol Processing and Control Board

(H302PV8/H302PV4)
3.4.1 Overview
The H302PV8/H302PV4 board is the V5 protocol processing and control board. It
controls the narrowband subscriber board, provides the upstream E1 interface,
switching resources and working clock for narrowband services.
The H302PV8/H302PV4 board is usually used in pair, with two boards working in
active/standby mode to make the system more reliable. However, E1 interfaces do not
have the active-standby function. When two H302PV8/H302PV4 boards are applied,
the E1 interface resources will be double.
z
Each H302PV8 board provides 8 E1 interfaces, 8 TTL HW interfaces and 32

extended differential HW interfaces.
A pair of H302PV8 boards can provide 16 E1 interfaces, 8 TTL HW interfaces and

32 extended differential HW interfaces.
Compared with the H302PV8 board, the functions and performances of the H302PV4
board are the same, except the H302PV4 board has 4 E1 interfaces.
Through these E1 interfaces, the H302PV8/H302PV4 board can be interconnected or
cascaded with the local exchange (LE), Optical Line Terminal (OLT) or ONU SSM
module.
Depending on the interconnected upstream equipment, the H303PV8/H303PV4
software varies and possesses different features accordingly.
I. Interconnected with the LE and HONET GV5

H303PV8/H303PV4 supports V5 interface. The system clock can be synchronized to
any one of 16 E1 channels. Moreover, the local oscillator clock can work as the system
clock. The system monitors the status of timing source at any time, implements the
protection switchover according to the preset priority of clock source (up to 8 clock
source priorities).
II. Interconnected with the MD5500

H303PV8/H303PV4 does not support V5 interface. The MD5500 controls the
H303PV8/H303PV4 board through internal protocol. The system clock is preset at port
0 (E1 clock signal) of two H303PV8/H303PV4 boards and at the local oscillator clock of
3-22

two H303PV8/H303PV4 boards. The H303PV8/H303PV4 board monitors the status of

the timing source in real time, selects the clock source and implements the protection
switchover according to the priority of the clock source. The priority (from high to low) of
the clock sources is set as follows:
1)
The first E1 interface of the active H303PV8/H303PV4 board
2)
The first E1 interface of the standby H303PV8/H303PV4 board
3)
The active local oscillator clock
4)
The standby local oscillator clock
3.4.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-12 shows the front panels of the H302PV8 and H302PV4 boards.
RUN
RUN
CLK
CLK
V5S
V5S
V5L
V5L
MSL
MSL
COM
COM
E1S
E1S
NOD
NOD
ETN
ETN
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(3)
(4)
(4)
PV8
(1) Reset switch
PV4
(2) Dip switch
(3) NM serial port
Figure 3-12 Front panels of the H302PV8 and H302PV4 boards

Table 3-18 describes the front panels of the H302PV8 and H302PV4 boards.
3-23

Table 3-18 Front panel description of the H302PV8 and H302PV4 boards
Name
RUN
CLK
Meaning
Description
Normal
status
Red
indicates the running
status,
status, and loading
status of board
program.

is normal.
ON for 0.1s and OFF for 1.9 seconds
periodically: standby board is
normal.
seconds periodically: smooth
active mode.
determined.
Blinks at a rate of higher than 4 Hz:
decompressed.
Active board:
ON for one
second and
OFF for one
second
periodically.
Standby
board: ON for
0.1 seconds
and OFF for
1.9 seconds
periodically.
Green
Indicator of
active/standby
status of the board
clock

ON/OFF
If the V5
interface is
provided, the
active board
is constantly
ON, and the
standby
board is
constantly
OFF.
Color

V5S
Green
status

abnormal. If there are more
abnormal interfaces, the blinking is
higher.
Constantly OFF.
3-24
If no V5
interface is
provided,
both the
active and
standby
boards are
constantly
OFF.

Name
Color
Meaning
Description

V5L
Green
link status
Blinking: some links are abnormal.

IF there are more abnormal links, the
blinking is higher.
Constantly OFF.
Normal
status
If the V5
interface is
provided, the
active board
is constantly
ON, and the
standby
board is
constantly
OFF.
If no V5
interface is
provided,
both the
active and
standby
boards are
constantly
OFF.

normal.
ON for 1. 9
seconds and
OFF for 0.1
seconds
periodically.
MSL
Green
Indicator of
communication link
status
COM
Green
NM serial port
indicator

ON
E1 interface status
indicator

this board through setting the DIP
switch on the panel.
seconds periodically: remote frame
is out of synchronization.
ON

configuration.
ON for one
second and
OFF for one
second
periodically.
E1S
Green
NOD
Green
Master/slave node
communication
indicator
ETN
Green
Reserved
NA
ON
Reset
switch
NA
Reset switch
NA
NM serial
port
NA
NM serial port

used as front-access-cabled
network management interface.
NA
3-25


ON
H302PV8
S0501
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
1 2
S1101
1 2
ON
S1302
1 2
ON
1 2
ON
S1102
S1301
1 2
ON
S1201
S1401
1 2
ON
1 2
ON
ON
ON
S1202
S1402
S0102
S0101
HGB
J0604
J0101
J0403
HFB
HCB
HDB

3-26

ON
H302PV4
S0501
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2
S1101
1 2
ON
S1102
1 2
ON
S1201
1 2
ON
S1202
ON
S0101
J0604
HGB
HFB
HCB
HDB
I. DIP switch S0101

When the system is powered on or reset, the DIP switch S0101 ((2) in Figure 3-12)
determines the BIOS working mode. Table 3-19 lists its specific functions.
Table 3-19 Settings of the S0101 (in the case that the system is powered on or reset)
Status
ON
DIP switch
OFF
S0101-1
Load program
Not to load program
S0101-2
Load data
Not to load data
S0101-3
Program and data are not written to the

Flash memory/Load logic
Program and data are not written

to the Flash memory/Load logic
S0101-4
Load logic
Set the DIP switch S0101-3 as follows:

z
Setting the S0101-3 to ON is only for delivery test and can not be performed by
users.
Set both S0101-4 and S0101-3 to ON simultaneously to load logic. However, its
unnecessary for users to set them, because there is no need to change the logic.
When the S0101-1 or the S0101-2 is set to ON and the S0101-3 is set to OFF, the
loaded program or data will be written into the Flash memory for the power-off
protection.
3-27

During the normal operation of the system, which E1 link status will be shown by the
E1S indicator depends on the setting of DIP switch S0101, see Table 3-20. Here, 0
stands for OFF, and 1 stands for ON.
Table 3-20 Settings of the S0101 of the H302PV8/H302PV4 board (in the case that the host runs
normally)
DIP switch S0101-321
E1 number
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
II. DIP switches S1101, S1102, S1201, S1202, S1301, S1302, S1401, and S1402
These DIP switches are used to select the matching impedance at the E1 receiving end,
as shown in Table 3-21.
Table 3-21 Settings of the S1101-S1402 of the H302PV8/H302PV4 board
Status
ON
DIP Switch
OFF
Factory setting
Control
1#E1
S1101-1
75
120
ON
S1101-2
75
120
ON
Control
2#E1
S1102-1
75
120
ON
S1102-2
75
120
ON
Control
3#E1
S1201-1
75
120
ON
S1201-2
75
120
ON
Control
4#E1
S1202-1
75
120
ON
S1202-2
75
120
ON
Control
5#E1
S1301-1
75
120
ON
S1301-2
75
120
ON
Control
6#E1
S1302-1
75
120
ON
S1302-2
75
120
ON
Control
7#E1
S1401-1
75
120
ON
S1401-2
75
120
ON
Control
8#E1
S1402-1
75
120
ON
S1402-2
75
120
ON
3-28

z
transmission.
Configure the data and set the DIP switches according to the selected matching
impedance.
III. DIP switch S0501

This DIP switch is used to select whether the shielding layer at the transmitting end of
E1 is grounded or not. Table 3-22 lists the setting methods.
Table 3-22 Settings of the S0501
Status
DIP switch
ON
OFF
Factory setting
1# E1
S0501-1
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
2# E1
S0501-2
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
3# E1
S0501-3
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
4# E1
S0501-4
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
5# E1
S0501-5
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
6# E1
S0501-6
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
7# E1
S0501-7
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
8# E1
S0501-8
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
IV. Jumper J0604

short circuited. If the applied backplane is not the HGB, the other end will be short
circuited.

Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16 show the pin assignment between the H302PV8/H302PV4
boards and backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)
3-29

Figure 3-15 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the H302PV8/H302PV4 board
Figure 3-16 Signal definition of lower HEADER connector on the H302PV8/H302PV4 board
3-30

The PV8 board provides up to 8 E1 ports, distributed on the 17th32nd rows of pins (in
columns A and C), as shown in Figure 3-15. The characters on the pins are shown as
follows.
z
PV8.
Number: E1 number.
Table 3-23 lists the definitions of HEADER connector signals in Figure 3-16.
Table 3-23 Definitions of HEADER connector signals
Signal
Definition
SCCRXD
Receiving end of the communication serial port used for maintenance and network
management.
SCCTXD
Transmitting end of the communication serial port used for maintenance and network
management
H2ML
Output, 2 M clock signal, for the left half of the frame (front view of the frame).
H2MR
Output, 2 M clock signal, for the right half of the frame (front view of the frame).
HFSL
Output, 8 k clock frame head signal, for the left half of the frame (front view of the frame).
HFSR
Output, 8 k clock frame head signal, for the right half of the frame (front view of the frame).
PGND
Protection ground.
GND
Working ground.
+5 V
+5 V power supply.
3.5 V5 Interface Processing Board (H601PVU)

3.5.1 Overview
The H601PVU board, as the control board of the ONU frame applied in one-layer
networking mode, controls the narrowband subscriber boards or the slave frame, and
provides the upstream E1 interface, switching resources and working clock for
narrowband services.
Usually, two H601PVU boards are applied to work in the active/standby mode to make
the system more reliable. However, E1 interfaces do not work in the active/standby
mode. When two H601PVU boards are applied, the E1 interface is doubled.
Each H601PVU board provides 8 E1 interfaces, 8 TTL HW interfaces and 32 extended
differential HW interfaces. Two H601PVU boards can provide 16 E1 interfaces, 8 TTL
HW interfaces and 32 extended differential HW interfaces.
3-31

Through these E1 interfaces, the H601PVU board can be interconnected or subtended

with LE, OLT or ONU.
The H601PVU board has NM interface, by which the operator is able to configure it
using the command line terminal or NMS.
3.5.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-17 shows the front panels of the H601PVU board.
RUN
CLK
V5S
V5L
MSL
COM
E1S
NOD
ETN
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
PVU
(1) Reset switch
(2) DIP switch
(3) NM serial port
Figure 3-17 Front panel of the H601PVU board

Table 3-24 describes the front panel of the H601PVU board.
3-32

Table 3-24 Description of front panel of the H601PVU board

Name
RUN
CLK
Color
Meaning
Description
Red
indicates
the
running
status,
active/standby
board status, and
loading status of the
board program.

is
normal.
seconds periodically: standby board
is
normal.
seconds
periodically:
smooth
active
mode.
determined.
Blinking at a rate of higher than 4 Hz:
decompressed.
Green
Indicator
of
active/standby
status of the board
clock


V5S
Green
status

abnormal. The more abnormal
interfaces, the higher the blinking
frequency.
Constantly OFF.
3-33
Normal status
Active board:
ON for one
second
and
OFF for one
second
periodically.
Standby board:
ON for 0.1
seconds
and
OFF for 1.9
seconds
periodically.
ON/OFF
If
the
V5
interface
is
provided, the
active board is
constantly ON,
and the standby
board
is
constantly OFF.
If
no
V5
interface
is
provided, both
the active and
standby boards
are constantly
OFF.

Name
Color
Meaning
Description

V5L
Green
link status
Blinking: some links are abnormal. If

there are more abnormal links, the
blinking frequency is higher.
Constantly OFF.

normal.
ON for 1. 9
seconds
and
OFF for 0.1
seconds
periodically.

ON
E1 interface status
indicator

this board through the DIP switch on
the
panel.
seconds: remote frame is out of
synchronization.
ON

configuration.
ON for one
second
and
OFF for one
second
periodically.
MSL
Green
Indicator
of
active/standby
board
communication link
status
COM
Green
NM serial
indicator
Green
If
the
V5
interface
is
provided, the
active board is
constantly ON,
and the standby
board
is
constantly OFF.
If
no
V5
interface
is
provided, both
the active and
standby boards
are constantly
OFF.
E1S
Normal status
port
NOD
Green
Master/slave node
communication
indicator
ETN
Green
Reserved
NA
ON
Reset
switch
NA
Reset switch
NA
NM
serial
port
NA
NM serial port

used as the front-access network
management interface.
NA
3-34


Figure 3-18 shows the layout of the H601PVU board.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H601PVU
J902
1 2
1 2
J1000
J1400
1 2
1 2
J1100
J1500
1 2
1 2
J1200
J1600
1 2
1 2
J1300
J1700
S102
HGB
J903
HFB
HCB
HDB
Figure 3-18 Layout of the H601PVU board
I. DIP switch S102

During the normal operation of the system, the setting of DIP switch S102 will specify
the E1 channel whose status is to be displayed by the E1S indicator. See Table 3-25 for
details, where 0 stands for OFF and 1 for ON.
Table 3-25 Setting of DIP switch S102 of the H601PVU board
DIP switch S102-321
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
111
E1 number
II. Jumpers J1000, J1100, J1200, J1300, J1400, J1500, J1600 and J1700
These jumpers are used to select the matching impedance at the E1 receiving end.
See Table 3-26.
3-35

Table 3-26 Settings of jumpers of the H601PVU board

Status
ON
DIP Switch
Control 1#E1
Control 2#E1
Control 3#E1
Control 4#E1
Control 5#E1
Control 6#E1
Control 7#E1
Control 8#E1
OFF
Factory setting
J1000-1
75
120
ON
J1000-2
75
120
ON
J1100-1
75
120
ON
J1100-2
75
120
ON
J1200-1
75
120
ON
J1200-2
75
120
ON
J1300-1
75
120
ON
J1300-2
75
120
ON
J1400-1
75
120
ON
J1400-2
75
120
ON
J1500-1
75
120
ON
J1500-2
75
120
ON
J1600-1
75
120
ON
J1600-2
75
120
ON
J1700-1
75
120
ON
J1700-2
75
120
ON

z
transmission.
III. Jumper J902

Jumper J902 is used to specify whether to ground the shielding layer of the E1 sending
end. Table 3-27 lists the setting methods.
Table 3-27 Settings of jumper J902
Status
DIP switch
ON
OFF
Factory setting
1#E1
J902-1
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
2#E1
J902-2
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
3-36

Status
DIP switch
ON
OFF
Factory setting
3#E1
J902-3
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
4#E1
J902-4
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
5#E1
J902-5
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
6#E1
J902-6
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
7#E1
J902-7
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
8#E1
J902-8
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
IV. Jumper J903

short circuited. If the applied backplane is not the HGB, the other end needs to be short
circuited.

Figure 3-19 shows the pin assignment between the H601PVU board and backplane.
(Its the rear view of the backplane).
Figure 3-19 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the H601PVU board
3-37

The PVU board provides up to 8 E1 interfaces, distributed on the 17th32nd rows of

pins (in columns A and C), as shown in Figure 3-19. See below for the meanings of the
characters on the pins.
z
PV8.
Number: E1 number.
3.6 Remote Subscriber Processing Board (H303RSP)

3.6.1 Overview
The H303RSP board is the control unit of subscriber frame. Each H303RSP board
provides up to four E1 interfaces, eight TTL HW interfaces and eight differential HW
interfaces. One or two such boards can be installed into one frame. If there are two
H303RSP boards in the frame, they shall work in load sharing mode, and support
mutual aid in case of the failure of either H303RSP.
The H303RSP board has three types: H303RSP0, H303RSPA0 and H303RSPB0. See
Table 3-28 for their features and applied situations.
Table 3-28 Performance list of H303RSP series of boards
Board
Features
Applied
situation
Maximum usable
resource
Convergence
ratio
H303RSP0
Four
interfaces
E1
Situation with
heavy traffic.
Each board provides four

E1 interfaces or eight
differential HW interfaces.
1:1
1:2
H303RSPA0
One
interface
E1
Applied
universally.
Each board provides one

E1 interface or eight
1:4
H303RSPB0
No E1 interface
Applied along
with the PV8.
Each board provides eight

differential HW interfaces
1:1
1:2
1:4
Through E1 or differential HW interface, the H303RSP board

z
Communicates with the equipment of upper layer
Controls boards in the subscriber frame and
Converges the TTL HWs in the subscriber frame to E1 link or differential HW.
The convergence ratio, such as 1:1, 1:2 or 1:4, can be adjusted under the control of the
upper layer equipment.
3.6.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-20 shows the front panel of the H303RSP board.
3-38

RUN
AID
CLK
LNK1
LNK2
E11
E12
E13
E14
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
RSP
(1) Reset switch
(2) DIP switch
(3) Debugging serial port
(4) Monitoring serial port
Figure 3-20 Front panel of the H303RSP

Table 3-29 describes the front panel of the H303RSP board.
Table 3-29 Front panel description of the H303RSP board
Indicator
RUN
AID
CLK
Color
Explanation
Meaning
Normal state
Red
Running indicator

seconds periodically: the board is
abnormal.
ON for one second and OFF for one second
periodically: the board is normal.
ON for one second and

OFF for one second
periodically.
Green
Mutual aid
indicator
ON: mutually aid to the opposite board.

OFF: without mutual aid.
Corresponding board
abnormal: ON;
Corresponding board
normal: OFF
Green
Clock active
indicator
ON: this board provides system clock for

the current functional frame.
OFF: this board does not provide system
clock for the current functional frame.
ON/OFF
3-39

Indicator
Color
Explanation
LINK1
Green
Communication
links status
indicator
ON: communication with upper layer

equipment is normal.
OFF: communication with upper layer
equipment is abnormal.
ON
LINK2
Green
Reserved
Reserved
OFF
E1 status indicator
in the case of
remote work mode
E11E14
Meaning
It indicates the status of the first to the fourth

E1 links:
ON: the link is abnormal.
Normal state
OFF
OFF: the link is normal.

Before the RSP receives the HW
configuration of the host, the four E1
indicators are OFF.
Green
Quasi local work
mode
After the RSP receives the HW

configuration (suppose N HW cables are
configured), if N 4, the first N indicators
are OFF; and the rest are ON. Otherwise,
the four E1 indicators are OFF.
NA
Resetting
switch
NA
Resetting switch
Used to reset the board.
NA
Debugging
serial port
NA
Debugging serial
port
RS-232 serial port, RJ-45 connector, used

for debugging.
NA
Monitoring
serial port
NA
Monitoring serial
port
RS-232 serial port, RJ-45 connector. Its the

front leading-out interface used for the
environment and power supply monitoring.
NA

Figure 3-21 shows the layout of the H303RSP board.
Caution:
Do not set the DIP switches and Jumpers before unplugging the board from the backplane. Otherwise, the
board will be damaged.
3-40

H303RSP
4
2
4
2
15
H1
UA5
UC5
UB5
UD5
16
SH1
SG2
SG1
JZ4
JZ2
4 2
SG3
1
SG4
1
Figure 3-21 Layout of the H303RSP board
I. DIP switch SG1

Table 3-30 describes the settings of DIP switch SG1 of H303RSP board. Here, 0 stands
for OFF and 1 for ON.
Table 3-30 Settings of DIP switch SG1
DIP
switch
SG1
Status
1234
Meaning
1000
Software online upgrade in remote working mode
0000
Normal operation in remote working mode
0001
Local maintenance in remote working mode
0101
Local maintenance in quasi local working mode
1100
Software online upgrade in quasi local working mode
0100
Normal operation in quasi local working mode
Other
Reserved
3-41
Factory
setting
0000

Note:
The local maintenance is used for fault locating. At this time, the RSP board does not need to
communicate with upper layer equipment.
If the RSP board works in the default configuration, it will judge whether it is normal itself. Because the ring
back is performed to the E1 links, the E1 LEDs on the front panel will turn off.
II. Settings of jumpers UA5/UB5/UC5/UD5/SG3/SG4/SH1

When the line impedance is selected for E1, it not only sends signal at the transmitting
end according to the template defined in ITU-T G.703, but also adopts the
corresponding impedance matching at the receiving end. The involved jumpers include
UA5, UB5, UC5, UD5, SG3, SG4, SH1, The jumper SG4 is reserved. The settings of
UA5, UB5, UC5, and UD5 determine the impedance selection of the four E1 interfaces.
1)
Settings of jumper UA5, UB5, UC5, UD5 and SG3
Table 3-31 Settings of jumpers UA5, UB5, UC5, UD5 and SG3
Jumper
ON
OFF
Factory setting
UA5
75
120
ON
UB5
75
120
ON
UC5
75
120
ON
UD5
75
120
ON
SG3-1
75
120
ON
SG3-2
SG3-3
Reserved for the system.
ON
SG4
Note:
z
The settings of DIP switch will not take effect until you reset the board.
The impedances for 4 E1 interfaces on the board should be the same, either 120 or 75.
2)
Settings of jumper SH1
All are set to OFF when the line impedance is 120.
When the line impedance is 75, bits 14 of SH1 are used to set the grounding of
receiving shielding layer of 14 E1 interfaces, and bits 58 of SH1 are used to set
that of transmitting shielding layer of 58 E1 interfaces. Each jumper corresponds
3-42

to one E1 interface. ON: the shielding layer is connected with the PGND; OFF: the
shielding layer is not connected with the PGND.
z
When the line impedance is 75, ground the transmitting shielding layer, not the
receiving layer.

Figure 3-22 (upper HEADER) and Figure 3-23 (lower HEADER) show the connection
between the H303RSP board and backplane. (It is the front view of the backplane).
Figure 3-22 Connection between the H303RSP board and the backplane (upper HEADER)
The H303RSP board can connect externally with up to four E1 interfaces, which are
located on the 17th32nd rows of pins in the upper HEADER (Columns A and C). If the
AMP header is inserted to the 17th24th rows of pins, the first two E1 interfaces are led
out. When the AMP header is inserted to the 25th32nd rows of pins, the other two E1
interfaces are led out. See below for the meanings of the characters on the pins.
3-43

z
PV8.
Number: E1 number.
Figure 3-23 Connection between the H303RSP and the backplane (lower HEADER)
The H303RSP can externally connect up to eight differential HW signals.
The first four differential HW signals are distributed in the 17th24th rows of pins of
lower HEADER. Columns A and C include two differential HWs, the middle column
includes two differential HWs, as shown in Figure 3-23. These four differential HWs are
included in one AMP header.
The latter four differential HW signals are distributed in the 25th32nd rows of pins of
included in one AMP header. See below for the meanings of the characters on the pins.
z
H-UHW: upstream differential HW.
H-DHW: downstream differential HW.
Digital: number of differential HW.
+/-: Up/low levels of differential signal.
3-44

3.7 Remote Subscriber Processing Board (H302RSP)

3.7.1 Overview
The H302RSP board is the control unit of the slave frame. One or two such boards can
be installed into one frame. If there are two H302RSP boards in the frame, they shall
work in load sharing mode, and support mutual aid in case of the failure of either
H302RSP.
The H302RSP board has three types: H302RSP0, H302RSPA0 and H302RSPB0. See
Table 3-32 for their features and applied situations.
Table 3-32 Performance list of H302RSP series of boards
Features
Applied situation
Maximum usable
resource
H302RSP0
Four ports
of
E1
signals
Situation with heavy

traffic.
Each board provides four

E1 interfaces or eight
1:1
1:2
H302RSPA0
One port of
E1 signal
Applied universally.
Each board provides one

E1 interface or eight
1:4
H302RSPB0
No ports of
E1 signal
Applied along with

the PV8.
Each board provides eight

differential HW interfaces
1:1
1:2
1:4
Board
Convergence
ratio
Through E1 or differential HW interface, the H302RSP board

z
Communicates with the upper layer equipment.
Controls boards in the subscriber frame.
Converges the TTL HWs in the subscriber frame to E1 link or differential HW.
The convergence ratio, such as 1:1, 1:2 or 1:4, can be adjusted under the control of the
upper layer equipment.
3.7.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-24 shows the front panel of the H302RSP board.
3-45

RUN
AID
CLK
LNK1
LNK2
E11
E12
E13
E14
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
RSP
(1) Reset switch
(2) DIP switch
(3) Debugging serial port
(4) Monitoring serial port
Figure 3-24 Front panel of the H302RSP board

Table 3-33 describes the front panel of the H302RSP board.
Table 3-33 Front panel description of the H302RSP board
Indicator
RUN
AID
CLK
Color
Description
Red
Running
indicator
Green
Mutual
indicator
Green
aid
Clock
active
indicator
Meaning
Normal status

0.25 seconds periodically: the board
is
abnormal.
second periodically: the board is
normal.
ON for one
second and OFF
for one second
periodically.
ON: mutually aid to the opposite

board.
OFF: without mutual aid.
Board abnormal:
ON.
Board normal:
OFF
ON: this board provides system clock

for the current functional frame.
OFF: this board does not provide
system clock for the current functional
frame.
ON/OFF
3-46

Indicator
Color
Description
Meaning
LINK1
Green
Communication
links
status
indicator
ON: communication with upper layer

equipment
is
normal.
OFF: communication with upper layer
equipment is abnormal.
ON
LINK2
Green
Reserved
Reserved
OFF
E1
status
indicator in the
case of remote
work mode
It indicates the status of the first to the

fourth E1 links.
E11E14
ON: the link is abnormal.
Normal status
OFF
OFF: the link is normal.

Before the RSP receives the HW
configuration of the host, the four E1
indicators are OFF.
Green
Quasi local work
mode
After the RSP receives the HW

configuration (suppose N HW cables
are configured), if N 4, the first N
indicators are OFF; and the rest are
ON. Otherwise, the four E1 indicators
are OFF.
NA
Resetting
switch
NA
Resetting switch
NA
JZ4
NA
Debugging serial
port

used for debugging.
NA
NA
Monitoring serial
port
RS-232 serial port, RJ-45 connector.

Its the front leading-out interface
used for the environment and power
supply monitoring.
NA
JZ2

Figure 3-25 shows the layout of the H302RSP board.
Caution:
Do not set the DIP switches and jumpers before the board is unplugged from the backplane. Otherwise,
the board will be damaged.
3-47

UA5
1 2 3 4
ON
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
H1
1 2 3 4
H302RSP
UC5
SH1
SG2
SG1
JZ4
JZ2
ON
SG3
1 2 3 4
Figure 3-25 Layout of the H302RSP
I. DIP switch SG1

Table 3-34 describes the settings of DIP switch SG1 of H302RSP board. Here, 0 stands
for OFF and 1 for ON.
Table 3-34 Settings of DIP switch SG1
DIP switch
SG1
Status 1234
Meaning
1000
Software online upgrade in remote working

mode
0000
Normal operation in remote working mode
0001
Local maintenance in remote working mode
0101
1100
Software online upgrade in quasi local working

mode
0100
Normal operation in quasi local working mode
0101
Other
Reserved
3-48
Factory setting
0000

Note:
The local maintenance is used for fault locating. In this mode, the RSP does not need to communicate with
equipment of upper level. If it works in the default configuration, it will judge whether it is normal itself.
Because the ring back is performed to the E1 links, the E1 LEDs on the front panel will turn off.
II. DIP switches SH1/UA5/UC5/SG3

When the line impedance is selected for E1, it not only sends signal at the transmitting
end according to the template defined in ITU-T G.703, but also adopts corresponding
impedance matching at the receiving end. The involved DIP switches include SG3,
SH1, UA5 and UC5.
Table 3-35 describes the settings of these DIP switches.
Table 3-35 Settings of DIP switches SH1/UA5/UC5/SG3
DIP switch
ON
OFF
Factory setting
SH1
The E1 transmitting
and receiving ring is
connected to PGND.
The E1 transmitting and

receiving ring is not
connected to PGND.
ON
UA5
75
120
ON
UC5
75
120
ON
SG3-1
75
120
ON
SG3-2
SG3-3
Reserved for the system.
ON
SG3-4
Note:
z
The settings of DIP switch will not take effect until you reset the board.
The impedances for four E1 interfaces on the board should be the same, either 120 or 75, and the
DIP switches UA5 and UC5 shall be set consistently with the SG3.

Figure 3-26 (upper HEADER) and Figure 3-27 (lower HEADER) show the pin
assignment between the H302RSP board and backplane. (It is the front view of the
backplane).
3-49

Figure 3-26 Pin assignment between the H302RSP board and the backplane(upper HEADER)
The H302RSP board can connect externally with up to 4 E1 interfaces, which are
located on the 17th32nd rows of pins in the upper HEADER (Columns A and C). If the
AMP header is inserted to the 17th24th rows of pins, the first two E1s are led out; and
when the AMP header is inserted to the 25th32nd rows of pins, the latter two E1s are
led out. In Figure 3-26, the meanings of the characters on the pins are shown below.
z
PV8.
Number: E1 number.
3-50

Figure 3-27 Pin assignment between the H302RSP and the backplane (lower HEADER)
The H302RSP board can externally connect up to eight differential HW signals.
The first four differential HW signals are distributed in the 17th24th rows of pins of
included in one AMP header.
The latter four differential HW signals are distributed in the 25th32nd rows of pins of
included in one AMP header. The meanings of the characters on the pins are shown
below.
z
H-UHW: upstream differential HW.
H-DHW: downstream differential HW.
Digital: number of differential HW.
+/-: Up/low levels of differential signal.
3.8 Packet Voice Processing Board (H601PVM)

3.8.1 Overview
The H601PVM board is the packet voice processing board, which encapsulates the
TDM voice signals into IP packets. The PVM board manages and communicates with
3-51

service boards in the UA5000 frame, implements signal tone sending and number
receiving, and processes the H.248/MGCP protocols. There are two FE interfaces in
the front panel of the PVM board, respectively for IP voice service transmission and
equipment maintenance. Figure 3-28 shows the interfaces between the PVM board
and subscriber board (taking the ASL board as the example).
ASL slots
in the
left half
frame
8HWs
8HWs
Clock
Clock
PVM
Serial port
Serial port
ASL slots
in the
right half
frame
Figure 3-28 Interfaces between the PVM board and the ASL board
3.8.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-29 shows the front panel of the H601PVM board.
RUN
FAIL
(1)
RESET
(2)
(3)
PVM
(1) Serial port
(2) Maintenance network interface
(3) Service network interface
Figure 3-29 Front panel of the PVM board

Table 3-36 describes the front panel of the H601IPVM board.
3-52

Table 3-36 Front panel description of the H601PVM board

Indicator
Color
Function
Description
RUN
Red
Operation status
indicator
Loading: blinking quickly.

Normal running: blinking at the frequency of 0.5 Hz.
Standby: constantly ON.
FAIL
Green
Failure indicator
Normal running: OFF

Fault: constantly ON.
RESET
NA
Resetting button
Reset the board manually.
Serial port
NA
NA
Providing the local and remote dial-up access

function.
Maintenance
network
interface
NA
10/100MBaseT
network interface
For the loading of BIOS version and the debugging

information query in case of error.
Service
network
interface
NA
10/100MBaseT
network interface
Connecting the NMS workstation, or working as the

version loading channel in the host mode.

The H601PVM board has no DIP switch or jumper.

See Figure 3-30 and Figure 3-31 for the pin assignment between the H601IPVM board
and backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)
3-53

Figure 3-30 Definition of upper HEADER pin of the PVM board
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Figure 3-31 Definition of lower HEADER pin of the PVM board

The PVM board provides two FE interfaces, which are at 1st3rd and 31st32nd rows
of pins of upper HEADER.
3-54

R stands for signal receiving, and T stands for signal transmitting.
3.9 ATM Interface Board (H601AIUA)

3.9.1 Overview
The H601AIUA board implements the remote cascading function of the UA5000. It is
installed in the slot of interface board in the UA5000 frame.
The H601AIUA board provides two interfaces for subboards:
z
The interface at the front panel side supports the 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interface
subboard.
The other interface at backplane side supports the ATM E3 subboard or IMA E1
subboard.
The H601AIUA board can provide up to two 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interfaces, while the
backplane can provide up to eight E1 interfaces or two E3 interfaces.
3.9.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-32 shows the front panel of the H601AIUA board.
3-55

RUN
Signal interface
ALM
AIUA
RESET
Figure 3-32 Front panel of the H601AIUA board

Table 3-37 describes the front panel of the H601AIUA board.
Table 3-37 Front panel description of the H601AIUA board
Name
Color
Meaning
Description
It indicates the work status of the board.
RUN
Green
Running
indicator
When it blinks at the rate of 2 Hz (ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for
0.5 seconds periodically), the board is running normally. During
the system start-up, it blinks at the rate of 4 Hz (ON for 0.125
seconds and OFF for 0.125 seconds periodically).
ALM
Red
Alarm
indicator
It turns off when the system runs normally, and turns on when the
system becomes abnormal.
RESET
NA
Manual
resetting
switch
It is used to reset the board.
3-56

Name
Signal
interface
Color
Meaning
Description
NA
Signal
interface
The front panel of the H601AIUA has optical interfaces, and one or
two 155 Mbit/s subboards can be configured as per the service
requirements.
3.9.3 Subboard
I. Overview
Table 3-38 lists the subboards supported by the H601AIUA board.
Table 3-38 Subboards supported by the H601AIUA board
Name
Interface
Description
H601O1CNG
One 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interface
Single-mode, 30 km, SC.
H601O1CNB
One 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interface
Multi-mode, 2 km, SC.
H601O2CNG
Two 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interfaces
Single-mode, 30 km, SC.
H601O2CNB
Two 155 Mbit/s ATM optical interfaces
Multi-mode, 2 km, SC.
H601E8IA
Two IMA E1 electrical interfaces
Led out from the backplane pins.
H601E23A
Two ATM E3/DS3(T3) electrical interfaces
H601E13A
One ATM E3/DS3(T3) electrical interface
II. DIP switches and jumpers of H601E8IA

Five sets of DIP switches (S1S5) on the H601E8IA board are used to distinguish the
cable type.
Table 3-39 DIP switches description of the H601E8IA board
Switch
75 cable
120 cable
S1
ON for Bits 14
OFF for Bits 14
S2
ON for Bits 18
OFF for Bits 18
S3
ON for Bits 18
OFF for Bits 18
S4
ON for Bits 18
OFF for Bits 18
S5
ON for Bits 18
OFF for Bits 18
3-57


See Figure 3-33 and Figure 3-34 for the pin assignment between the H601E8IA board
and backplane. (Its the rear view of the backplane.)
I1A
RT1
TT1
RT2
TT2
RT3
TT3
RT4
TT4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PGND
PGND
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
I1B
I1C
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
65
RR1
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
TR1
RR2
TR2
RR3
TR3
RR4
TR4
25
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
26
27
58
59
90
91
28
29
60
61
92
93
30
31
32
62
63
64
94
95
96
47
48
PGND
PGND
Figure 3-33 Signal definition for upper HEADER connector on the H601AIUA board
3-58

I1A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
PGND
PGND
RT5
TT5
RT6
TT6
RT7
TT7
RT8
TT8
I1B
I1C
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
47
48
25
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
26
27
58
59
89
90
91
28
29
60
61
92
93
TR5
RR6
TR6
RR7
30
31
32
62
63
64
94
95
96
TR7
RR8
TR8
PGND
PGND
RR5
Figure 3-34 Signal definition for lower HEADER connector on the H601AIUA board
In the above two figures:
z
RR18: the 1st to 8th channels of E1 signal correspond to the ring of the signal
received at the H601AIUA.
RT18: the 1st to 8th channels of E1 signal correspond to the tip of the signal
received at the H601AIUA.
TR18: the 1st to 8th channels of E1 signal correspond to the ring of the signal
sent from the H601AIUA.
TT18: the 1st to 8th channels of E1 signal correspond to the tip of the signal
sent from the H601AIUA.
PGND: protection ground.
3.10 16-port Circuit Emulation E1 Interface Board

(H601DEHA)
3.10.1 Overview
The H601DEHA board provides independent 16 E1 interfaces. It supports the
unstructured data transfer (UDT) CES. Each interface supports system clock, line clock
and SRTS clock. The clock of each interface is independent from each other.
The H601DEHA board is installed in the slot of interface board in the UA5000 frame.
Configure a maximum of two DEHA boards in one UA5000 frame.
3-59

The H601DEHA board provides private line E1 access service and TDM E1 access
service.
I. E1 private line access

The H601DEHA board supports private line access service through E1 channels. The
UA5000 adapts the E1 signals into ATM cells, and transmits them to the MD5500,
where the ATM cells are recovered into E1 signals and transmitted to a DDN node. The
private line access service here acts like the extension of DDN private line service.
Another application of the private line access service is to connect two E1 nodes at one
or two UA5000s directly, without passing through the upper layer equipment.
II. TDM E1 access

The H601DEHA board supports TDM services through E1 channels. The UA5000
adapts the E1 signals into ATM cells, and transmits them to the MD5500, where the
ATM cells are recovered into E1 signals and transmitted to the PSTN.
3.10.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the H601DEHA board, as
described in Table 3-40.
Table 3-40 Indicator description of the H601DEHA board
Indicator
Color
Description
Meaning
It indicates the work status of the board.
RUN
Red
Running
indicator
When it blinks at the rate of 1 Hz (ON for 0.5 seconds and

OFF for 0.5 seconds periodically), the board is running
normally.
During the system start-up, it blinks at the rate of 4 Hz (ON
for 0.125 seconds and OFF for 0.125 seconds periodically).
3.10.3 DIP Switches

Figure 3-35 shows the layout of the H601DEHA board.
3-60

1 2 3 4 5 6 78
S1
H601DEHA
ON
S8
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
S5
ON
1 2 3 4
S3
ON
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
1 2 3 4 5 6 78
S2
S6
S4
ON
ON
Figure 3-35 Layout of the H601DEHA board
I. DIP switches S1/S2/S5/S5

These switches are used to select whether the shielding layer at the transmitting end or
receiving end of E1 is grounded or not. Table 3-41 shows the setting methods.
Table 3-41 Settings of DIP switches S1/S2/S5/S5
Status
ON
DIP switch
OFF
Factory setting
S1
1-4#E1
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
S2
5-8#E1
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
S5
9-12#E1
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
S6
13-16#E1
Grounded
Not grounded
OFF
Remark:
Every DIP switch contains eight bits for controlling four channels of E1.
The grounding for the shielding layer of every E1 is controlled by two bits: the first one for transmission,
the second one for reception.
II. DIP switches S3/S4

DIP switches S3/S4 are used to select the matching impedance at the E1 receiving end,
3-61

Table 3-42 Settings of DIP switches S3/S4

Status
ON
DIP switch
OFF
factory setting
Control 1#E1
S3-1
75
120
ON
Control 2#E1
S3-2
75
120
ON
Control 3#E1
S3-3
75
120
ON
Control 4#E1
S3-4
75
120
ON
Control 5#E1
S3-5
75
120
ON
Control 6#E1
S3-6
75
120
ON
Control 7#E1
S3-7
75
120
ON
Control 8#E1
S3-8
75
120
ON
Control 9#E1
S4-1
75
120
ON
Control 10#E1
S4-2
75
120
ON
Control 11#E1
S4-3
75
120
ON
Control 12#E1
S4-4
75
120
ON
Control 13#E1
S4-5
75
120
ON
Control 14#E1
S4-6
75
120
ON
Control 15#E1
S4-7
75
120
ON
Control 16#E1
S4-8
75
120
ON

z
transmission.
To select the matching impedance, you need to set the DIP switches correctly while
maintaining the consistency of configuration data.
III. DIP switch S8

DIP switch S8 is used to express the impedance at the E1 receiving end, as shown in
Table 3-43.
3-62

Table 3-43 Settings of DIP switch S8

Status
ON
DIP switch
S8-1
75
S8-2-4
Reserved
OFF
120
factory setting
ON
Caution:
z
The setting of DIP switch will not take effect until you reset the board.
The impedances for 16 E1 interfaces on the board should be the same, either 120 or 75. The DIP
switches S3 and S4 shall be set consistently with the S8-1.

Figure 3-36 and Figure 3-37 show the connection between the H601DEHA board and
backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)
I1A
RT1
TT1
RT2
TT2
RT3
TT3
RT4
TT4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
PGND
PGND
-48V
-48V
GND
GND
GND
RR9
RT9
TR9
TT9
RR10
RT10
TR10
TT10
RR11
RT11
TR11
TT11
RR12
RT12
TR12
TT12
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
I1B
I1C
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
25
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
26
27
58
59
90
91
28
29
60
61
92
93
30
31
32
62
63
64
94
95
96
47
48
RR1
TR1
RR2
TR2
RR3
TR3
RR4
TR4
PGND
PGND
-48V
-48V
GND
GND
GND
Figure 3-36 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the H601DEHA board
3-63

I1A
GND
I1B
GND
GND
BGND
BGND
-48V
-48V
PGND
PGND
RT5
TT5
RT6
TT6
R67
T67
RT8
TT8
GND
65
42
43
44
45
46
25
RR13
RT13
TR13
TT13
RR14
RT14
TR14
TT14
RR15
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
26
27
RT15
TR15
58
59
90
91
TR5
RR6
28
29
TT15
RR16
RT16
TR16
TT16
60
61
92
93
62
63
64
94
95
96
TR6
RR7
TR7
RR8
TR8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
GND
I1C
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
30
31
32
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
GND
GND
GND
BGND
BGND
-48V
-48V
PGND
PGND
RR5
Figure 3-37 Signal definition of lower HEADER connector on the H601DEHA board
z
RR116: Channels 116 of E1 signal corresponding to the ring of the signal

received at the H601DEHA.
RT116: Channels 116 of E1 signal corresponding to the tip of the signal

received at the H601 DEHA.
TR116: Channels 116 of E1 signal corresponding to the ring of the signal sent
from the H601 DEHA.
TT116: Channels 116 of E1 signal corresponding to the tip of the signal sent
from the H601 DEHA.
3.11 32-port Analog Subscriber Board

(CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL)
3.11.1 Overview
The 32-port analog subscriber board (CC0HASL/CC0NASL/CC0RASL) (with the
silk-screen of A32) consists of two parts: subscriber line interface and control part. It
can provide the BORSCHT function, as well as 32 subscriber ports.
The differences between CC0HASL, CC0NASL and CC0RASL are:
z
Only the 16th and 17th ports of the CC0HASL board provide the reversal polarity.
3-64

All 32 ports of the CC0NASL and CC0RASL board provide the reversal polarity.
The feed current of the CC0NASL board is different from the CC0RASL board.
The following description will take the CC0HASL board as the example.
Note:
The meanings of BORSCHT are listed below.
B: Battery
O: Overvoltage and overcurrent protection
R: Ringing
S: Supervision
C: Codec
H: Hybrid
T: Test
3.11.2 Front Panel

There are two indicators on the front panel of the CC0HASL board: RUN and BSY.
Table 3-44 shows their meanings.
Table 3-44 Front panel description of the CC0HASL board
Indicator
Color
Description
Meaning
RUN
Red
Running
indicator
ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the
board
is
normal.
Blinking quickly or OFF: the board is abnormal.
Constantly ON: the protection unit of the board is fused, or
the 48V power supply fails to work.
BSY
Green
Busy/idle
indicator
OFF:
all
ports
of
the
board
ON: at least one port of the board is busy.
are
idle.

Figure 3-38 shows the pin assignment between the CC0HASL board and backplane.
3-65

1st to 16th rows of pins of upper HEADER

17th to 32th rows of pins of lower HEADER
b
1
a 17
b
b
10
18
3
4
11
19
5
6
12
20
7
8
a
13
21
b
25
26
14
22
15
23
16
24
27
28
29
30
31
32
Figure 3-38 Pin assignment between the CC0HASL board and the backplane
Note:
Numbers in Figure 3-38 are the subscriber numbers.
3.12 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CC09ASL)

3.12.1 Overview
The analog subscriber board (CC09ASL) (with the silk-screen ASL) provides 16
analog subscriber ports, implements the BORSCHT functions. According to the
requirements, the board can provide different functions, including common subscribers,
pre-paid service, remote subscriber, full polarity reversal and pulse.
3.12.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the CC09ASL board, as described
in Table 3-45.
3-66

Table 3-45 Front panel description of the CC09ASL board

Indicator
RUN
Color
Red
Explanation
Meanings
Running indicator

periodically: the board works normally.
Blinks quickly or OFF: the board works abnormally.

Figure 3-39 show the pin assignment between the CC09ASL board and backplane.
z
The first eight channels of subscriber signals are subject to the 1st to the 8th rows
of pins on the upper HEADER.
The last eight channels of subscriber signals are subject to the 25th to the 32nd
rows of pins on the lower HEADER.
1st to 8th rows of pins
on the upper HEADER
25th to 32nd rows of pins

on the upper HEADER
Figure 3-39 Pin assignment between the CC09ASL board and backplane
3.13 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CC0KASL/CC0MASL)

3.13.1 Overview
The CC0KASL/CC0MASL board (with the silk-screen of ASL) provides 16 analog
subscriber ports, implements the BORSCHT function of analog subscriber circuit and
adjusts the interface impedance and level through software. Decoding/encoding of
A/-law can be selected freely without any change to the hardware.
3-67

The differences between the CC0MASL and CC0KASL are:

z
All 16 ports of the CC0MASL provide the reversal polarity.
Only 8th and 9th of the CC0KASL provide the reversal polarity.
Note:
CC0KASL has two types of finished boards: C0KASL0 and CC0KASL1. Besides all functions of the
CCOKASL0 board, the CC0KASL1 board has additional commands for multiple types of impedance,
multiple ringing modes, configurable ringing and stopping howler tone. The following CC0KASL board
indicates these two finished boards.
3.13.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the CC0KASL board, as described
in Table 3-46.
Table 3-46 Front panel description of the CC0KASL board
Indicator name
Color
Description
Meaning
OFF for 0.5 seconds and ON for 0.5
seconds: the board is being started.
RUN
Red
Running
indicator
OFF for one second and ON for one

second: the board is working normally.
Constantly ON: the power supply BAT is
powered off.
Normal
status
OFF for one
second and
ON for one
second.

The pin assignment between the CC0KASL board and backplane is the same as that
for the CC09ASL board.
3.14 16-Port Analog Subscriber Board (CB36ASL/CB37ASL)

3.14.1 Overview
The CB36ASL/CB37ASL board (with the silk-screen of ASL) can implement the
BORSCHT functions for 16 pairs of analog subscriber lines. Besides, it has the
following functions:
z
Interface impedance, interface level and battery feeding mode (constant-voltage

battery feeding or constant-current battery feeding) can be adjusted by the
software.
3-68

z
All its 16 subscriber ports can provide the reversed polarity.
The only difference between the CB36ASL and CB37ASL boards is: the former can
provide the 16/12KC charging signal.
Note:
The CB37ASL has two types: CB37ASL0 and CB37ASL1. The CB37ASL1 has the remote power supply
function.
3.14.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the CB36ASL board, as described
in Table 3-47.
Table 3-47 Front panel description of the CB36ASL board
Name
Color
Meaning
Description
OFF for 0.5 seconds and
ON for 0.5 seconds: the
board is being started.
RUN
Red
Running indicator
OFF for one second and

ON for one second: the
board is working normally.
Normal status
OFF for one second

and ON for one
second.
Constantly ON: the power

supply BAT is powered off.

The pin assignment between the CB36ASL board and backplane is the same as that
for the CC09ASL board.
3.15 16-port ADSL Board (POTS Splitter Inside) (H601ADLA)

3.15.1 Overview
The H601ADLA board provides 16 G.DMT/G.Lite ADSL interfaces and 16 PSTN
interfaces. The ADSL splitter in the board can
z
Separate the POTS signal on subscriber line from the ADSL signal.
Send the POTS signal to the ASL board for processing.
Send the ADSL signal to corresponding modules for processing.
In converse, the POTS and ADSL signals are sent to external subscriber line after
synthesization through the splitter.
3-69

3.15.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the H601ADLA board, as
Table 3-48 Front panel description of the H601ADLA board
Name
RUN
Color
Red
Meaning
Running
indicator
Description
ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds: the board is just
powered on.
ON for one second and OFF for one second: the board is working
normally.

S5: open, the board software is loaded for upgrading.
Jumper: open by default. Make it short circuited before loading the software, and
restore it after the loading.

See Figure 3-40 for the pin assignment between the H601ADLA board and backplane.
(It's the rear view of the backplane.)
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
PGND
PGND
-48V1
-48V1
BG ND
BG ND
-5V1
-5V1
+5V1
+5V1
GND
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
A11
B11
A12
B12
A13
B13
A14
B14
A15
B15
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
B
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
PGND
PGND
-48V1
-48V1
BGND
BGND
-5V1
-5V1
+5V1
+5V1
GND
GND
G ND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Figure 3-40 Pin assignment of upper HEADER on the H601ADLA board
3-70

GND
DGND
+5VII
+5VII
+5V II
-5V II
-5V II
-48VII
-48VII
PGND
PGND
POTS8+
POTS9+
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS12+
POTS13+
POTS14+
POTS15+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A
GND
POTS0+
POTS0POTS1+
POTS1POTS2+
POTS2POTS3+
POTS3PO TS4+
POTS4PO TS5+
POTS5PO TS6+
POTS6PO TS7+
POTS7-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
B
GND
DGND
+5VII
+5VII
+5VII
-5VII
-5VII
-48VII
-48VII
PGND
PGND
POTS8POTS9POTS10POTS11POTS12POTS13POTS14POTS15-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Figure 3-41 Pin assignment of lower HEADER on the H601ADLA board

The cable design of the H601ADLA board is the same as that of the CC0HASL board.
16 pairs of subscriber lines are connected to pins rows 116 on the upper HEADER,
and 16 POTS interface cables are connected to pin rows 2532 on the lower HEADER.
Numbers in the above figure refer to the serial numbers of users.
3.16 16-port ADSL2+ Subscriber Board (H602ADMB)

3.16.1 Overview
The H602ADMB board transmits broadband services to the control board through the
Low Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS) interface, and the control board provides the
ATM or IP upstream broadband service interfaces. The H602ADMA board has no relay,
and cannot test the internal and external subscriber lines. The H602ADMA board is
installed in the UA5000 subscriber frame.
The H602ADMB board is embedded with the splitter (the resistance impedance is
600). It splits the POTS signal from the ADSL signal in the subscriber line, sends the
POTS signal to the ASL board for processing, and sends the ADSL to corresponding
module for processing. In converse, the POTS and ADSL signals are sent to external
subscriber line after reassembled through the splitter.
3-71

3.16.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the H601ADMB board, as
Table 3-49 Front panel description of the H601ADMB board
Name
Color
Meaning
RUN
Red
Running
indicator
Description
powered on. ON for one second and OFF for one second: the board
is working normally.

The H602ADMB board has no DIP switches or jumpers.

See Figure 3-42 and Figure 3-43 for the pin assignment between the H601ADMB
board and backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
PGND
PGND
-48V1
-48V1
BGND
BGND
-5V1
-5V1
+5V1
+5V1
GND
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
A11
B11
A12
B12
A13
B13
A14
B14
A15
B15
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
B
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
PGND
PGND
-48V1
-48V1
BGND
BGND
-5V1
-5V1
+5V1
+5V1
GND
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Figure 3-42 Definition of upper HEADER pin of the ADMB board
3-72

GND
DGND
+5VII
+5VII
+5VII
-5VII
-5VII
-48VII
-48VII
PGND
PGND
POTS8+
POTS9+
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS12+
POTS13+
POTS14+
POTS15+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A
GND
POTS0+
POTS0POTS1+
POTS1POTS2+
POTS2POTS3+
POTS3POTS4+
POTS4POTS5+
POTS5POTS6+
POTS6POTS7+
POTS7-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
B
GND
DGND
+5VII
+5VII
+5VII
-5VII
-5VII
-48VII
-48VII
PGND
PGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Figure 3-43 Definition of lower HEADER pin of the ADMB board

Among them:
z
A0(B0)-A15(B15) connect with port signal cables 015 of ADSL subscribers.
POTS0-POTS15 connect with ports signal cables 015 of PSTN subscribers.
3.17 16-port ADSL2+ Subscriber Board (H602ADMC)

3.17.1 Overview
The H602ADMC transmits broadband services to the control board through the Low
Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS) interface, and the control board provides the ATM or
IP upstream broadband service interfaces. The H602ADMC board has the relay, and
can test the internal and external subscriber line. The H602ADMC board is installed in
the UA5000 subscriber frame.
The H602ADMC board is embedded with the splitter (the resistance impedance is
600). It splits the POTS signal from the ADSL signal in the subscriber line, sends the
POTS signal to the ASL board for processing, and sends the ADSL to corresponding
module for processing. In converse, the POTS and ADSL signals are sent to external
subscriber line after reassembled through the splitter.
3.17.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the H601ADMC board, as
3-73

Table 3-50 Front panel description of the H601ADMC board

Name
Color
Meaning
RUN
Red
Running
indicator
Description
powered on. ON for one second and OFF for one second: the board
is working normally.

The H602ADMC board has no DIP switches or jumpers.

See Figure 3-42 and Figure 3-43 for the pin assignment between the H601ADMC
board and backplane. (It's the rear view of the backplane.)
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
PGND
PGND
-48V1
-48V1
BGND
BGND
-5V1
-5V1
+5V1
+5V1
GND
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
A11
B11
A12
B12
A13
B13
A14
B14
A15
B15
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
B
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
PGND
PGND
-48V1
-48V1
BGND
BGND
-5V1
-5V1
+5V1
+5V1
GND
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Figure 3-44 Definition of upper HEADER pin of the ADMC board
3-74

GND
DGND
+5VII
+5VII
+5VII
-5VII
-5VII
-48VII
-48VII
PGND
PGND
POTS8+
POTS9+
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS12+
POTS13+
POTS14+
POTS15+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
A
GND
POTS0+
POTS0POTS1+
POTS1POTS2+
POTS2POTS3+
POTS3POTS4+
POTS4POTS5+
POTS5POTS6+
POTS6POTS7+
POTS7-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
B
GND
DGND
+5VII
+5VII
+5VII
-5VII
-5VII
-48VII
-48VII
PGND
PGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Figure 3-45 Definition of lower HEADER pin of the ADMC board

Among them:
z
A0(B0)-A15(B15) connect with port signal cables 015 of ADSL subscribers.
POTS0-POTS15 connect with ports signal cables 015 of PSTN subscribers.
3.18 Subscriber Board Combining POTS and ADSL

(H601CSLA)
3.18.1 Overview
The H601CSLA board integrates the POTS with ADSL interfaces.
z
The ADSL interface supports the G.DMT/G.Lite standard, and integrates a splitter.
The POTS interface supports the full reserved polarity of 16 channels, like the ASL
board.
The H601CSLA board can provide 16 ADSL interfaces and 16 POTS interfaces. The
ADSL and POTS interfaces are controlled respectively by two control units; therefore,
they wont affect each other on service and management.
3.18.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the H601CSLA board, as
3-75

Table 3-51 Front panel description of the H601CSLA board

Name
RUN
Color
Red
Meaning
Running
indicator
Status
Description
ON for one second and OFF for

one second
The board works normally.
ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF

for 0.25 seconds
The board is being powered on.
Constantly ON
The 48 V power supply of the

POTS module is abnormal (no
feedback or extra low voltage.)
Blinking at the rate of 2 Hz (ON

for 0.25 seconds and OFF for
0.25 seconds) for 8 seconds
continuous ON for several
secondsblinking at the rate
of 2 Hz (ON for 0.25 seconds
and OFF for 0.25 seconds) for
8 seconds, and so on.
The POTS service is abnormal.

The control unit of POTS access
module is reset repeatedly.
Blinking at the rate of 2 Hz (ON

for 0.25 seconds and OFF for
0.25 seconds) for more than 8
seconds
The POTS service is normal, and

the ADSL access module works
abnormally.
Note:
Indicators on the H601CSLA board mainly indicate the narrowband service status, they can not indicate
the broadband service status normally in case of narrowband functions failure. Therefore, the broadband
service status should be queried at the maintenance terminals.

Refer to Table 3-52 for the jumper settings of the H601CSLA board.
Table 3-52 Jumper settings of the H601CSLA board
Jumper
Status
Meaning
Description
S1, S4
Open
For the upgrade loading of

board software of the POTS
access module
It is open by default. Make it short circuited

with the short-circuiter before software
loading, and recover it after the loading.
S5, S6
Open
For the upgrade loading of

board software of the ADSL
access module
It is open by default. It is used as above.
3-76

Note:
Jumpers have been set correctly in the normal delivery of equipment. Do not set them before you know the
correct setting methods so as to avoid software loss or board damage.

See Figure 3-46 for the pin assignment between the H601CSLA board and backplane.
(It is the rear view of the backplane.)
1st to 16th row pins of the upper HEADER
a
17th to 32th row pins of the lower HEADER
b1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
a
b
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Figure 3-46 Pin assignment between the H601CSLA and backplane

It has the same cable design as the CC09ASL board. The former 8 channels of
subscriber lines are connected to pin rows 18 of the upper HEADER, and the latter 8
channels of subscriber lines are connected to pin rows 2532 of the lower HEADER.
3.19 16-port VDSL board (H601VDLA)

3.19.1 Overview
The H601VDLA board consists of the H601V16A backplane and H601L2EA subboard,
providing 16 VDSL subscriber interfaces. The H601VDLA board can be installed in the
slot of any service board of the UA5000 frame.
3.19.2 Front panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the H601VDLA board, as
3-77

Table 3-53 Front panel description of the H601VDLA board

Name
Color
RUN
Red
Meaning
Description
ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds periodically:
the board is just powered on.
Running
indicator
ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically: the
board is working normally.

There is no DIP switch or jumper on the board.

See Figure 3-47 and Figure 3-48 for the pin assignment between the H601VDLA board
and backplane. (It is the rear view of the backplane.)
I1A
LINE0+
LINE1+
LINE2+
LINE3+
LINE4+
LINE5+
LINE6+
LINE7+
PGND
PGND
-48V
-48V
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
I1B
I1C
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
25
56
57
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
26
27
58
59
90
91
60
61
92
93
62
63
64
94
95
96
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
28
29
GND
LINE8+
LINE8LINE9+
LINE9LINE10+
LINE10LINE11+
LINE11LINE12+
LINE12LINE13+
LINE13LINE14+
LINE14LINE15+
LINE15-
30
31
32
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
GND
LINE0LINE1LINE2LINE3LINE4LINE5LINE6LINE7-
Figure 3-47 Definition of upper HEADER on the H601VDLA board
3-78
PGND
PGND
-48V
-48V
GND
GND
GND

I1A
GND
I1B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GND
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
GND
GND
PGND
PGND
POTS8+
POTS9+
POTS10+
POTS11+
POTS12+
POTS13+
POTS14+
POTS15+
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
POTS0+
POTS0POTS1+
POTS1POTS2+
POTS2POTS3+
POTS3POTS4+
POTS4POTS5+
POTS5POTS6+
POTS6POTS7+
POTS7-
I1C
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
65
42
43
44
45
46
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
88
89
58
59
90
91
60
61
92
93
62
63
64
94
95
96
GND
GND
GND
GND
PGND
PGND
Figure 3-48 Definition of lower HEADER on the H601VDLA board

z
LINE0(+ -)LINE15(+ -): the 1st16th VDSL subscriber of the board
POTS0(+ -)POTS15(+ -): the 1st16th POTS subscriber of the board
GND: ground
PGND: protection ground
Note:
The cable of VDLA board is same as that of A32 board.
3.20 2/4-Wire E&M Interface Board (H601ATIA/H301ATI)

3.20.1 Overview
The H601ATIA board provides six 2/4-wire E&M interfaces. It is slot compatible with
service boards.
3-79

Note:
The only difference between the H301ATI and H601ATIA boards is: the H301ATI board can be used only
in the frames without broadband bus, such as the PV8-10 control frame; while the H601ATIA board can be
used in the frame containing broadband bus, such as UAM frame and UAFM frame.
The following takes the H601ATIA board as an example.
The H601ATIA board connects to the opposite H601ATIA board through the
semi-permanent connection, as follows.
1)
The H601ATIA board detects the E and M signaling.
2)
If the signaling is changed, the occupied channel will send it to the opposite end
through special coding.
3)
4)
The opposite H601ATIA board monitors the received signaling codes.

The opposite H601ATIA board controls the corresponding interface to send out
relative signals.
In this way, the H601ATIA board achieves the transparent transmission of the signaling
and service.
Each port of the H301ATI board can provide the 2/4-wire voice frequency line and
1E1M signaling line, instead of 2E2M signaling line. When E and M lines are not used,
the 2/4 voice frequency line can be used independently to carry voice frequency
signals.
The voice frequency interface level of the H601ATIA board can be adjusted through the
software. The settings of 2/4-wire voice frequency line can be done through software
configuration and hardware jumper.
3.20.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-49 shows the front panel of the H601ATIA board.
3-80

Figure 3-49 Front panel of the H601ATIA board

Table 3-54 describes the front panel of the H601ATIA board.
Table 3-54 Front panel description of the H601ATIA board
Indicator
Color
Description
ON for one second and OFF for one second: the board is
normal.
ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds: the board
fails to communicate with the host.
RUN
Red
Running
indicator
CH1-6
Green
Indicator
channel
occupation
Green
Indicator
of
EM2
trunk
interface
EM2
Meaning
of
Blinks:
the
channel
is
being
connected.
Constantly ON: the channel is already connected and can
be used for conversation, or is in conversation.
EM2 and EM4 are ON simultaneously: the host hasn't sent
the configuration command to the H601ATIA board.
Only EM2 is ON among EM2, EM4 and AT2: the board is
configured as an EM2 trunk interface.
3-81

Indicator
Color
Description
Meaning
EM4
Green
Indicator
of
EM4
trunk
interface
Reserved.
AT2
Red
Indicator of AT2
trunk interface
Reserved.

Figure 3-50 shows the layout of H601ATIA board.
JP11
JP13
ON
JP12
JP9
ON
JP10
SW5
SW3
SW4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
ON
ON
SW11
1 2
H601ATIA
ON
JP8
SW9
SW10
1
2 3
ON
1
2
JP6
SW2
JP5
SS1
3
JP7
JP4
SW12
1 2
ON
ON
ON
SW1
2 3
SW14
1
ON
ON
ON
SW6
JP15
ON
SW13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
JP14
SW7
SW8
JP17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
JP19
JP16
JP18
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 3-50 Layout of the H601ATIA board

Table 3-55 describes the settings of DIP switch SW1 of the H601ATIA board.
Table 3-55 Settings of DIP switch SW1
Status
Switch
ON
OFF
Factory
setting
SW1-1
The WATCHDOG circuit does

not work.
WATCHDOG circuit works.
OFF
SW1-2
Voice frequency lines A and B

are for input.
Voice frequency lines A, B, C

and D are for input.
OFF
3-82

Table 3-56 describes the settings of DIP switch SW2 of the H601ATIA board.
State
ON
DIP switch
SW2
OFF
SPROM loads FPGA.
CPU loads FPGA.
Note: You are required to set DIP switch SW2 of the ATI board in OFF state.
Table 3-57 describes the settings of DIP switches SW3-SW14 of the H601ATIA board.
Table 3-57 Settings of DIP switches SW3-SW14
DIP switch
Function
Meaning
SW3-SW8
Select the trunk

mode of 1-6 channel
interfaces
Bit 2 and Bit 5 are set to ON, and others are

OFF: the corresponding interfaces are used
by EM2.
SW9-SW14
Select the voice

frequency
input
mode of 1-6 channel
interfaces
When voice frequency lines A and B are for

input: Bit 1 and Bit 4 are set to ON, and Bit 2
and
Bit
3
are
OFF.
When voice frequency lines A, B, C and D
are for input: Bit 1 and Bit 4 are set to OFF,
and Bit 2 and Bit 3 are ON.
Factory
setting
Bit 1 and Bit 4

are set to
OFF.
Bit 2 and Bit 3
are ON.
DIP switch SS1 is used to reset the H601ATIA board.

Figure 3-51 and Figure 3-52 show the pin assignment between the H601ATIA board
and backplane.
3-83

Figure 3-51 Definition of upper HEADER on the ATI board
Figure 3-52 Definition of lower HEADER on the ATI board

Figure 3-52 lists the meanings of the signal cables.
3-84

Table 3-58 Meanings of signal cables of the H60ATIA components

Signal Cable
Meaning
G1AG6A
16 ports of Cable A
G1BG6B
16 ports of Cable B
G1CG6C
16 ports of Cable C
G1DG6D
16 ports of Cable D
G1E1G6E1
16 ports of E1 cable
G1E2G6E2
16 ports of E2 cable
G1M1G6M1
16 ports of M1 cable
G1M2G6M2
16 ports of M2 cable
Note:
The ATIA dedicated cable should be configured.
3.21 Direct Dial-in Subscriber Interface Board

(H301CDI/H601CDIA)
3.21.1 Overview
As the 16-port direct dial-in subscriber interface board, the H301CDI board can realize
the transparent transmission of analog subscriber port. It is slot compatible with the
service board, adopting the same cables with the 16-port ASL board.
The H301CDI board can extend transparently the external analog subscriber port
through the HONET system by digital-analog conversion, transparent transmission and
host signaling processing between the CDI and ADSL port.
As a foreign exchange office (FXO) interface, the H301CDI board can be used together
with the foreign exchange subscriber (FXS) interface to realize the analog access from
AN POTS subscribers to the LE. The ASL board provides the FXS interface.
Note:
The difference between the H301CDI and H601CDIA board lies in the front panel.
3-85

3.21.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-53 shows the front panel of the H301CDI board.
Figure 3-53 Front panel of the H301CDI board

Table 3-59 describes the front panel of the H301CDI board.
Table 3-59 Front panel description of the H301CDI board
Indicator
RUN
Color
Red
Meaning
Description
Running indicator
3-86
ON for one second and OFF for one second: the board
is normal. ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for 0.5 seconds:
the board fails to communicate with the host.
Blinking at the rate of 5 Hz for three seconds: the board
self-check fails.

Indicator
CH0-15
Color
Green
Meaning
Description
Channel
monitoring
indicator
ON: the corresponding channel is occupied.

Figure 3-54 and Figure 3-55 show the pin assignment between the H301CDI board and
backplane.
I1A
R0
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
PGND
PGND
-5V
-5V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
I1B
I1C
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
25
56
57
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
26
27
58
59
90
91
28
29
60
61
92
93
30
31
32
62
63
64
94
95
96
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Figure 3-54 Definition of upper HEADER on the CDI board
3-87
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
PGND
PGND
-5V
-5V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
GND

I1A
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GND
+5V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
-5V
-5V
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
PGND
PGND
R8
R9
R10
R11
R12
R13
R14
R15
I1B
I1C
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
65
42
43
44
45
46
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
25
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
26
27
58
59
90
91
28
29
60
61
92
93
30
31
32
62
63
64
94
95
96
GND
GND
88
89
+5V
+5V
+5V
GND
GND
-5V
-5V
PGND
PGND
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
T13
T14
T15
Figure 3-55 Definition of lower HEADER on the CDI board
3.22 Digital Subscriber Board (CB02DSL/CB03DSL)

3.22.1 Overview
The CB02DSL/CB03DSL board, a digital subscriber board, provides eight ISDN BRA
(2B+D) interfaces. The CB02DSL board can not supply the power remotely while the
CB03DSL can. The digital subscriber board is slot compatible with the analogue
subscriber board.
Each CB02DSL/CB03DSL board has eight subscriber ports. The board provides:
z
standard ISDN BRA services
TA128 semi-permanent connection mode
MTA access mode
U-interface transparent transmission access mode.
The 8 U interfaces in the CB02DSL/CB03DSL board can be configured to different

working modes).
The CB03DSL board can provide the power supply to subscriber terminals. It controls
the DC power supply of eight ports through the remote power control circuit. The
provision of power supply can be set by ports through the data configuration at the
background. The power supply circuit has the functions of overcurrent detection and
3-88

automatic protection. The automatic recovery of power supply can be implemented

through the software control.
3.22.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-56 shows the front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL board.
RUN
L0
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
COM
DSL
Figure 3-56 Front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL board

Table 3-60 describes the front panel of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL board.
Table 3-60 Front panel description of the CB02DSL/CB03DSL board
Name
RUN
Color
Red
Meaning
Operation status
3-89
Description
second periodically: the board works
normally.
seconds periodically: the board is
requesting the configuration information
to
the
control
board.
ON/OFF: the board works abnormally.

Name
Color
Meaning
Description
ON: activated. OFF: deactivated.
L0-7
COM
Green
Red
Port active indicators: indicates

respectively the activation status
of the 8 ports
Serial
port
indicator
communication

0.625 seconds periodically: activating
the U port.
seconds periodically: activating the S/T
port.
The status of the indicator changes
once every 160 times of active and
standby boards communication (one
second in general).

The CB02DSL/CB03DSL board provides eight 2B+D interfaces, which are located on
the first eight rows of pins (A1/B1A8/B8) in the upper HEADER. See Figure 3-57.
z
Numerals 07 indicate subscriber signals 18.
LA and LB indicate A-wire and B-wire of the 2B+D port respectively.
Figure 3-57 Pin assignment between the DSL board and the backplane (upper HEADER)
3-90

3.23 High Speed Subscriber Board (H302HSL)

3.23.1 Overview
The H302HSL board is the synchronous high-speed line interface board. It provides
two V.35 ports and two E1 ports in the rate of N 64kbit/s (1N31).
z
When the internal HW resources are occupied, the maximum available rate of the
V.35 port is 25 x 64 kbit/s.
When the E1 port resources are occupied, the maximum available rate of the V.35
port is 31 64 kbit/s.
The E1 port on the board can be connected with the remote data service unit to:
z
Access the remote N x 64 kbit/s data service, or
Serve as the trunk channel to carry N 64 kbit/s data service.
When the E1 port is used for trunking, the N x 64kbit/s data will be transmitted through
E1 port, without occupying the HW resources.
The board can lock the phase of different clock sources, including the clock provided by
ST-BUS in the subscriber frame or the clock extracted from the E1 port.
The H302HSL board has the digital cross-connection function, with the exchange
capability of 6HW timeslots.
Note:
The H302HSL works in data connection equipment (DCE) mode.
When the DTE is required, the DCE-DTE conversion connector will convert the DCE to DTE (the HSL
board still works in DCE mode).
3.23.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-58 shows the front panel of the H302HSL board.
3-91

Figure 3-58 Front panel of the H302HSL board

Table 3-61 describes the front panel of the H302HSL board.
Table 3-61 Front description of the H302HSL board
Name
RUN
RXD0-1
Color
Meaning
Red
Running
indicator
Green
Data receiving
indicators
of
V.35 interfaces
1 and 2
3-92
Description
ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF
for 0.25 seconds periodically:
board power-on, self-test.
ON for one second and OFF
for one second periodically:
the board self-test is passed.
ON: V.35 interface is receiving
data.
OFF: V.35 interface is not
receiving data.
Normal
status
ON for one
second and
OFF for one
second.
ON/OFF

Name
Color
Meaning
Description
Green
Data sending
indicators
of
V.35 interfaces
1 and 2
ON: V.35 interface is sending

data.
Green
Frame
out-of-sync.
indicators
of
FE1 interfaces
1 and 2
LOS0-1
Green
Signal
loss
indicators
of
FE1 interfaces
1 and 2
LINK
Green
Indicator of FE1
signal
TXD0-1
LFA0-1
OFF: V.35 interface is not

sending data.
ON: Frame out-of-sync.
OFF: normal.
ON: Loss of signal.

OFF: normal.
ON: A signal exists over any
FE1 on the board.
Normal
status
ON/OFF
OFF
OFF
ON/OFF

Figure 3-59 shows the layout of the H302HSL board.
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
Sw1
H302HSL
Sw4
S1
ON
1 2 3 4
Sw3
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
Sw2
1 2 3
JP1
JP2
JP3
Sw5
Figure 3-59 Layout of the H302HSL board

Table 3-62 describes the settings of DIP switches on the H302HSL board.
3-93

Table 3-62 Settings of DIP switches and jumpers on the H302HSL board
DIP switch/
Jumper
Function
Meanings
SW4
Switch
for
selecting
the
working mode of
the first V.35
interface.
SW4-1 and SW4-2 are ON, SW4-3 and

SW4-4 are OFF: the first V.35 interface
works in the DCE mode.
SW5
Switch
for
selecting
the
working mode of
the second V.35
interface.
SW5-1 and SW5-2 are ON, SW5-3 and

SW5-4 are OFF: the second V.35
interface works in the DCE mode.
SW1-1, SW1-2 and SW3-1 are ON: the
first FE1 interface uses the 75-ohm
matching impedance.
SW1, SW3
Switch for setting

the impedance of
the first FE1
interface
SW1-1, SW1-2 and SW1-3 are OFF:

the second FE1 interface uses the
120-ohm matching impedance.
SW1-3 is ON: Receiving ring connects
to PGND.
Default setting
SW5-1 and SW5-2
are ON.
SW5-3 and SW5-4
are OFF.
SW5-1 and SW5-2
are ON.
SW5-3 and SW5-4
are OFF.
SW1-1 and SW1-2

are ON.
SW1-3 and SW1-4
are OFF.
SW3-1 is ON.
SW1-4 is ON: Sending ring connects to

PGND.
SW2-1, SW2-2 and SW3-2 are ON: the
second FE1 interface uses the 75-ohm
matching impedance.
SW2, SW3
Switch for setting

the impedance of
the second FE1
interface
SW2-1 and SW2-2 and SW3-2 are

OFF: the second FE1 interface uses
the 120-ohm matching impedance.
SW2-3 is ON: Receiving ring connects
to PGND.
SW2-1, SW2-2 and

SW3-2 are ON.
SW2-3 and SW2-4
are OFF.
SW2-4 is ON: Sending ring connects to

PGND.
JP1JP3
Set
for
determining the
logic loading mode
JP1 short connects JP2: Load through

PROM.
JP2 short connects JP3: Load through
CPU.
JP2 and JP3 are

short circuited.

Pin rows 18 in the upper HEADER: for the first V.35 port and the first E1 port. E1 port
is at pin rows 7 and 8.
Pin rows 2532 in the lower HEADER: for the second V.35 port and the second E1 port.
E1 port is at pin rows 31 and 32.
3-94

3.24 High Speed Subscriber Board (H303HSL)

3.24.1 Overview
By adopting the SHDSL technique, the H303HSL board can access the Nx64kbit/s
(3N) and E1 services from a long transmission distance.
Compatible with the high layer protocol of H302HSL, H303HSL can be applied directly
in the environment for H302HSL.
The H303HSL board provides two E1 interfaces and two SHDSL interfaces. After the
modem conversion, the two SHDSL interfaces can change to two V.35 interfaces (N x
64 kbit/s, 3N31) or two E1 (2048 kbit/s) interfaces.
The H303ASL board has the following two functions.
I. User service data transmission through SPC

1)
Inter-board SPC
After the inter-board SPC is established, the user data borne at the SHDSL port can be
transmitted to RSP or PV8 frame over HW, and then transmitted over E1 channels. In
this case, the maximum available transmission rate at the SHDSL port is 26x64kbit/s
(for the RSP frame) or 28x64kbit/s (for the PV8 frame).
2)
Intra-board SPC
After the intra-board SPC (between the SHDSL port and E1 port of the board) is
established, the user data borne at the SHDSL port can be transmitted directly over E1
port of the board. In this case, the maximum available rate at the SHDSL port is 31 x 64
kbit/s.
II. Clock locking

The H303HSL board can lock clock signals from E1 interface or from the HW of the
backplane. Therefore, the H303HSL board can work at the environment where the
PSTN clock and the DDN clock are not synchronized with each other.
For the E1 access, the H303HSL board should lock the E1 clock signals.
For the HW access, the H303HSL board should lock the HW clock signals.
Moreover, the MD5500 system clock should be synchronized to the DDN clock.
3.24.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-60 shows the front panel of the H303HSL board.
3-95

Figure 3-60 Front panel of the H303HSL board

Table 3-63 describes the front panel of the H303HSL board.
Table 3-63 Front panel description of the H303HSL board
Name
RUN
WAN1/
WAN2
Color
Red
Green
Meaning
Running indicator
SHDSL indicator
Description
ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds: the
board is powered on and is performing the self-check.
ON for one second and OFF for one second: the
self-check is passed.
ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds: the
SHDSL port is in the training status.
ON: the SHDSL port is in the normal operation.
Normal
status
ON for one
second and
OFF for one
second
ON
OFF: the SHDSL port is deactivated.

ON: the E1 interface is in the normal operation.
E1-1/
E1-2
Green
E1 status indicator
OFF: the E1 interface has LOS or service is interrupted.

ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for 0.5 seconds: the LFA
alarm occurs.
3-96
ON

Name
Color
Meaning
Normal
status
Description
RESET
NA
Resetting switch
NA
COM
NA
Debugging serial
port
RS-232 for local maintenance. The default setting is

96000bit/s.
NA
Note: All indicators are off except the WAN1 when the software is loaded or the board software is to be run.

Figure 3-61 shows the layout of the H303HSL board.
ON
ON
ON
1 2 3 4
S3
1 2 3 4
S4
1 2 3 4
H303HSL
S7
Figure 3-61 Layout of the H303HSL board

Table 3-64 DIP switch settings of the H303HSL board
DIP switch
Function
S3
Impedance setting
switch for first E1
interface
S4
Impedance setting
switch for second
E1 interface
Meaning
If S3-1-4 are set to ON, the first E1 interface adopts the 75
matching impedance.
If they are set to OFF, the first E1 interface adopts the 120
matching impedance.
If S3-1-4 are set to ON, the second E1 interface adopts the
75 matching impedance.
If they are set to OFF, the second E1 interface adopts the
120 matching impedance.
3-97
Default setting
S3-1-4: ON
S4-1-4: ON

DIP switch
S7
Function
Meaning
Default setting
If S7-1 is set to ON, the SHDSL port is set to the E1 working

mode.
SHDSL port
working mode
If S7-1 is set to OFF, the SHDSL port is set to the V.35

working mode.
S7-1-4: ON
S7-2-4: reserved by the system.
Note:
The activation distance varies with the working mode of the SHDSL interface.
z
When it works in E1 mode, the maximum activation distance is 3 km.
When it works in V.35 mode, the higher the transmission rate is, the shorter the activation distance is.
When N is 3, the maximum activation distance is 6km. When N is 32, the maximum transmission distance
is 3km. the line quality should also be taken into consideration during the configuration.

Figure 3-62 and Figure 3-63 show the pin assignment between the H303HSL board
I1A
TT0
RT0
TT1
RT1
PGND
PGND
-48V
-48V
BGND
BGND
+5V
+5V
DGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
I1B
I1C
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
25
56
57
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
26
27
58
59
90
91
28
29
60
61
92
93
30
31
32
62
63
64
94
95
96
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
TR0
RR0
TR1
RR1
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
PGND
PGND
-48V
-48V
BGND
BGND
+5V
+5V
DGND
Figure 3-62 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the H303HSL board
3-98

I1A
DGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DGND
+5V
+5V
+5V
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
BGND
BGND
-48V
-48V
LINEA0
LINEA1
I1B
I1C
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
65
42
43
44
45
46
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
25
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
26
27
58
59
90
91
28
29
60
61
92
93
30
31
32
62
63
64
94
95
96
DGND
DGND
+5V
+5V
+5V
BGND
BGND
-48V
-48V
88
89
LINEB0
LINEB1
Figure 3-63 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the H303HSL

1)
The H303HSL board provides 2 E1 interfaces, distributed on the 1st 4th rows of
pins (in columns A and C). The characters on the pins are shown as follows.
z
TT0-1: the 1st to 2nd channels of E1 signal correspond to the tip of the
signal sent from the H303HSL.
TR0-1: the 1st to 2nd channels of E1 signal correspond to the ring of the
signal sent from the H303HSL.
RT0-1: the 1st to 2nd channels of E1 signal correspond to the tip of the
signal received at the H303HSL.
RR0-1: the 1st to 2nd channels of E1 signal correspond to the ring of the
signal received at the H303HSL.
2)
The H303HSL board provides 2 ports of SHDSL, distributed on the 31st 32nd
rows of pins (in columns A and C), as shown in Figure 3-63.The characters on the
pins are shown as follows.
3)
LINEA0-1: the line A of the 1st to 2nd SHDSL subscriber lines.
LINEB0-1: the line B of the 1st to 2nd SHDSL subscriber lines.
The definitions of other HEADER connector signals are shown as follows.

z
PGND: Protection ground.
DGND: Digital ground.
+5 V: +5 V power supply.
-48 V: 48 V power supply.
3-99

3.24.5 Notes
1)
The H303HSL board can be used in the GV5 system or work together with the
MD5500 system. When being used in the GV5 system, the NMS of the GV5 can
not configure the STU_R or the line attributes of SHDSL. The line attributes can be
configured via the debugging serial port on the H303HSL board. In general, use
the default configuration.
2)
To be compatible with the H302HSL board, there are several configuration

selections for V.35 interface. Among the configurations, only the port rate is
effective.
3)
Use Modem produced by XAVI Technologies Corporation. The followings should

be noted when you configure the Modem.
4)
Set the terminal type as CPE and the SHDSL Standard as ANNEX_B.
E1 Modem: Set the E1 frame structure as PCM31 and no CRC check.
V.35 Modem: Set V.35 rate attribute at initial status as auto negotiation.
Refer to the user guide of the Modem for detailed configuration.
Set the SHDSL terminal activation duration to 20-50 seconds when the SHDSL
terminal is connected with that from XAVI Technologies Corporation. The duration
may vary when the SHDSL terminal is connected with terminals from other
manufactures.
5)
The matching subscriber line of the H303HSL board is different from that of the
H302HSL board. There are four AMP connectors at one end of the cable (the
other end is connected to the cable distribution frame). Accordingly, one cable can
be connected with four H303HSL boards. Pay attention to the colors and labels of
cables connected with the AMP connectors.
3.25 SHDSL Interface Board (H521SDL)

3.25.1 Overview
The H521SDL board provides the SHDSL service access in the TDM mode. Each
H521SDL board provides four E1 interfaces and four SHDSL interfaces. After the
modem conversion, the four SHDSL interfaces change to V35 interfaces (N 64 kbit/s,
3N31) or E1 interfaces (2048 kbit/s).
According to the data configuration, the H521SDL board can track the clock of different
interfaces, including HW interface, trunk interface and SHDSL interface at subscriber
side. The SHDSL interfaces of the H521SDL board may be configured flexibly for
various applications. The SHDSL interface board can report the interface status.
3.25.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-64 shows the front panel of the H521SDL board.
3-100

RUN
W AN1
W AN2
W AN3
W AN4
E1-1
E1-2
E1-3
E1-4
COM
RESET
SDL
Figure 3-64 Front panel of the H521SDL board

Table 3-65 describes the front panel of the H521SDL board.
3-101

Table 3-65 Indicator description of the H521SDL board

Name
RUN
Color
Red
Meaning
Description
Running indicator
ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds

periodically: the board is powered on and is performing
the self-check.
ON for one second and OFF for one second periodically:
the self-check is passed.
WAN1WAN4
Normal
status
ON for one
second and
OFF for one
second
periodically
ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for 0.5 seconds

periodically: the SHDSL interface is in the training status.
Green
SHDSL indicator
Constantly on: the SHDSL interface is in the normal

operation.
ON
OFF: the SHDSL interface is deactivated.

Constantly ON: the E1 interface is in the normal
operation.
E1-1E1-4
Green
RESET
NA
Resetting switch
NA
COM
NA
Debugging serial
port
RS-232 for local maintenance. The default setting is

9600 bit/s.
NA
E1 status indicator
OFF: the E1 interface has LOS or service is interrupted.
ON
ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for 0.5 seconds: the LFA
alarm occurs.
Note: All indicators are off except the WAN1 when the software is loaded or the board software is to be run.

Figure 3-65 shows the layout of the H521SDL board.
3-102

ON
ON
ON
ON
1 2 3 4
S3
1 2 3 4
S4
1 2 3 4
S5
ON
1 2 3 4
S6
1 2 3 4
H521SDL
S7
Figure 3-65 Layout of the H521SDL board

Table 3-66 Settings of DIP switches of the H521SDL board
DIP switch
Function
S3
Impedance setting
switch for first E1
interface
S4
Impedance setting
switch for second
E1 interface
S5
Impedance setting
switch for third E1
interface
S6
Impedance setting
switch for fourth
E1 interface
S7
SHDSL interface
working mode
Meaning
S3-14 are set to ON: 75 matching
impedance.
S3-14 are set to OFF, 120 matching
impedance.
impedance.
S4-14 are set to OFF, 120 matching
impedance.
impedance.
S5-14 are set to OFF: 120 matching
impedance.
impedance.
S5-14 are set to OFF: 120 matching
impedance.
Default setting
ON
ON
ON
ON
S7-1 is set to ON: E1 mode.

S7-1 is set to OFF: V.35 working mode.
S7-24: reserved by the system.
3-103
ON

Note:
When the H521SDL works in the slave mode, only ports 0 and 2 are available, and ports 1 and 3 are
unavailable.
The activation distance varies with the working mode of the SHDSL interface.
z
When it works at E1 mode, the maximum activation distance is 3 km.
When it works at V.35 mode, the activation distance is related to the transmission rate.

Figure 3-66 and Figure 3-67 show the pin assignment between the H521SDL board
I1A
TT0
RT0
TT1
RT1
TT2
RT2
TT3
RT3
PGND
PGND
-48V
-48V
BGND
BGND
+5V
+5V
DGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
I1B
I1C
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
25
56
57
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
26
27
58
59
90
91
28
29
60
61
92
93
30
31
32
62
63
64
94
95
96
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
TR0
RR0
TR1
RR1
TR2
RR2
TR3
RR3
PGND
PGND
-48V
-48V
BGND
BGND
+5V
+5V
DGND
Figure 3-66 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the H521SDL board
3-104

I1A
DGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DGND
+5V
+5V
+5V
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
BGND
BGND
-48V
-48V
LINEA0
LINEA1
LINEA2
LINEA3
I1B
I1C
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
65
42
43
44
45
46
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
25
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
26
27
58
59
90
91
28
29
60
61
92
93
30
31
32
62
63
64
94
95
96
DGND
DGND
+5V
+5V
+5V
BGND
BGND
-48V
-48V
88
89
LINEB0
LINEB1
LINEB2
LINEB3
Figure 3-67 Signal definition of lower HEADER connector on the H521SDL board
1)
The H521SDL board provides 4 E1 interfaces, distributed on the 1st8th rows of

pins (in columns A and C), as shown in Figure 3-66. The characters on the pins
are shown as follows.
z
TT03: the 1st to 4th channels of E1 signal correspond to the tip of the
signal sent from the H521SDL.
TR03: the 1st to 4th channels of E1 signal correspond to the ring of the
signal sent from the H521SDL.
RT03: the 1st to 4th channels of E1 signal correspond to the tip of the
signal received at the H521SDL.
RR03: the 1st to 4th channels of E1 signal correspond to the ring of the
signal received at the H521SDL.
2)
The H521SDL board provides 4 ports of SHDSL, distributed on the 296th 32nd
rows of pins (in columns A and C), as shown in Figure 3-67.The characters on the
pins are shown as follows.
3)
LINEA03: the line A of the 1st to 4th SHDSL subscriber lines.
LINEB03: the line B of the 1st to 4th SHDSL subscriber lines.
The definitions of other HEADER connector signals are shown as follows.

z
PGND: Protection ground
DGND: Digital ground
+5 V: +5 V power supply
48 V: 48 V power supply
3-105

Note:
There are two AMP connectors at each end of the cable (the other end is connected to the cable
distribution frame). Accordingly, one cable can be connected with two H521SDL boards. Pay attention to
the different colors and labels of cables connected with AMP connectors.
3.26 16-Port SHDSL Board (H601SDLA)

3.26.1 Overview
The H601SDLA board (with the silk screen of SDLA) is the SHDSL port board, provides
the SHDSL service access in the ATM mode. Each board provides 16 SHDSL ports.
The upstream service ports are provided by the control board. The H601SDLA board is
used in the UA5000 frame.
After the SHDSL port is converted by the modem connecting with FE traffic, the SHDSL
port can provide FE interface. The higher the SHDSL port rate, the shorter the
transmission distance is:
z
If N is 3, the maximum activation distance is 6 km.
If N is 32, the maximum activation distance is 3 km.
However, reduce the above maximum activation distances due to the line quality.
3.26.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the H601SDLA board, as
Table 3-67 Indicator description of the H601SDLA board
Name
RUN
Color
Meaning
Red
Running
indicator
Description
ON for 0.25 seconds and OFF for 0.25 seconds: the board is
performing self-check.
ON for one second and OFF for one second: the board is running
normally.

Figure 3-68 shows the pin assignment between the H601SDLA board and backplane.
3-106

1st to 8th rows of pins
on the upper HEADER

25th to 32nd rows of pins
on the upper HEADER
Figure 3-68 Signal definition of connector HEADER on the H601SDLA board

The cable design is the same as that of the CC09ASL board. The former eight
subscriber lines are connected to the 1st8th of the upper HEADER, while the latter 8
subscriber lines are connected to the 25th32nd of the lower HEADER.
3.27 Voice Frequency Interface Board (CB02VFB)

3.27.1 Overview
The CB02VFB board is a voice frequency interface board with sixteen 2-wire or eight
4-wire voice frequency interfaces. It is compatible with the slots of other common
subscriber boards.
The board implements the conversion between the 2-wire and 4-wire signals and gain
adjusting under the control of software. However, it does not provide the feeding,
ringing and on-hook detection.
3.27.2 Front Panel

There is a RUN indicator in the front panel of the CB02VFB board, as described in
Table 3-68.
3-107

Table 3-68 Front panel description of the CB02VFB board

Indicator
Color
RUN
Red
Meaning
Running
indicator
status
Description
Normal status
ON for one second and OFF

for one second periodically:
the board is normal.
Blinking quickly or OFF: the
board is abnormal.
ON for one second

and OFF for one
second periodically

Figure 3-69 shows the layout of the CB02VFB board.
S051
S071
S031
ON
ON
S111
S091
ON
S011
ON
S131
ON
ON
ON
S151
ON
Figure 3-69 Layout of the CB02VFB board

Table 3-69 describes the settings of DIP switches of the CB02VFB board.
Table 3-69 Settings of DIP switches of the CB02VFB board
DIP switch
Controlled
port
S011-1
Factory
setting
ON
OFF
Select 600 impedance.
ON
S011-2
ON
S031-1
ON
S031-2
ON
3-108

DIP switch
Controlled
port
S051-1
Factory
setting
ON
OFF
ON
S051-2
ON
S071-1
ON
S071-2
ON
S091-1
ON
S091-2
10
ON
S111-1
11
ON
S111-2
12
ON
S131-1
13
ON
S131-2
14
ON
S151-1
15
ON
S151-2
16
ON

The CB02VFB provides 16 common audio interfaces.
z
The first eight interfaces are located on pin rows 1st8th in the upper HEADER.
See Figure 3-70.
The last eight interfaces are located on pin rows 25th32nd in the lower HEADER.
See Figure 3-71.
3-109

Figure 3-70 Pin assignment between the CB02VFB and the backplane (upper HEADER)
Figure 3-71 Pin assignment between the CB02VFB and the backplane (lower HEADER)
3-110

3.28 Railway Collinear Voice Frequency Interface Board

(CB03VFB)
3.28.1 Overview
The railway collinear voice frequency interface board (CB03VFB) is developed
specially for the railway market. It provides the terminal interfaces for the railway
collinear dispatch system and the common 2/4-wire audio frequency interfaces. The
board is slot compatible with subscriber board, and uses the same cables as the
32-port subscriber board.
The CB03VFB board implements the 2/4-wire conversion, gain adjustment. However, it
has not the functions of feedback, ringing and hang-on/off check.
3.28.2 Front Panel

There is only one RUN indicator in the front panel of the CB03VFB board, as described
in Table 3-70.
Indicator
RUN
Color
Red
Meaning
Description
Normal status
Running indicator:
used to indicate
the working status
of the board
ON for one second and OFF for

one second: the board is normal.
Blinks quickly or OFF: the board
is abnormal.
ON for one second

and OFF for one
second

Figure 3-72 shows the layout of the CB03VFB board.
3-111

SW0
ON
SW1
ON
Figure 3-72 Layout of the CB03VFB board

Table 3-71 describes the settings of DIP switch of the CB03VFB board.
Table 3-71 Settings of DIP switches of the CB03VFB board
DIP
switch
SW0
SW1
Function
ON
OFF
For
backplane
setting
Corresponding to the
backplanes of HFB, HGB
and HIB. When it is set to
ON, the upper eight ports
support the switchover
between new and old
systems.
backplanes of HFB,
HGB and HIB. When it is
set to OFF, the upper
from five to eight ports
dont
support
the
switchover between new
and old systems.
OFF
For
backplane
setting
backplanes of HFB, HGB
and HIB. When it is set to
ON, the lower eight ports
support the switchover
between new and old
systems.
backplanes of HFB,
HGB and HIB. When it is
set to OFF, the lower
from five to eight ports
dont
support
the
switchover between new
and old systems.
OFF
3-112
Factory setting

Note:
CB03VFB can be applied in the PV8 or RSP frame, instead of the UA5000 frame.

The interfaces of the CB03VFB are distributed as follows.
z
The first eight interfaces are located on pin rows 1st8th in the upper HEADER.
They are dedicated to the railway collinear telephone system, and cannot connect
with common audio frequency Modem. See Figure 3-70.
The last eight interfaces are located on pin rows 25th32nd rows of pins in the
lower HEADER. They are common audio interfaces that provide audio services.
See Figure 3-71.
3.29 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H301HWC)

3.29.1 Overview
Installed in the UA5000 Master (UAM) and PV8-10 frames, the H301HWC board
implements the level conversion of HW signal and clock signal.
The H301HWC board provides 32 differential HWs. So, both the UAM frame and
PV8-10 control frames can support multiple RSP-14 subscriber frames.
The UAM frame can be cascaded with both the UAS and RSP-14 subscriber frames,
while the PV8-10 control frame can only be cascaded with the RSP-14 subscriber
frame.
3.29.2 Front Panel

There is only one red indicator for power supply (PWR) in the front panel of the
H301HWC board, as described in Table 3-72.
Indicator
PWR
Color
Red
Meaning
Power
indicator
Description
supply
ON: the power supply of the board is normal.

OFF: the power supply of the board is abnormal.

The differential HW interface of the H301HWC lie in pin rows 164. See Figure 3-73.
3-113

I1D
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
I1C
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
52
63
64
I1B
1
UHW0UHW1DHW0DHW1-
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
UHW4UHW4DHW5-
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
DHW5-
UHW8UHW8DHW9DHW9-
UHW12UHW12DHW13-
25
DHW13-
28
29
26
27
30
31
32
I1D
30
31
32
I1C
UHW16UHW17DHW16DHW17-
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
UHW28UHW29DHW28-
57
DHW29-
60
61
58
59
52
63
64
UHW2+
UHW3+
DHW2+
DHW3+
UHW2UHW3DHW2DHW3UHW6+
UHW7+
DHW6+
DHW7+
UHW11+
DHW10+
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
DHW11+
25
UHW15+
26
27
DHW14+
DHW15+
28
29
UHW0+
UHW1+
DHW0+
DHW1+
UHW4+
UHW4+
DHW5+
DHW5+
UHW8+
UHW8+
DHW9+
DHW9+
UHW12+
UHW12+
DHW13+
DHW13+
30
31
32
I1B
UHW18+
UHW19+
DHW18+
DHW19+
UHW23+
DHW22+
DHW23+
UHW27+
DHW26+
DHW27+
UHW31+
DHW30+
DHW31+
Figure 3-73 Pin definition of the H301HWC
3-114
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
52
63
64
UHW16+
UHW17+
DHW16+
DHW17+
UHW20+
UHW21+
DHW20+
DHW21+
UHW24+
UHW25+
DHW24+
DHW25+
UHW28+
UHW29+
DHW28+
DHW29+

3.30 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H601HWCA)

3.30.1 Overview
Installed in the UAFM frame, the H601HWCA board implements the level conversion of
HW signal and clock signal.
The H601HWCA board can provide 16 differential HWs. When two boards are
configured, they can provide 32 differential HWs. So, the UAFM frame can be
cascaded with up to four UAFS frames.
3.30.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-74 shows the front panel of the H601HWCA board.
Figure 3-74 Front panel of the H601HWCA board

There is only one DB100 connector in the front panel of the H601HWCA board.
3.31 Differential HW Level Conversion Board (H301HWT)

3.31.1 Overview
Installed in the PV8-19 control frames, the H301HWT board implements the differential
level conversion of HW signal.
The H301HWT board can provide 32 differential HWs. So, the PV8-19 control frame
can support multiple RSP subscriber frames.
3-115

Note:
z
The H301HWT board can only be used in the PV8-19 control frames for their upgrade and expansion.
It must be used together with the H302PV8/H302PV4 board.
The H301HWT is a small subboard at the back of the backplane. It occupies three slots, two of which
are slots of the PV8/4 control board and one is the subscriber slot left to the control board (front view of
the frame). Therefore, when the H301HWT board is used, this subscriber slot will not be available for
other boards.
3.31.2 External Interfaces

The description of the HEADER interfaces on the backplane is as follows.
I. Left and right PV8 slots of H301HWT board

Pin rows 17th24th and 25th32nd on the upper HEADER at the PV8Lslot
(corresponding to the left PV8 board) are connected respectively to the 1st8th E1
interfaces of the left PV8 board.
Pin rows 17th24th and 25th32nd on the upper HEADER at the PV8R slot
(corresponding to the right PV8 board) are connected respectively to the 1st8th E1
interfaces of the right PV8 board.
II. HWT slots of the H301HWT board

The following rows of pins provide eight differential cables to connect to the differential
interfaces of the RSP subscriber frame:
z
Pin rows 1st8th, 96th16th, 17th24th and 25th32nd on the upper HEADER.
Pin rows 1st8th, 96th16th, 17th24th and 25th32nd on the lower HEADER.
3.32 Environment & Power Supply Monitoring Board

(H302ESC)
3.32.1 Overview
The H302ESC board is the environment and power supply monitoring board. It
monitors the environment and power supply in the cabinet. The monitoring parameters
are as follows.
z
Temperature
Humidity
Primary power supply
Access control
Cable distribution frame
Under-voltage power-off of the battery
3-116

Status of the internal fans
Even and floating charge of the storage battery by the primary power supply
The H302ESC board can also be connected to the environment monitoring equipment
AMS-2 through serial port.
3.32.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-75 shows the front panel of the H302ESC board.
Fixing hole
RUN
EALM
PALM
Indicators
Figure 3-75 Front panel of the H302ESC

Table 3-73 describes the front panel of the H302ESC board.
Table 3-73 Indicator description of the H302ESC board
Name
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Red
Running indicator
EALM
Red
Environmental
indicator
alarm
PALM
Red
Power supply
indicator
alarm
OFF: environment parameter is normal.

ON: alarm for the environment parameter.
OFF: power supply parameter is normal.
ON: alarm in the power supply parameter.

Figure 3-76 shows the layout of the H302ESC board.
3-117

P1
S1
S2
S3
S5
J1
P2
J2
P3
J13
J6
D3
D2
D1
J12
J8
S4
J14
J7
J15
J10
H302ESC
J4
J11
J9
S6
J3
J5
Figure 3-76 Layout of the H302ESC board

Table 3-74 describes the jumper settings of the H302ESC board.
Table 3-74 Settings of jumpers of the H302ESC board
Jumper
Meaning
1-2 connected: indicating serial port SIO1 is RS422.
S1

S2

S3

1-2 connected: ESC board alarm buzzer enabled.
S4
2-3 connected: ESC board alarm buzzer shielded.

1-2 connected: indicating the external intelligent power
supply system is PS48100-3/20.
S5
2-3 connected: indicating the external intelligent power

supply system is PS48100.
S6
Reset switch.
Setting before
delivery
2-3 connected
2-3 connected
2-3 connected
1-2 connected
1-2 connected
NA
3.33 Environment & Power Monitoring Board (H303ESC)

3.33.1 Overview
The H303ESC board is the environment and power supply monitoring board. It
monitors the following items.
z
Temperature
Humidity
Access control
3-118

Infrared (external sensor should be connected)
Smoke sensor (external sensor should be connected)
Fan
The H303ESC board communicates with the host through serial port.
The H303ESC board can connect with the following parts.
z
Six external analog sensors
Sixteen external digital sensors
Intelligent power supply equipment through serial ports
Environment monitoring equipment AMS-2 through serial ports
3.33.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-77 shows the front panel of the H303ESC board.
Fixing hole
ESC
OFF
Buzzer switch
ON
Indicator
RUN
Figure 3-77 Front panel of the H303ESC board

Table 3-75 describes the front panel of the H303ESC board.
Table 3-75 Indicator description of the H302ESC board
Indicator
RUN
Color
Red
Meaning
Running indicator
Description
second: Working normally.
Blinks quickly: Working abnormally
Beeper switch
NA
Beeper switch
Used to set the audio alarm.
RESET
NA
Manual
switch
3-119
resetting


Figure 3-78 shows the layout of the H303ESC board.
H303ESC
12345678
ON
S5
S9
S6
S1
S2
S10
S3
S8
J2 J5
12 34
ON
S11
D1
S7
Figure 3-78 Layout of the H303ESC

Table 3-76 describes the jumper setting of the H303ESC board. Table 3-77 and Table
3-78 describe the DIP switch settings of the H303ESC board.
Table 3-76 Jumper settings of the H302ESC board
Jumper
S1
S2
S11
Description of setting
1-2 connected: running indicator on the board is valid.
2-3 connected: running indicator on the board is invalid.
Default
setting
2-3 connected
2-3 connected
1-2 connected
When pins 1 and 2 of S3, S8 and S10 are connected: serial port
SIO3 is RS232.
S3, S8, S10
When pins 2 and 3 of S3 are connected, and pins 1 and 2 of S8

and S10 are connected: serial port SIO3 is RS422.
When pins 2 and 3 of S8 and S10 are connected, without
consideration of S3: serial port SIO3 is RS485.
3-120
All as 1-2
connected

Table 3-77 Settings of DIP switch S6 on the H303ESC board

DIP switch
Default
setting
Meaning
When S6-1 to S6-6 are ON: indicates that the external analog
sensor is the current sensor.
S6
When S6-1 to S6-6 are OFF: indicates that the external analog
sensor is the voltage sensor.
ON
S6-7 to S6-8 are meaningless, and are reserved.
Table 3-78 Settings of DIP switch S7 on the H303ESC board

Status
Default
setting
ON
OFF
S7-1
The H303ESC board is used in the

access network.
The H303ESC board is used

in the switch.
ON
S7-2
The H303ESC board uses one

serial port for reporting.
The H303ESC board uses

two serial ports for reporting.
ON
S7-3
Reserved.
S7-4
Indicating that the reported baud

rate is 19200.
DIP:
ON
Indicating that the reported
baud rate is 9600.
ON
3.34 Subscriber Test Board (CC08TSS)

3.34.1 Overview
The CC08TSS board is the subscriber test board of the HONET. It tests the analog
subscriber interface (Z interface) and digital subscriber interface (U interface). The
board provides two testing channels.
It provides interfaces and channels for AN subscriber test, implementing the following
functions.
z
Subscriber line test
Analog subscriber circuit test
Analog phone test
Digital subscriber circuit test
Digital subscriber terminal test
Alarm collection and report
Besides, The CC08TSS board provides:

z
Serial ports for the maintenance and board monitoring printing.
Testing bus interface to connect with the subscriber line test equipment.
3-121

3.34.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-79 shows the front panel of the CC08TSS board.
Figure 3-79 Front panel of the CC08TSS board

Table 3-79 describes the front panel of the CC08TSS board.
Table 3-79 Front panel description of the CC08TSS board
Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
RUN
Red
Running indicator
ON: the board works normally.
FAIL
Green
Alarm indicator
OFF: normal
+12V
Green
+12 V power indicator
ON: +12 V power is normal.
-12V
Green
12 V power indicator
ON: 12 V power is normal.
+5VD
Green
Digital +5 V power indicator
ON: digital +5 V power is normal.
3-122

Indicator
Color
Meaning
Description
+5VA
Green
Analog +5 V power indicator
ON: analog +5 V power is normal.
HOW
Green
Howler tone indicator
ON: Howling tone is given.
ACT
Green
U port activation indicator
ON: the U port is activated.

Figure 3-80 shows the layout of the CC08TSS board.
CC08TSS
J5
J1
Figure 3-80 Layout of the CC08TSS board

Figure 3-81 and Figure 3-82 show the pin assignment between the CC08TSS board
and backplane. (Its the front view of the backplane.)
3-123

Figure 3-81 Signal definition of upper HEADER connector on the TSS board
Figure 3-82 Signal definition of lower HEADER connector on the TSS board
3-124

In the diagram:
z
MANR and MANL: Manual testing channel
HAUTOR and HAUTOL: Semiautomatic testing channel
ISLR1 and ISLT2: The first internal line testing channel
IAT0A and IAT0B: AT0 internal line testing channel
OSLR1 and OSLT1: The first outer line testing channel
IAT0A and IAT0B: AT0 internal line testing channel
TELR and TELT: analog phone interface of the subscriber line test center console
RINGI: PWX ringing signal, input
-48V: 48 V power supply
GND: 48 V power supply ground
RIO1+ to RIO16+: 16 reserved testing channels
FGND: Test ground
TNT1R and TNT1T: Analog phone interface of the subscriber line test center
console
TDSLR and TDSLT: Local standard NT1 interfaces
+5VBB: +5 V power supply
GND: +5 V power supply ground
IDBACI: C&C08 B or C&C08 A and C&C08 C switch judging signal (input signal)
BRX1 and BTXO: C&C08 B serial port sending/receiving channel
ISLR1 and ISLT2: The second internal line testing channels
OSLR2 and OSLT2: The second outer line testing channels
RX422+, RX422-, TX422+ and TX422-: C&C08 A or C&C08 C serial port

sending/receiving channels
APOWI+: Secondary power supply alarm signal (input)
A48VO+ and A48VO-: 48 V alarm signals (output)
A48VO+ and A48VO-: CPU alarm signals (output)
AIMPO+ and AIMPO-: Major alarm signals (output)
AORDO+ and AORDO-: Normal alarm signals (output)
ABLKO+ and ABLKO-: Block alarm signals (output)
ATSL+ and ATSL-: TSL board alarm signals (output)
3.35 Subscriber Test Board (H601TSS)

3.35.1 Overview
The H601TSS tests the following items.
z
Analog subscriber circuit line/loop line
Telephone set
AT0 circuit line/loop line
Activation/deactivation/feed of ISDN 2B+D U interface
Activation capability of ISDN digital terminal
Transmission error ratio

3-125

It also sends alarm information to alarm box or rack alarm indicators, and detects the
secondary power alarm.
Compared to the CB01TSS, the H601TSS board adds some functions.
z
Communicating with the APM/IPM boards through serial port.
Testing the circuit quality test (CQT) for the ADSL service and communicating with
external CQT equipment.
Providing a DB-8 interface in the front panel.
Connecting internal and external test bus for the emulation test at the XDSL CO
end.
3.35.2 Front Panel
RUN
FAIL
+12V
-12V
+5VD
+5VA
HOW
ACT
(1)
TSS
(1) CQT interface
Figure 3-83 Front panel of the H601TSS board

Table 3-80 describes the front panel of the H601TSS board.
Table 3-80 Front panel description of the H601TSS board
Name
RUN
Color
Red
Meaning
Operation status indicator
Description
Blinking quickly: not started yet.
3-126

Name
Color
Meaning
Description
ON: running abnormally.
FAIL
Green
Alarm indicator
+12V
Green
+12 V power indicator
-12V
Green
12 V power indicator
+5VD
Green
Digital +5 V power indicator
+5VA
Green
Analog +5 V power indicator
HOW
Green
Howler tone indicator
ACT
Green
U port activation indicator
OFF: running normally.

ON: +12 V power is normal.
OFF: +12 V power is abnormal.
ON: 12 V power is normal.
OFF: 12 V power is abnormal.
ON: digital +5 V power is normal.
OFF: digital +5 V power is abnormal.
ON: analog +5 V power is normal.
OFF: analog +5V power is abnormal.
ON: Howling tone is given.
OFF: Howling tone is not given.
ON: the U port is activated.
OFF: the U port is not activated.

There is no DIP switches or Jumpers on the H601TSS board.

Figure 3-84 and Figure 3-85 show the pin assignment between the CC08TSS board
and backplane. (Its the front view of the backplane.)
3-127

Figure 3-84 Pin assignment between the H601TSS board and backplane (Upper HEADER)
B-RXD
B-TXD
Figure 3-85 Pin assignment between the H601TSS board and backplane (Lower HEADER)
Table 3-81 lists the meanings of the signal cables.
3-128

Table 3-81 Meanings of signal cables of the H60ATSS components

Signal Cable
Definition
MANR, MANL
Manual testing channel
HAUTOR, HAUTOL
Semiautomatic testing channel
ISLR1, ISLT1
The first internal line testing channel
IAT0A, IAT0B
AT0 internal line testing channel
OSLR1, OSLT1
The first outer line testing channel
OAT0A, OAT0B
AT0 internal line testing channel
TELR, TELT
analog phone interface of the subscriber line test center console
RINGI
PWX ringing signal (input)
48 V
48 V power supply
GND
48 V power supply ground
RIO1+ RIO16+
16 reserved testing channels
FGND
Test ground
TNT1R, TNT1T
analog phone interface of the subscriber line test center console
TDSLR, TDSLT
Local standard NT1 interfaces
+5VBB
+5 V power supply
GND
+5 V power supply ground
IDBACI
C&C08 B or C&C08 A and C&C08 C switch judging signal (input

signal)
BRXI, BTXO
C&C08 B serial port sending/receiving channel
ISLR2, ISLT2
The second internal line testing channels
OSLR2, OSLT2
The second external line testing channels
RX422+, RX422-, TX422+,

TX422-
C&C08 A or C&C08 C serial port sending/receiving channels
APOWI+
Secondary power supply alarm signal (input)
A48VO+, A48VO-
48 V alarm signals (output)
ACPUO+, ACPUO-
CPU alarm signals (output)
AIMPO+, AIMPO-
Major alarm signals (output)
AORDO+, AORDO-
Minor alarm signals (output)
ABLKO+, ABLKO-
Block alarm signals (output)
ATSL+, ATSL-
TSL board alarm signals (output)
B-RXD
Broadband serial port input
B-TXD
Broadband serial port output
3-129

3.36 Secondary Power Supply Board (CC03PWX)

3.36.1 Overview
The CC03PWX secondary power supply board is a universal medium-power output
power board for the access network equipment. The power board can provide three
types of outputs: +5 V/20 A, 5 V/5 A, and 75 V AC/0.4 A.
Usually, two CC03PWX boards are plugged in one frame. However, for mutual
assistance between frames or for HIB backplane, only one board needs to be
configured. Two secondary power supply boards in one frame work in the load sharing
mode.
3.36.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-86 shows the front panel of the CC03PWX board.
Figure 3-86 Front panel of the CC03PWX board

Table 3-82 describes the front panel of the CC03PWX board.
3-130

Table 3-82 Front panel description of the CC03PWX board

Name
Color
Meaning
Description
ON: normal.
Normal
status
VIN
Red
The current board input

voltage status
VA0
Green
Ringing working status
ON: ringing output normal.

OFF: ringing output abnormal.
ON
VB0
Green
+5 V working status
ON: +5 V output normal.

OFF: +5V output abnormal.
ON
VC0
Green
5 V working status
ON: 5 V output normal.

OFF: 5 V output abnormal.
ON
Yellow
Failure status
Blinks (at the rate of 25 Hz): errors

occur in any module in this board.
OFF: no error occurs in any
module in this board.
OFF
NA
Various module control

switch in this board
ON: modules in this board works

normally.
OFF: no output from modules in
this board.
ON
Audio/visual
switchover switch
ON: simultaneous audio/visual

alarm occurs if fault occurs in this
board.
OFF: only visual alarm occurs
when fault occurs in this board.
ON
FAIL
POWER
S1
ALM S2
NA
alarm
OFF: abnormal.
ON

Figure 3-87 shows the layout of the CC03PWX board. Table 3-83 gives the jumper
settings of the CC03PWX board.
3-131

xs1
CC03PWX
XP3
1 2 3
XP2
1 2 3
1 2 3
xs2
XP1
S1
S2
Figure 3-87 Layout of the CC03PWX board

Table 3-83 Settings of jumpers of the CC03PWX board
Jumper
Description
Meanings
XP1
Module mode selection

jumper
12: module of AMERSON is selected.
XP2
Module mode selection

jumper
Jumper
compatible
with system alarm box
XP3
23: CP company's module is selected.

12: Huawei electrical module is
selected.
Leave factory
setting
Connect 12
Connect 12
23: CP company's module is selected.

12 (02): Alarm box is version 02.
23 (03): Alarm box is version 03.
Connect 12 (02)
3.37 Secondary Power Supply Board (CC04PWX)

3.37.1 Overview
The output power of the CC04PWX board is greater than the CC03PWX board.
The functions of the CC04PWX board are as follows.
z
Providing three types of outputs (+5 V DC/30 A, 5 V DC/10 A and 75 V AC/400

mA).
Adopting the cold-hot status automatic conversion circuit for the switching of
ringing current on the backplane.
Communicating in real time with the network management system.
3-132

z
Automatic checking.
Flow equalization.
The CC04PWX board is inserted in the subscriber frame. One or two CC04PWX
boards are plugged in one frame to realize the hot backup of power for the loading of
subscriber frame and enhance the system reliability.
3.37.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-88 shows the front panel of the CC04PWX board.
Figure 3-88 Front panel of the CC04PWX board

Table 3-84 describes the front panel of the CC04PWX board.
Table 3-84 Indication description of the CC04PWX board
Name
RUN
Color
Red
Meaning
Board
status
Description
operation
3-133
Slow
flickering:
communication.
Quick flickering:
communication.
Normal status
normal
abnormal
Quick flickering

Name
Color
Meaning
Description
VA0
Green
Ringing
status
working
VB0
Green
+5 V
status
working
VC0
Green
5 V
status
working
FAIL
POWER
ALM
ON: ringing output is normal.

OFF: ringing output is abnormal.
ON: +5 V output is normal.
OFF: +5 V output is abnormal.
Normal status
ON
ON
ON: 5 V output is normal.

OFF: 5 V output is abnormal.
ON
OFF
Yellow
Failure status
Blinks (at the rate of 25 Hz):

abnormal status occurs on any
module within this board.
OFF: no abnormal status occurs
in any module within this board.
NA
Control switch for

each module within
this board
ON: all modules within this board

work
properly.
OFF: no output from all modules
within this board.
ON
Audio/visual alarm
switchover switch
ON: If failure status occurs within

the board, audio/visual alarms
are
sent
simultaneously.
OFF: If failure status occurs
within the board, only visual
alarm is sent.
ON
NA
3.37.3 DIP Switches

Figure 3-89 shows the layout of the CC04PWX board. Table 3-85 and Table 3-86 give
respectively the description of DIP switch and jumper settings of the CC04PWX board.
3-134

JPA1
CC04PWX
JPB1
ON
1 2
S101
JP402V
1 2 3
SW402
S401
SW401
Figure 3-89 Layout of CC04PWX board
I. Reset key SW401

The key SW401 within the board is designed to reset the CPU of the board.
II. DIP switch SW402

One gear of the DIP switch SW402 is used to switch the status monitoring of 24 V
input voltage. The other gear is used to power the auxiliary loop within the control board,
Table 3-85 Settings of DIP switch SW402 of the CC04PWX board
DIP switch
SW402-1
SW402-2
Description
Meanings
Leave factory setting
To
switch
over
monitoring of 24 V
input voltage status
ON: this board is used to

detect input 24 V voltage
working
status.
OFF: this board is not used to
detect input 24 V voltage
working status.
When the system has

24 V, this position is
ON.
Power for auxiliary

loop in the board
Otherwise, the position is

set to OFF.
ON: auxiliary loop power is on.

OFF: auxiliary loop power is
not ON.
3-135
ON

III. NOD monitoring serial port

The NOD communication serial port is connected to the subscriber backplane through
PIN 61 and PIN 62 of the JPB1. The corresponding signals are TXD1 and RXD1
respectively.
Table 3-86 Settings of jumper of the CC04PWX board
Jumper
Description
Meanings
JP402
Jumper
compatible
with system
alarm box
Alarm box: version 02 and version 03.

Jumpers are set to pins 12: alarm box is version 02.
Jumpers are set to pins 23: alarm box is version 03.
Leave factory
setting
Connect
12
pins
3.38 Secondary Power Supply Board (H601PWX/H301PWX)

3.38.1 Overview
The H601PWX/H301PWX board is a secondary power supply board. It is improved
based on the CC04PWX board by adding the reset function when a module is locked
due to output over-voltage. In addition, it has the functions of auto-detection, even
current, and real-time communication with background.
This board is installed in the UAM/UAS/UAFM/UAFS frame, with a maximum of two
H301PWX boards in each frame. They work in the active/standby mode to ensure the
system security.
The H601PWX board is the same as the H301PWX board, the following will take the
H301PWX board as the example.
3.38.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-90 shows the front panel of the H301PWX board.
3-136

Figure 3-90 Front panel of the H301PWX board

Table 3-87 describes the front panel of the H301PWX board.
Table 3-87 Indicator description of the H301PWX board
Name
RUN
Color
Meaning
Description
Blinks slowly: the communication
is normal.
Red
Running indicator
VA0
Green
Ringing
working
indicator
VB0
Green
+5 V working status
indicator
ON: +5 V output is normal.
VC0
Green
5 V working status
indicator
ON: 5 V output is normal.
Green
Fault
indicator
FAIL
current
status
status
Blinks quickly: the communication

is abnormal.
ON: ringing current output is
normal.
OFF: ringing current output is
abnormal.
OFF: +5 V output is abnormal.
OFF: 5 V output is abnormal.
Blinks at 25 Hz: abnormal status
occurs to any module of this
board.
OFF: all modules are normal.
3-137
Normal status
Blinks slowly
ON
ON
ON
OFF

Name
POWER
ALM
Color
NA
NA
Meaning
Description
Normal status
Control switch for

each module of this
board
ON: all modules work normally.

OFF: all modules have no output.
ON
Audio/visual alarm
switchover switch
ON: If failure status occurs to the

board, audio/visual alarms are
given
simultaneously.
OFF: If failure status occurs to the
board, only visual alarm is given.
ON

Figure 3-91 shows the layout of the H301PWX board.
H301PWX
JPA1
JPB1
S101
JP101
3 2 1
SW402
1
2
3
4
OFF
S401
ON
SW401
Figure 3-91 Layout of the H301PWX board
I. Reset switch SW401

This switch is used to reset the board.
II. DIP switch SW402

Table 3-88 describes the settings of DIP switch of the H301PWX board.
3-138


DIP switch
Description
Factory setting
It is used to set the RUN indicator.

ON: the running indicator is set to blinking status.
SW402-1
OFF: the running indicator is set to constantly ON status.
OFF
When it is configured with the CC03PWX board together, this

DIP switch is placed in OFF status.
It is used to switch over the monitoring status of 24 V input
voltage.
SW402-2
ON: use this board to monitor the working status of the input
24 V voltage.
OFF: do not use this board to monitor the working status of the
input 24 V voltage.
It is placed in ON
status if the system
has 24 V voltage,
otherwise in OFF
status.
ON: the backplane matches H301HEB and H301HCB boards.

SW402-3
SW402-4
OFF: the backplane matches H301HFB, H301HGB, H301HIB

and CB01SLB.
ON: DC/DC module can be reset after being locked.
OFF: DC/DC module cannot be reset after being locked.
OFF
ON
III. Jumpers
As shown in Figure 3-91, Pins 1, 2, and 3 of JP101 are arranged from right to left. By
default, Pins 1 and 2 are connected.
3.39 155 Mbit/s SDH Optical Transmission Board (H302ASU)

3.39.1 Overview
The H302ASU board integrates all the functions of the standard SDH transmission
equipment. It provides the following interfaces or ports.
z
dual STM-1 optical interfaces
up to 16 E1 electrical interfaces
RS-232 transparent transmission serial port
Ethernet interface
The H302ASU adopts the same network management system together with all OptiX
SDH transmission units.
The H302ASU board is an upgraded version of the 155 Mbit/s STM-1 optical
transmission board H301ASU. With all functions of the H301ASU, it expands its
functions on the tributary part.
3-139

Note:
The H302ASU board is not compatible with backplane of the UA5000UAM/UAS/UAFM/UAFS frame.
z
When the H302ASU board provides only 8 E1 interfaces, it is fully compatible with the backplanes
HGB, HIB, HCB, HDB and HEB.
When it provides 16 E1 interfaces, it is not compatible with the backplanes HCB, HDB and HEB.
3.39.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-92 shows the front panel of the H302ASU board.
(1)
(2)
(1) Western optical interface
(2) Eastern optical interface
Figure 3-92 Front panel of the H302ASU board
3-140

Table 3-89 describes the front panel of the H302ASU board.

Table 3-89 Front panel description of the H302ASU board
Indicator,
interface &
switch
Color
Meaning
Normal
status
Illustration
OFF for five seconds: initiation of
hardware and operation system.
Yellow for five seconds: loading
programming devices.
Green for seven seconds: initiation of
BIOS.
Green, blinking per 0.5 seconds:
BIOS operation.
RUN
Green/
yellow/
red
Running and
alarm
indicator
Yellow, blinking at the rate of 2 Hz for

13 seconds: loading host software.
Green, blinking at the rate of 10 Hz
for 38 seconds: initiation of host
software.
Green,
blinking per
one second
Green, blinking per one second: host

software is working.
Red and green, alternative blinking
(per one second) - eastern optical
fiber breakout.
Red and yellow, alternative flickering
(per one second) - western or two
direction optical fibers breakout.
ON: A network cable connects the
Ethernet interface (RJ45) on board
with a computer.
ETN
Green
Ethernet
indicator
Western
optical
interface
NA
Western
optical
interface
Upper receiving/lower sending, 155M

single-mode, 1310 nm.
NA
Eastern
optical
interface
NA
Eastern
optical
interface
Upper receiving/lower sending, 155

M single-mode, 1310 nm.
NA
BUZ
NA
Blinks quickly: The NMS is

transmitting data through Ethernet
interface.
Alarm sound
switch
3-141
Switch moves up: If there is a critical

alarm on board, then it sends out
squealing sound of critical alarm.
Switch moves down: Whether there
is critical alarm on board or not, it
does not send out alarm sound.
ON/Blinking
quickly
NA

Indicator,
interface &
switch
Color
Meaning
Normal
status
Illustration
NA
Ethernet
interface
A standard 10BASE-T Ethernet

interface, providing communication
channel between NMS computer and
board.
NA
COM
NA
Transparent
transmission
serial
port/orderwire
telephone
interface
RS232 transparent transmission

serial port and orderwire telephone
share the external interface.
NA
RST
NA
Reset switch
Hardware reset switch.
NA
ETH
Note:
z
It takes about one minute for board to cone into normal status since it is powered on.
For the RUN indicator, green means normal, yellow means minor alarm, while red means critical
alarm.

Figure 3-93 shows the layout of the H302ASU board.
3-142

1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
SW101
SW111
SW4
H302ASU
ON
4 3 2 1
SW3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ON='0'
OFF='1'
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
SW102
SW112
ON
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
ON
SW106
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
SW116
1 2 3 4
SW105
SW115
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
SW107
SW117
J3
ON
J17
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
SW108
SW118
PROM
ON
3 2 1
CPU
3 2 1
1 2 3 4
ON
ON
SW104
ON
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
SW114
1 2 3 4
SW103
SW113
ON
J28
J30
24V
48V
OFF
ON
1 2 3
3 2 1
Figure 3-93 Layout of the H302ASU board (DIP switch and jumper)
I. Setup of DIP switches SW3, SW4

DIP switches SW3, SW4 are used to setup the IP address of NEs, as follows:
z
The lower 8 bits of SW3 indicates the fourth part (0-255) of IP address
The upper 4 bits of SW4 indicates the third part (0-15) of IP address.
ON indicates1, OFF indicates 0.
Based on the DIP switch setup of SW3, SW4 and SW1, we can see the IP address
129.9 belongs to the third and fourth parts (decimal system).
Correspondingly, objective address for the control software downloading is 090XXX
(hex number of lower byte of IP address). The DIP switches of IP address are in the
upper right part of board, as shown in Figure 3-94.
3-143

SW4
4 3 2 1
SW3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ON
ON
The higher four bits

are arranged in
ascending sequence
from right to left.
The lower eight bits are

arranged in ascending
sequence from right to left
Figure 3-94 DIP switch of IP address
II. DIP switch and jumper setup for 75/120 impedance selection of 16
tritubaries
Table 3-90 Settings of tributary DIP switch and jumper
Resistance
75
Tributary no.
Tributary 1
Tributary 2
Tributary 3
Tributary 4
Tributary 5
Tributary 6
Tributary 7
Tributary 8
Tributary 9
SW101-1:ON
SW101-2:ON
SW101-3:ON
SW101-4:ON
SW102-1:ON
SW102-2:ON
SW102-3:ON
SW102-4:ON
SW103-1:ON
SW103-2:ON
SW103-3:ON
SW103-4:ON
SW104-1:ON
SW104-2:ON
SW104-3:ON
SW104-4:ON
SW105-1:ON
SW105-2:ON
120
SW111-1:OFF
SW111-2:ON
SW101-1:OFF
SW101-2:OFF
SW111-1:OFF
SW111-2:OFF
SW111-3:OFF
SW111-4:ON
SW101-3: OFF
SW101-4:OFF
SW111-3:OFF
SW111-4:OFF
SW112-1:OFF
SW112-2:ON
SW102-1: OFF
SW102-2:OFF
SW112-1:OFF
SW112-2:OFF
SW112-3:OFF
SW112-4:ON
SW102-3: OFF
SW102-4:OFF
SW112-3:OFF
SW112-4:OFF
SW113-1:OFF
SW113-2:ON
SW103-1: OFF
SW103-2:OFF
SW113-1:OFF
SW113-2:OFF
SW113-3:OFF
SW113-4:ON
SW103-3: OFF
SW103-4:OFF
SW113-3:OFF
SW113-4:OFF
SW114-1:OFF
SW114-2:ON
SW104-1: OFF
SW104-2:OFF
SW114-1:OFF
SW114-2:OFF
SW114-3:OFF
SW114-4:ON
SW104-3: OFF
SW104-4:OFF
SW114-3:OFF
SW114-4:OFF
SW115-1:OFF
SW115-2:ON
SW105-1: OFF
SW105-2:OFF
SW115-1:OFF
SW115-2:OFF
3-144

Resistance
75
Tributary no.
Tributary 10
Tributary 11
Tributary 12
Tributary 13
Tributary 14
Tributary 15
Tributary 16
SW105-3:ON
SW105-4:ON
SW106-1:ON
SW106-2:ON
SW106-3:ON
SW106-4:ON
SW107-1:ON
SW107-2:ON
SW107-3:ON
SW107-4:ON
SW108-1:ON
SW108-2:ON
SW108-3:ON
SW108-4:ON
120
SW115-3:OFF
SW115-4:ON
SW105-3:OFF
SW105-4:OFF
SW115-3:OFF
SW115-4:OFF
SW116-1:OFF
SW116-2:ON
SW106-1: OFF
SW106-2:OFF
SW116-1:OFF
SW116-2:OFF
SW116-3:OFF
SW116-4:ON
SW106-3: OFF
SW106-4:OFF
SW116-3:OFF
SW116-4:OFF
SW117-1:OFF
SW117-2:ON
SW107-1: OFF
SW107-2:OFF
SW117-1:OFF
SW117-2:OFF
SW117-3:OFF
SW117-4:ON
SW107-3: OFF
SW107-4:OFF
SW117-3:OFF
SW117-4:OFF
SW118-1:OFF
SW118-2:ON
SW108-1: OFF
SW108-2:OFF
SW118-1:OFF
SW118-2:OFF
SW118-3:OFF
SW118-4:ON
SW108-3:OFF
SW108-4:OFF
SW118-3:OFF
SW118-4:OFF
III. Jumper setting related to orderwire telephone

Jumper J30 in Figure 3-94 is the jumper of -48/24V power feeding in orderwire
telephone on board.
Connect pins 12: the power feeding of the orderwire telephone is 24 V.
Connect pins 23: the power feeding of the orderwire telephone is 48 V (preset before
delivery).
IV. Jumper setting related to charging batteries

In Figure 3-94, J28 is the jumper of charging batteries:
Connect pins 23: the configuration information will be lost after the board is powered
off.
Connect pins 12: the configuration information will not be lost after the board is
powered off (preset before delivery). In practical, connect pins 12.
V. Jumping setting related to programming logic device loading

Jumper J3: connect pins 12.
Jumper J17: when it is open, use the chip to load the programmable logic device. When
pins 12 are connected, use the CPU to load the programmable logic device (preset
before delivery). In practical, connect pins 12.
3-145


Figure 3-95 and Figure 3-96 show the pin assignment between the H302ASU board
and the backplane. (Its the rear view of the backplane.)
Figure 3-95 Definition of upper HEADER on the H302ASU board
3-146

Figure 3-96 Definition of lower HEADER on the H302ASU board

In Figure 3-95 and Figure 3-96,
RR116: ring of receiving signal of 116 E1 channels related to ASU side.
RT116: tip of receiving signal of 116 E1 channels related to ASU side.
TR116: ring of transmitting signal of 116 E1 channels related to ASU side.
TT116: tip of transmitting signal of 116 E1 channels related to ASU side.
PGND: Protection Ground.
Caution:
Do not power off the subscriber frame containing the H302ASU at random.
3.40 8 E1 SDH Optical Transmission Board (H601ATUB)

3.40.1 Overview
The H601ATUB board is used in the UAM/UAS/UAFM/UAFS frame. It integrates all the
functions of the standard SDH transmission unit. The functions are as follows.
z
Dual STM-1 optical interfaces
3-147

Up to eight E1 electrical interfaces
Full cross connection capacity
Three phase locking modes
Order wire telephone
RS-232 transparent serial port
Ethernet interface
The H601ATUB has two types of boards: H601ATUBG and H601ATUBH. The
maximum transmit distance of the H601ATUBG board is 30 km, and that of the
H601ATUBH board is 50 km.
3.40.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-97 shows the front panel of the H601ATUBG board. The front panel of
H601ATUBH board is similar to that of the H601ATUBG board, only their silk-screens
are different.
3-148

(1)
(2)
ATUBG
Figure 3-97 Front panel of the H601ATUBG board

Table 3-91 describes the front panel of the H601ATUBG board.
3-149

Table 3-91 Front panel description of the H601ATUB board

Indicator,
interface
& switch
Color
Meaning
Description
Normal
status
OFF for five seconds: initiation of hardware and

operation system.
Yellow indicator blinks for seven seconds: loading
Green blinks for seven seconds: initiation of
BIOS.
Green blinks at the rate of 2 Hz: BIOS operation.
RUN
Green/
yellow/
red
Running and
alarm
indicator
Yellow blinks at the rate of 2 Hz for 13 seconds:

loading host software.
Green blinks at the rate of 10 Hz for 38 seconds:
initiation of host software.
Green blinks at the rate of 1 Hz: host software
running.
The
RUN
indicator
blinks
green at
the rate
of 1 Hz
Red and green indicators blink alternatively (at

the rate of 1 Hz) the eastern optical fiber is
broken.
Red and yellow indicators blink alternatively (at
the rate of 1 Hz) the western or both the eastern
and western optical fibers are broken.
ON: A network cable connects to the Ethernet
interface (RJ45) on the board with a computer.
ETN
Green
Ethernet
indicator
Western
optical
interface
NA
Western
optical
interface
Upper interface for receiving and lower interface

for transmitting, 155 M single-mode, 1310 nm.
NA
Eastern
optical
interface
NA
Eastern
optical
interface

for transmitting, 155 M single-mode, 1310 nm.
NA
BUZ
NA
Alarm sound
switch
ETH
NA
Ethernet
interface
Blinking: The NMS is transmitting data through

Ethernet interface.
ON/flicki
ng
Switch moves up: If there is a critical alarm to the

ATU board, audio alarm will be generated.
Switch moves down: no audio alarm will be
generated no matter whether there is critical
alarm to the ATU board.
A standard 10BASE-T Ethernet interface,
providing communication channel between NMS
computer and board.
3-150
NA
NA

Indicator,
interface
& switch
Color
Normal
status
Meaning
Description
RS232 transparent transmission serial port and

orderwire telephone share the external interface.
NA
Hardware reset switch.
NA
COM
NA
Transparent
transmission
serial
port/orderwir
e telephone
interface
RST
NA
Reset switch
Note:
z
It takes about one minute for board to be in normal status since it is powered on.
alarm.

Figure 3-98 is the layout of the H601ATUB board.
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
SW101
SW111
ON
SW4
H601ATUB
4 3 2 1
SW3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ON='0'
OFF='1'
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
SW102
SW112
ON
ON
J3
J17
PROM
3 2 1
CPU
3 2 1
1 2 3 4
ON
SW114
1 2 3 4
SW103
SW113
ON
J28
SW104
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ON
OFF
ON
ON
1 2 3
Figure 3-98 Layout of H601ATUB board (DIP switch and jumper)
I. Setup of DIP switch SW3, SW4

DIP switch SW3, SW4 are used to set the IP address of NEs, as follows.
3-151

The lower eight bits of SW3 indicate the fourth part (0255) of the IP address.
The upper 4 bits of SW4 indicate the third part (015) of the IP address.
ON indicates 1, OFF indicates 0.
SW4
4 3 2 1
SW3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ON
ON

are arranged in
ascending sequence
from right to left.

tritubaries
Table 3-92 Settings of tributary DIP switch and jumper
Resistance
75
Tributary no.
120
Tributary 1
SW101-1,
SW101-2: ON
SW111-1: OFF
SW111-2: ON
SW101-1, SW101-2:
OFF
SW111-1: OFF
SW111-2: OFF
Tributary 2
SW101-3,
SW101-4: ON
SW111-3: OFF
SW111-4: ON
SW101-3, SW101-4:
OFF
SW111-3: OFF
SW111-4: OFF
Tributary 3
SW102-1,
SW102-2: ON
SW112-1: OFF
SW112-2: ON
SW102-1, SW102-2:
OFF
SW112-1: OFF
SW112-2: OFF
Tributary 4
SW102-3,
SW102-4: ON
SW112-3: OFF
SW112-4: ON
SW102-3, SW102-4:
OFF
SW112-3: OFF
SW112-4: OFF
Tributary 5
SW103-1,
SW103-2: ON
SW113-1: OFF
SW113-2: ON
SW103-1, SW103-2:
OFF
SW113-1: OFF
SW113-2: OFF
Tributary 6
SW103-3,
SW103-4: ON
SW113-3: OFF
SW113-4: ON
SW103-3, SW103-4:
OFF
SW113-3: OFF
SW113-4: OFF
3-152

Resistance
75
Tributary no.
120
Tributary 7
SW104-1,
SW104-2: ON
SW114-1: OFF
SW114-2: ON
SW104-1, SW104-2:
OFF
SW114-1: OFF
SW114-2: OFF
Tributary 8
SW104-3,
SW104-4: ON
SW114-3: OFF
SW114-4: ON
SW104-3, SW104-4:
OFF
SW114-3: OFF
SW114-4: OFF
III. Jumper setting related to charging batteries

In Figure 3-98, J28 is the jumper of charging batteries.
off.
Connect pins 12: the configuration will not be lost after the board is powered off
(preset before delivery). In practical, connect pins 12.
IV. Jumping setting related to loadinf of programmable logic device

Jumper J17: when it is open, use the chip to load the programmable logic device. When
pins 12 are connected, use the CPU to load the programmable logic device (preset
before delivery). In practical, connect pins 12.

Figure 3-100 and Figure 3-101 show the pin assignment between the H601ATUBG
board and backplane. (Its the rear view of the backplane.)
3-153

I1A
RT1
TT1
RT2
TT2
RT3
TT3
RT4
TT4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PGND
PGND
I1B
I1C
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
65
RR1
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
TR1
RR2
TR2
RR3
TR3
RR4
TR4
25
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
26
27
58
59
90
91
28
29
60
61
92
93
30
31
32
62
63
64
94
95
96
47
48
PGND
PGND
Figure 3-100 Definition of upper HEADER on the H601ATUB board

I1A
1
PGND
PGND
RT5
TT5
RT6
TT6
RT7
TT7
RT8
TT8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
I1B
I1C
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
47
48
25
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
26
27
58
59
89
90
91
28
29
60
61
92
93
TR5
RR6
TR6
RR7
30
31
32
62
63
64
94
95
96
TR7
RR8
TR8
PGND
PGND
RR5
Figure 3-101 Definition of lower HEADER on the H601ATUB board

In Figure 3-100 and Figure 3-101, the pins are defined as follows.
RR18: ring of receiving signal of 116 E1 channels related to the ATU side.
3-154

RT18: tip of receiving signal of 116 E1 channels related to ATU side.

TR18: ring of transmitting signal of 116 E1 channels related to ATU side.
TT18: tip of transmitting signal of 116 E1 channels related to ATU side.
Caution:
Do not power off the subscriber frame containing the H601ATU.
3.41 16 E1 SDH Optical Transmission Board (H601ATUA)

3.41.1 Overview
The H601ATUA board integrates all the functions of the standard SDH transmission
unit. It has the following functions.
z
Dual STM-1 optical interfaces
Up to 16 E1 electrical interfaces
Full cross-connection capacity
Three phase locking modes
Order wire telephone
RS-232 transparent serial port
Ethernet interface
The H601ATUA board has two types: H601ATUAG and H601ATUAH. The maximum
transmit distance of the H601ATUAG board is 30 km, and that of the H601ATUAH
board is 50 km.
3.41.2 Front Panel

Figure 3-102 shows the front panel of the H601ATUAG board. The front panel of
H601ATUAH board is similar to that of the H601ATUAG board, only their silk-screens
are different.
3-155

(1)
(2)
ATUAG
Figure 3-102 Front panel of the H601ATUAG board

Table 3-93 shows the front panel of the H601ATUAG board.
3-156

Table 3-93 Front panel description of the H601ATUA board

Indicator,
interface
& switch
Color
Meaning
Description
Normal
status
OFF for five seconds: initiation of hardware and

operation system.
Yellow indicator for five seconds: loading
Green indicator for seven seconds: initiation of
BIOS.
Green blinks at the rate of 2 Hz: BIOS operation.
RUN
Green/
yellow/
red
Running
and alarm
indicator
Yellow blinks at the rate of 2 Hz for 13 seconds:

loading the host software.
Green blinks at the rate of 10 Hz for 38 seconds:
initiation of the host software.
Green
indicator
blinks at the
rate of 1 Hz.
Green indicator blinks at the rate of 1 Hz: the host

software operates.
Red and green indicators blink alternatively (at the
rate of 1 Hz) -- the eastern optical fiber is broken.
Red and yellow indicators blink alternatively (at
the rate of 1 Hz) the western or both the western
and eastern optical fibers are broken.
ON: A network cable connects to the Ethernet
interface (RJ45) on the board with a computer.
ETN
Green
Ethernet
indicator
Western
optical
interface
NA
Western
optical
interface

for transmitting, 155M single-mode, 1310 nm.
NA
Eastern
optical
interface
NA
Eastern
optical
interface

for transmitting, 155M single-mode, 1310 nm.
NA
BUZ
NA
Alarm
sound
switch
ETH
NA
Ethernet
interface
Blinking: The NMS is transmitting data through

Ethernet interface.
ON/Blinking
Switch moves up: If there is a critical alarm to the

H601ATUA board, audio alarm will be generated.
Switch moves down: No audio alarm will be
generated no matter whether there is critical alarm
to the H601ATUA board.
A standard 10BASE-T Ethernet interface,
providing communication channel between NMS
computer and board.
3-157
NA
NA

Indicator,
interface
& switch
Normal
status
Color
Meaning
Description
COM
NA
Transpar
ent
transmiss
ion serial
port/order
wire
telephone
interface
RS232 transparent transmission serial port and

orderwire telephone share the external interface
NA
RST
NA
Reset
switch
Hardware reset switch
NA
Note:
z
It takes about one minute for board to be in normal status since it is powered on.
alarm.

Figure 3-103 shows the layout of H601ATUA board.
SW101
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
SW111
ON
ON
SW4
H601ATUA
4 3 2 1
SW3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ON='0'
OFF='1'
SW102
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
SW112
ON
ON
ON
SW105
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
SW115
ON
SW116
ON
SW106
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ON
ON
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
SW107
SW117
J17
1 2 3 4
ON
1 2 3 4
SW108
SW118
J3
ON
ON
PROM
3 2 1
CPU
3 2 1
SW113
1 2 3 4
ON
SW114
1 2 3 4
SW103
ON
J28
SW104
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
ON
ON
OFF
ON
1 2 3
Figure 3-103 Layout of the H601ATUA board (DIP switch and jumper)
3-158

I. DIP switches SW3, SW4

DIP switches SW3, SW4 are used to setup the IP address of NEs, as follows:
z
The lower 8 bits of SW3 indicate the fourth part (0-255) of the IP address.
The upper 4 bits of SW4 indicate the third part (0-15) of the IP address.
ON indicates 1, and OFF indicates 0.
SW4
4 3 2 1
SW3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ON
ON

are arranged in
ascending sequence
from right to left.

tritubaries
Table 3-94 Description of tributary DIP switch and jumper
Resistance
75
Tributary no.
Tributary 1
Tributary 2
Tributary 3
Tributary 4
SW101-1:ON
SW101-2:ON
SW101-3:ON
SW101-4:ON
SW102-1:ON
SW102-2:ON
SW102-3:ON
SW102-4:ON
120
SW111-1:OFF
SW111-2:ON
SW101-1:OFF
SW101-2:OFF
SW111-1:OFF
SW111-2:OFF
SW111-3:OFF
SW111-4:ON
SW101-3: OFF
SW101-4:OFF
SW111-3:OFF
SW111-4:OFF
SW112-1:OFF
SW112-2:ON
SW102-1: OFF
SW102-2:OFF
SW112-1:OFF
SW112-2:OFF
SW112-3:OFF
SW112-4:ON
SW102-3: OFF
SW102-4:OFF
SW112-3:OFF
SW112-4:OFF
3-159

Resistance
75
Tributary no.
Tributary 5
Tributary 6
Tributary 7
Tributary 8
Tributary 9
Tributary 10
Tributary 11
Tributary 12
Tributary 13
Tributary 14
Tributary 15
Tributary 16
SW103-1:ON
SW103-2:ON
SW103-3:ON
SW103-4:ON
SW104-1:ON
SW104-2:ON
SW104-3:ON
SW104-4:ON
SW105-1:ON
SW105-2:ON
SW105-3:ON
SW105-4:ON
SW106-1:ON
SW106-2:ON
SW106-3:ON
SW106-4:ON
SW107-1:ON
SW107-2:ON
SW107-3:ON
SW107-4:ON
SW108-1:ON
SW108-2:ON
SW108-3:ON
SW108-4:ON
120
SW113-1:OFF
SW113-2:ON
SW103-1: OFF
SW103-2:OFF
SW113-1:OFF
SW113-2:OFF
SW113-3:OFF
SW113-4:ON
SW103-3: OFF
SW103-4:OFF
SW113-3:OFF
SW113-4:OFF
SW114-1:OFF
SW114-2:ON
SW104-1: OFF
SW104-2:OFF
SW114-1:OFF
SW114-2:OFF
SW114-3:OFF
SW114-4:ON
SW104-3: OFF
SW104-4:OFF
SW114-3:OFF
SW114-4:OFF
SW115-1:OFF
SW115-2:ON
SW105-1: OFF
SW105-2:OFF
SW115-1:OFF
SW115-2:OFF
SW115-3:OFF
SW115-4:ON
SW105-3:OFF
SW105-4:OFF
SW115-3:OFF
SW115-4:OFF
SW116-1:OFF
SW116-2:ON
SW106-1: OFF
SW106-2:OFF
SW116-1:OFF
SW116-2:OFF
SW116-3:OFF
SW116-4:ON
SW106-3: OFF
SW106-4:OFF
SW116-3:OFF
SW116-4:OFF
SW117-1:OFF
SW117-2:ON
SW107-1: OFF
SW107-2:OFF
SW117-1:OFF
SW117-2:OFF
SW117-3:OFF
SW117-4:ON
SW107-3: OFF
SW107-4:OFF
SW117-3:OFF
SW117-4:OFF
SW118-1:OFF
SW118-2:ON
SW108-1: OFF
SW108-2:OFF
SW118-1:OFF
SW118-2:OFF
SW118-3:OFF
SW118-4:ON
SW108-3:OFF
SW108-4:OFF
SW118-3:OFF
SW118-4:OFF
III. Jumper setting related to charging batteries

As shown in Figure 3-103,
off.
Connect pins 12: the configuration will not be lost after the board is powered off
(preset in factory). In practical, connect pins 12.
IV. Jumping setting related to programming logic device loading

3-160

Jumper J17: when it is open, use the chip to load the programmable logic device; when
pins 12 are connected, use the CPU to load the programmable logic device (preset in
factory). In practical, connect pins 12.

Figure 3-105 and Figure 3-106 show the pin assignment between the H601ATUA board
and backplane. (Its the rear view of the backplane).
A
RT1
RR9
TT1
RT2
TT2
RT3
TT3
RT4
TT4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RT9
TR9
TT9
RR10
RT10
TR10
TT10
RR11
RT11
TR11
TT11
RR12
RT12
TR12
TT12
PGND
PGND
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
C
65
RR1
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
TR1
RR2
TR2
RR3
TR3
RR4
TR4
25
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
26
27
58
59
90
91
28
29
60
61
92
93
30
31
32
62
63
64
94
95
96
47
48
PGND
PGND
Figure 3-105 Definition of upper HEADER signal on the H601ATUA
3-161


B
A
1
PGND
PGND
RT5
TT5
RT6
TT6
RT7
TT7
RT8
TT8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
RR13
RT13
TR13
TT13
RR14
RT14
TR14
TT14
RR15
RT15
TR15
TT15
RR16
RT16
TR16
TT16
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
PGND
PGND
RR5
58
59
89
90
91
60
61
92
93
TR5
RR6
TR6
RR7
62
63
64
94
95
96
TR7
RR8
TR8
Figure 3-106 Definition of lower HEADER signal on the H601ATUA

In Figure 3-105 and Figure 3-106:
RR116: ring of receiving signal of 116 E1 channels related to ASU side.
RT116: tip of receiving signal of 116 E1 channels related to ASU side.
TR116: ring of transmitting signal of 116 E1 channels related to ASU side.
TT1-16: tip of transmitting signal of 116 E1 channels related to ASU side.
Note:
Do not power off the subscriber frame containing the H302ASU at random.
3.42 Fan Control Board (H601FCB)

3.42.1 Overview
Installed in the fan frame of UA5000 master/slave frameUAM/UAS/UAFM/UAFS frame,
the H601FCB board controls the fan speed and detects the fan state. It can report the
fan state to ESC board or communicate with the ASX board through RS-485 interface
3-162

for reporting fan alarm and adjusting fan speed. Besides, the H601FCB can output its
own running state.
The H601FCB can adjust the fan to rotate within 50%-100% of its rated speed to
reduce the fan noise and to prolong the fans service life.
The H601HCB is hot-swappable.
3.42.2 Description of Front Panel

Figure 3-107 shows the front panel of the H601FCB board.
Figure 3-107 Front panel of the H601FCB board

Table 3-95 describes the front panel of the H601FCB board.
Table 3-95 Front panel description of the H601FCB board
Name
FAN STATUS
Color
Meaning
Green
Running state indicator
Description
Blink at 0.5Hz: Normal
Blink at 4Hz: Abnormal
3.42.3 Description of DIP Switches and Jumpers

Figure 3-108 shows the layout of the CC08TSS board.
H601FCB
ON
1 234 5 678
SW101
Figure 3-108 Layout of the H601FCB board

The DIP switches SW101-1-SW101-4 are used to set the secondary node address,
which ranges from 00H to 0FH. Since this board requires no secondary node address,
you can set these DIP switches to any values.
The DIP switches SW101-5 and SW101-6 are used to set the fan number. Table 3-96
lists the settings.
3-163

Table 3-96 Settings of DIP switches SW101-5 and SW101-6

SW101-5
SW101-6
Fan number
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
The DIP switches SW101-7 and SW101-8 are used to set the fan speed adjustment
mode. Table 3-97 lists the settings.
Table 3-97 Settings of DIP switchesSW101-7 and SW101-8
SW101-7
SW101-8
Fan speed adjusted by
ON
ON
Temperature at air inlet
ON
OFF
Temperature at air outlet
OFF
ON
Reserved
OFF
OFF
Temperature at air inlet and stop running
Table 3-98 lists the factory settings of SW101-5 to SW101-8. Change the factory
settings with caution.
Table 3-98 Factory settings of DIP switches SW101-5 to SW101-8
SW101-5
Factory setting
OFF
SW101-6
OFF
3-164
SW101-7
OFF
SW101-8
OFF

Chapter 4 Introduction to Front Access Cable
Chapter 4 Introduction to Front Access Cables

4.1 Digital Trunk Cables
4.1.1 Trunk Cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H
There are two types of trunk cables used to connect APMA to OptiX 155/622H, both
provides 16 E1 interfaces.
z
75 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
75 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
I. 75 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Figure 4-1 shows the outline of the trunk cable, and Table 4-1 shows its pin assignment.
(1) Cable connector-DB-68-Male

(3) Heat shrink tube
(5) 2mmFB wire connector
(2) Main label

(4) Cable tie
W1, W2: coaxial cable
Figure 4-1 Outline of the 75 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
4-1

Table 4-1 Pin assignment of the 75 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
Conn.X1
W1
34
Tip
33
Ring
32
Tip
31
Ring
30
Tip
29
Ring
28
Tip
27
Ring
Conn.X1
Tip
25
Ring
24
Tip
23
Ring
22
Tip
21
Ring
20
Tip
19
Ring
Coax.& Serial
No.
68
Ring
67
Tip
66
Ring
65
Tip
64
Ring
63
Tip
62
Ring
61
Tip
Conn.X1
Coax.& Serial
No.
26
Conn.X1
W2
Coax.& Serial
No.
Coax.& Serial
No.
Coax.& Serial
No.
Conn.X2
Conn.X1
a6
50
Tip
a5
49
Ring
d3
48
Tip
d4
47
Ring
a4
46
Tip
a3
45
Ring
d1
44
Tip
d2
43
Ring
Conn.X3
W1
Conn.X1
42
Tip
a5
41
Ring
d3
40
Tip
d4
39
Ring
a4
38
Tip
a3
37
Ring
d1
36
Tip
d2
35
Ring
Conn.X6
Conn.X1
W2
11
12
13
14
15
16
Coax.& Serial
No.
16
Ring
a6
15
Tip
d4
14
Ring
d3
13
Tip
a3
12
Ring
a4
11
Tip
d2
10
Ring
d1
Tip
Conn.X7
Conn.X1
4-2
10
Coax.& Serial
No.
a6
a5
10
11
12
Coax.& Serial
No.
Conn.X4
a6
a5
d3
d4
a4
a3
d1
d2
Conn.X5
a6
a5
d3
d4
a4
a3
d1
d2
Conn.X8
a5
a6
d4
d3
a3
a4
d2
d1
Conn.X9

W2
60
Ring
59
Tip
58
Ring
57
Tip
56
Ring
55
Tip
54
Ring
53
Tip
a5
Ring
a6
Tip
d4
Ring
d3
Tip
a3
Ring
a4
Tip
d2
Ring
d1
Tip
13
14
15
16
a5
a6
d4
d3
a3
a4
d2
d1
Table 4-2 describes the labels on the trunk cable.

Table 4-2 Labels on the 75 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
Label 1
Label 2
Label 3
Label 4
(12)E1
(34)E1
(56)E1
(78)E1
Label 5
Label 6
Label 7
Label 8
(910)E1
(1112)E1
(1314)E1
(1516)E1
II. 75 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2


(2) Main label

(4) Cable tie
W1, W2: coaxial cable
Figure 4-2 Outline of the 75 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
4-3

Table 4-3 Pin assignment of the 75 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
Conn.X1
W1
W1
34
Tip
33
Ring
32
Tip
31
Ring
30
Tip
29
Ring
28
Tip
27
Ring
26
Tip
25
Ring
24
Tip
23
Ring
22
Tip
21
Ring
20
Tip
19
Ring
Conn.X1
W2
Coax.& Serial
No.
1
Coax.& Serial
No.
68
Ring
67
Tip
66
Ring
65
Tip
64
Ring
63
Tip
62
Ring
61
Tip
60
Ring
59
Tip
58
Ring
57
Tip
Coax.& Serial
No.
Conn.X2
Conn.X1
b6
50
Tip
a6
49
Ring
c6
48
Tip
d6
47
Ring
a5
46
Tip
a4
45
Ring
d5
44
Tip
43
Ring
42
Tip
a2
41
Ring
d3
40
Tip
d2
39
Ring
a1
38
Tip
b1
37
Ring
d1
36
Tip
c1
35
Ring
Conn.X4
Conn.X1
a6
16
Ring
b6
15
Tip
d6
14
Ring
c6
13
Tip
a4
12
Ring
11
Tip
10
Ring
d5
Tip
a2
Ring
a3
Tip
d2
Ring
d3
Tip
d4
a3
a5
d4
4-4
W1
W2
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Coax.& Serial
No.
9
10
11
12
13
14
Conn.X3
b6
a6
c6
d6
a5
a4
d5
d4
a3
a2
d3
d2
a1
b1
d1
c1
Conn.X5
a6
b6
d6
c6
a4
a5
d4
d5
a2
a3
d2
d3

Conn.X1
W2
W2
Coax.& Serial
No.
56
Ring
55
Tip
54
Ring
53
Tip
Conn.X4
Conn.X1
b1
W2
a1
W2
c1
d1
Coax.& Serial
No.
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Conn.X5
15
16
b1
a1
c1
d1

Table 4-4 Labels on the 75 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
Label 1
Label 2
Label 3
Label 4
(14) E1
(58) E1
(912) E1
(1314) E1
4.1.2 Trunk Cable From APMA/AIUA to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect APMA/AIUA board to DDF.
z
When H601CESA or H601E8IA subboard is used, the trunk cable is the same as
the one from ATUA/DEHA to DDF.
When E23A subboard is used, the trunk cable from APMA/AIUA to DDF is
described as follows.
When the E23A subboard is used, there is only the 75 trunk cable available to
connect APMA/AIUA to DDF. This cable provides two ATM E3/DS3 (T3) interfaces.

W: coaxial cable
(2) Main label
Figure 4-3 Outline of the 75 trunk cable from APMA/AIUA (with the E23A subboard) to DDF
4-5

Table 4-5 Pin assignment of the 75 trunk cable from APMA/AIUA (with E23A subboard) to DDF
Conn.X1
Coax.& Serial No.
34
Tip
33
Ring
32
Tip
31
Ring
30
Tip
29
Ring
28
Tip
27
Ring
Label
1
R0
T0
R1
T1
4.1.3 IPMA Subtending Cable

Figure 4-4 shows how to connect the IPMA subtending cable in the front access frame.
1
2
HUBE
3
4
HUBF3
HUBF1
HUBF4
HUBF2
(1) RIGHT 1#FE
(2) LEFT 1#FE
(3) 1#FE
(4) 2#FE
Figure 4-4 Connection of the IPMA subtending cable in the front access frame
Connection Description:
z
See Figure 4-5 for the HUBE cable.
See Figure 4-6 for the HUBF cable. The first and second HUBF cables are 1.5
meters long, and the third and fourth HUBF cables are three meters long.
Connection Mode:
4-6

Connect branch 1#FE of the cable of HUBF 1 to branch left 1#FE of the HUBE
cable, and connect branch 2#FE of the cable of HUBF 1 to branch right 1#FE of
the HUBE cable.
the HUBE cable.
the HUBE cable.
the HUBE cable.
W4
W3
W2
W1
8
X2
4
W8
W7
W6
W5
X1
X9
(1) Cable connector

(4) Label 8
(2) Main label

(5) Network interface connector
(3) Label 1
W18: Twisted pairs
Figure 4-5 IPMA subtending cable (connected with master frame)

Table 4-6 shows the label prints on the cable.
Table 4-6 Label prints on the IPMA subtending cable (connected with master frame)
Label
Label 1
Label 2
Label 3
Label 4
Label 5
Label 6
Label 7
Label 8
Label
prints
LEFT 1#
FE
LEFT
2# FE
LEFT 3#
FE
LEFT
4# FE
Right 5#
FE
Right 6#
FE
Right 7#
FE
Right 8#
FE
Table 4-7 Pin assignment of IPMA subtending cable (connected with master frame)
W4
Conn.X1
Conn. X2
34
33
32
31
Remarks
One pair
One pair
4-7
W8
Conn.X1
Conn. X2
68
67
66
65
Remarks
One pair
One pair

Conn.X1
Conn. X3
30
29
28
27
Conn.X1
Conn. X4
26
25
24
23
Conn.X1
Conn. X4
22
21
20
19
W3
W2
W1
Remarks
One pair
Conn. X7
64
63
62
61
Conn.X1
Conn. X8
60
59
58
57
Conn.X1
Conn. X9
56
55
54
53
W7
One pair
Remarks
One pair
W7
One pair
Remarks
One pair
W5
One pair
2
A
Conn.X1
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair
W1
One pair
B
8
Remarks
X2
W2
X1
(1) Cable connector

(5) Label 2: 2#FE
X3
(2) #4-40 screw

(3) Main label

(4) Label 1: 1#FE
W12: Twisted pairs
Figure 4-6 IPMA subtending cable (connected with slave frame)

Table 4-8 shows the pin assignment of the IPMA subtending cable connected with
slave frame.
4-8

Table 4-8 Pin assignment of the IPMA subtending cable (connected with slave frame)
W1
Conn.X1
Conn. X2
Remarks
One pair
Conn.X1
Conn. X2
W2
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair
4.1.4 FE Upstream Cable of IPMA Board

The straight through cable is used as the FE upstream cable of the IPMA board.
4.1.5 Trunk Cable From ATUA/DEHA to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect ATUA/DEHA to DDF: 75 and
120. Both can provide 16 E1 interfaces.
I. 75 trunk cable from ATUA/DEHA to DDF


W1,W2: coaxial cable
(2) Main label
Figure 4-7 Outline of the 75 trunk cable from ATUA/DEHA to DDF
4-9

Table 4-9 Pin assignment of the 75 trunk cable from ATUA/DEHA to DDF
Conn.X1
W1
34
Tip
33
Ring
32
Tip
31
Ring
30
Tip
29
Ring
28
Tip
27
Ring
26
Tip
25
Ring
24
Tip
23
Ring
22
Tip
21
Ring
20
Tip
19
Ring
Conn.X1
W2
Coax.& Serial
No.
1
R0
T0
R1
T1
Ring
67
Tip
66
Ring
65
Tip
64
Ring
63
Tip
62
Ring
61
Tip
60
Ring
59
Tip
58
Ring
Conn.X1
W1
5
R2
T2
R3
T3
Coax.& Serial
No.
68
Label
Label
R8
T8
R9
T9
R10
T10
4-10
50
Tip
49
Ring
48
Tip
47
Ring
46
Tip
45
Ring
44
Tip
43
Ring
42
Tip
41
Ring
40
Tip
39
Ring
38
Tip
37
Ring
36
Tip
35
Ring
Conn.X1
W2
Coax.& Serial
No.
9
R4
10
T4
11
R5
12
T5
13
R6
14
T6
15
R7
16
T7
Coax.& Serial
No.
16
Ring
15
Tip
14
Ring
13
Tip
12
Ring
11
Tip
10
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Label
Label
R12
10
T12
11
R13
12
T13
13
R14
14
T14

Conn.X1
W2
Coax.& Serial
No.
57
Tip
56
Ring
55
Tip
54
Ring
53
Tip
Label
R11
T11
Conn.X1
W2
Coax.& Serial
No.
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Label
15
R15
16
T15
II. 120 trunk cable from ATUA/DEHA to DDF

Figure 4-8 shows the outline of the trunk cable, and Table 4-10 shows its pin
assignment.

W1,W2: communication cable
(2) Main label
Figure 4-8 Outline of the 120 trunk cable from ATUA/DEHA to DDF
Table 4-10 Pin assignment of the 120 trunk cable from ATUA/DEHA to DDF
W1
Conn.X1
Color
34
Pink/Red*
33
Pink/Black*
32
Orange/Red*
31
Orange/Black*
30
Green/Red*
29
Green/Black*
28
Blue/Red*
27
Blue/Black*
Label
R0
T0
W1
R1
T1
4-11
Conn.X1
Color
50
Blue/Red**
49
Blue/Black**
48
Gray/Red**
47
Gray/Black**
46
Pink/Red***
45
Pink/Black***
44
Orange/Red***
43
Orange/Black***
Label
R4
T4
R5
T5

W1
W2
Conn.X1
Color
26
Gray/Red*
25
Gray/Black*
24
Pink/Red**
23
Pink/Black**
22
Orange/Red**
21
Orange/Black**
20
Green/Red**
19
Green/Black**
Conn.X1
Color
68
Pink/Black*
67
Pink/Red*
66
Orange/Black*
65
Orange/Red*
64
Green/Black*
63
Green/Red*
62
Blue/Black*
61
Blue/Red*
60
Gray/Black*
59
Gray/Red*
58
Pink/Black**
57
Pink/Red**
56
Orange/Black**
55
Orange/Red**
54
Green/Black**
53
Green/Red**
Label
R2
T2
W1
R3
T3
Label
R8
T8
R9
T9
W2
R10
T10
R11
T11
Conn.X1
Color
42
Green/Red***
41
Green/Black***
40
Blue/Red***
39
Blue/Black***
38
Gray/Red***
37
Gray/Black***
36
Blue/Red****
35
Blue/Black****
Conn.X1
Color
16
Blue/Black**
15
Blue/Red**
14
Gray/Black**
13
Gray/Red**
12
Pink/Black***
11
Pink/Red***
10
Orange/Black***
Orange/Red***
Green/Black***
Green/Red***
Blue/Black***
Blue/Red***
Gray/Black***
Gray/Red***
Blue/Black****
Blue/Red****
Label
R6
T6
R7
T7
Label
R12
T12
R13
T13
R14
T14
R15
T15
4.1.6 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H

There are four types of trunk cables used to connect PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H.
Each type of trunk cable can provide eight E1 interfaces.
z
75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
4-12

Note:
z
The OptiX 155/622H has two types of E1 tributary boards: SS42SP1 and SS42SP2, which use the
same connector, that is, 2-mm-long FB wire connector (4x6PIN).
For the 75 matching, use the unbalanced cable (E1 coaxial cable) for transmission. For the 120
matching, use the balanced cable (differential symmetric pair) for transmission. Configure the data
consistently with the matched impedance, and put the DIP switch in the correct state.
I. 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

assignment.
(1) View A
(4) Main label
(7) Label 2
(10) 2-mm-long FB wire connector
(13) Side C (without shell)
(2) DB-50 male connector

(8) Label 3
(11) Cable tie
W1, W2: Coaxial cables
(3) Metal screw

(6) Label 1
(9) Label 4
(12) View B
Figure 4-9 Outline of the 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
4-13

Table 4-11 Pin assignment of the 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
W1
Coax.& Serial
No.
Conn.X1
Conn.X2
a5
Ring
a6
Tip
d4
Ring
d3
Tip
a3
Ring
a4
Tip
d2
Ring
d1
Tip
Conn.X1
Conn.X3
10
a5
Ring
11
a6
Tip
12
d4
Ring
13
d3
Tip
14
a3
Ring
15
a4
Tip
16
d2
Ring
17
d1
Tip
Coax.& Serial
No.
W2
Coax.& Serial
No.
Conn.X1
Conn.X4
34
a5
Ring
35
a6
Tip
36
d4
Ring
37
d3
Tip
38
a3
Ring
39
a4
Tip
40
d2
Ring
41
d1
Tip
Conn.X1
Conn.X5
43
a5
Ring
44
a6
Tip
45
d4
Ring
46
d3
Tip
47
a3
Ring
48
a4
Tip
49
d2
Ring
50
d1
Tip
Coax.& Serial
No.
5
Table 4-12 describes the lables on the trunk cable.

z
When two PV8 boards are configured, two such cables (left and right) are needed,
their labels are different.
When two PV4 boards are configured, only one such cable is needed, and use the
label of the right cable listed in Table 4-12.
Table 4-12 Labels on the 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
Label
Label 1
Label 2
Contents
Right cable: Left (12) E1
Left cable: Left (56) E1
Description
E1 interfaces 12 of the left PV8/PV4 board (front view of
the frame).
E1 interfaces 56 of the left PV8 board.
Right cable: Left (34) E1
E1 interfaces 34 of the left PV8/PV4 board.
Left cable: Left (78) E1
4-14

Label
Label 3
Label 4
Contents
Description
Right cable: Right (12) E1
E1 interfaces 12 of the right PV8/PV4 board.
Left cable: Right (56) E1
E1 interfaces 56 of the right PV8 board.
Right cable: Right (34) E1
Left cable: Right (78) E1
II. 120 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

assignment.
(1) View A
(4) Main label
(7) Label 2
W1, W2: Communication cables

(5) Heat shrinkable tube
(8) Label 3
(11) Cable tie
(3) Metal screw

(6) Label 1
(9) Label 4
(12) View B
4-15

W1
Conn.X1
Conn.X2
a5
a6
d4
d3
a3
a4
d2
d1
Conn.X1
Conn.X3
10
a5
11
a6
12
d4
13
d3
14
a3
15
a4
16
d2
17
d1
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
W2
Conn.X1
Conn.X4
34
a5
35
a6
36
d4
37
d3
38
a3
39
a4
40
d2
41
d1
Conn.X1
Conn.X5
43
a5
44
a6
45
d4
46
d3
47
a3
48
a4
49
d2
50
d1
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
The description of labels on the trunk cable is the same as those on the 75 trunk cable.
See Table 4-12.
III. 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2

assignment.
4-16

(1) View A
(4) Main label
(10) D view (without shell)

(5) Label 1
(8) View B
(11) Cable tie
(3) Metal screw

(12) Label 2
W1
Conn.X1
Conn.X
2
Coax.&
Serial No.
a6
Ring
b6
Tip
d6
Ring
c6
Tip
a4
Ring
a5
Tip
d4
Ring
d5
Tip
10
a2
Ring
11
a3
Tip
12
d2
Ring
13
d3
Tip
14
b1
Ring
15
a1
Tip
16
c1
Ring
17
d1
Tip
Conn.X3
34
a6
Ring
35
b6
Tip
36
d6
Ring
37
c6
Tip
38
a4
Ring
39
a5
Tip
40
d4
Ring
41
d5
Tip
43
a2
Ring
44
a3
Tip
45
d2
Ring
46
d3
Tip
47
b1
Ring
48
a1
Tip
49
c1
Ring
50
d1
Tip
4
W2
5
4-17
Coax.& Serial
No.
Conn.X1

z
When two PV4 boards are configured, only one such cable is required, and use
the label of the right cable listed in Table 4-15.
Table 4-15 Labels on the 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
Label
Label 1
Label 2
Contents
Description
Right cable: W1-Left PV4/PV8 (14) E1.
Left cable: W1-Left PV4/PV8 (58) E1.
Right cable: W2-Right PV4/PV8 (14) E1.
Left cable: W2-Right PV4/PV8 (58) E1.
IV. 120 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2

assignment.
(1) View A
(4) Main label (5) Label 1
(7) Cable tie (8) 2-mm-long FB wire connector
(10) Label 2
(3) Metal screw

(9) View B
4-18

W1
Conn.X1
Conn.X2
a6
b6
d6
c6
a4
a5
d4
d5
10
a2
11
a3
12
d2
13
d3
14
b1
15
a1
16
c1
17
d1
Remarks
Conn.X1
Conn.X3
34
a6
35
b6
36
d6
37
c6
38
a4
39
a5
40
d4
41
d5
43
a2
44
a3
45
d2
46
d3
47
b1
48
a1
49
c1
50
d1
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
W2
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
The description of labels on the trunk cable is the same as those on the 75 trunk cable.
See Table 4-15.
4.1.7 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect the PV8/PV4 to the H601ATUB:
75 and 120. Both can provide eight E1 interfaces respectively.
I. 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB

assignment.
4-19

(1) View A
(5) Sub-label ATUB
W: Coaxial cable

(3) Metal screw (4) Main label

(7) View B
Figure 4-13 Outline of the 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB
Table 4-17 Pin assignment of the 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB
Conn.X1
Conn.X2
Coax.& Serial No.
34
Tip
33
Ring
32
Tip
31
Ring
30
Tip
29
Ring
28
Tip
27
Ring
26
13
Tip
25
12
Ring
24
11
Tip
23
10
Ring
22
17
Tip
21
16
Ring
20
15
Tip
19
14
Ring
Conn.X1
Conn.X3
Coax.& Serial No.
50
37
Tip
49
36
Ring
48
35
Tip
47
34
Ring
46
41
Tip
45
40
Ring
44
39
Tip
43
38
Ring
42
46
Tip
41
45
Ring
40
44
Tip
39
43
Ring
38
50
Tip
37
49
Ring
36
48
Tip
35
47
Ring
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
II. 120 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB

assignment.
4-20

(1) View A
(5) Sub-label ATUB
W: Communication cable

(3) Metal screw

(7) View B
(4) Main label
Figure 4-14 Outline of the 120 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB
Table 4-18 Pin assignment of the 120 cable from PV8/PV4 to H601ATUB
Conn.X1
Conn.X2
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
13
25
12
24
11
23
10
22
17
21
16
20
15
19
14
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
4-21
Conn.X1
Conn.X3
50
37
49
36
48
35
47
34
46
41
45
40
44
39
43
38
42
46
41
45
40
44
39
43
38
50
37
49
36
48
35
47
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair

4.1.8 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect the PV8/PV4 to DDF: 75 and
120. Both can provide eight E1 interfaces respectively.
I. 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to DDF

assignment.
(1) View A
(5) Label 1

(6) Label on bare wire
(3) Metal screw

(7) Label 2
(4) Main label

Figure 4-15 Outline of the 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to DDF
Table 4-19 Pin assignment of the 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to DDF
Conn.X1
W1
Coax. & Serial

No.
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
10
Ring
11
Tip
12
Ring
13
Tip
14
Ring
15
Tip
Label
R1
T1
R2
T2
R3
T3
R4
4-22
Conn.X1
W2
Coax. & Serial

No.
34
Ring
35
Tip
36
Ring
37
Tip
38
Ring
39
Tip
40
Ring
41
Tip
43
Ring
44
Tip
45
Ring
46
Tip
47
Ring
48
Tip
Label
R1
T1
R2
T2
R3
T3
R4

Conn.X1
W1
Coax. & Serial

No.
16
Ring
17
Tip
Label
Conn.X1
T4
W2
Coax. & Serial

No.
49
Ring
50
Tip
Label
T4
Table 4-20 describes of the lables on the trunk cable.

z
When two PV4 boards are configured, only one such cable is needed, and use the
label of the right cable listed in Table 4-20.
Table 4-20 Labels on the 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to DDF

Label
Label 1
Label 2
Contents
Description
Right cable: W1-Left PV8/PV4 (14) E1.
Left cable: W1-Left PV8/PV4 (58) E1.
Right cable: W2-Right PV8/PV4 (14) E1.
Left cable: W2-Right PV8/PV4 (58) E1.
II. 120 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to DDF

assignment.
(1) View A
(5) Label 1
(7) Label 2
(3) Metal crew

(4) Main label
(6) Label on bare wire
Figure 4-16 Outline of the 120 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to DDF
4-23

Table 4-21 Pin assignment of the 120 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to DDF
W1
W1
Conn.X1
Color
White
Blue
18
Label
Conn.X1
Color
34
White
35
Blue
Drain Wire
19
Drain Wire
White
36
White
Orange
37
Orange
20
Drain Wire
21
Drain Wire
White
38
White
Green
39
Green
22
Drain Wire
23
Drain Wire
White
40
White
Brown
41
Brown
24
Drain Wire
25
Drain Wire
10
White
43
White
11
Gray
44
Gray
26
Drain Wire
27
Drain Wire
12
Red
45
Red
13
Blue
46
Blue
28
Drain Wire
29
Drain Wire
14
Red
47
Red
15
Orange
48
Orange
30
Drain Wire
31
Drain Wire
16
Red
49
Red
17
Green
50
Green
32
Drain Wire
33
Drain Wire
R1
T1
R2
T2
W2
R3
T3
R4
T4
Label
R1
T1
R2
T2
R3
T3
R4
T4
The descriptions of labels on the trunk cable are the same as those on the 75 trunk
cable, as shown in Table 4-20.
4.1.9 Trunk Cable From PV8/PV4 to APMA

There are two types of trunk cable used to connect PV8/PV4 to APMA: 75 and 120.
Both can provide 16 E1 interfaces.
4-24

I. 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to APMA

assignment.

W1,W2: coaxial cable
(2) Main label
Figure 4-17 Outline of the 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to APMA
Table 4-22 Pin assignment of the 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to APMA
Conn.X1
W1
Coax.& Serial
No.
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
10
Ring
11
Tip
12
Ring
13
Tip
14
Ring
6
7
Coax.& Serial
No.
Conn.X3
Conn.X1
31
34
Ring
32
35
Tip
33
36
Ring
34
37
Tip
27
38
Ring
28
39
Tip
40
Ring
30
41
Tip
23
43
Ring
24
44
Tip
25
45
Ring
26
46
Tip
19
47
Ring
29
4-25
W1
10
11
12
13
14
15
Conn.X3
47
48
49
50
43
44
45
46
39
40
41
42
35

Conn.X1
W1
W2
Coax.& Serial
No.
15
Tip
16
Ring
17
Tip
Conn.X2
Coax.&
Serial No.
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
10
Ring
11
Tip
12
Ring
13
Tip
14
Ring
15
Tip
16
Ring
17
Tip
Coax.& Serial
No.
Conn.X3
Conn.X1
20
48
Tip
49
Ring
50
Tip
21
W1
22
Conn.X2
66
34
Ring
65
35
Tip
68
36
Ring
67
37
Tip
62
38
Ring
61
39
Tip
64
40
Ring
41
Tip
43
Ring
57
44
Tip
60
45
Ring
59
46
Tip
54
47
Ring
53
48
Tip
56
49
Ring
55
50
Tip
63
58
W2
36
37
16
Coax.& Serial
No.
Conn.X3
Conn.X3
10
11
12
38
Conn.X3
14
13
16
15
10
9
12
11
13
14
15
16
6
5
8
7
2
1
4
3

Table 4-23 Labels on the 75 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to APMA
Label
Content
Description
Label 1
PV4 E1
Connected to PV4 E1 at the cabling area
Label 2
PV8 E1
Connected to PV8E1 at the cabling area
4-26

II. 120 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to APMA

Figure 4-18 shows the outline of the cable and Table 4-24 shows the pin assignment.

W1,W2 Twisted pairs
(2) Main label
Figure 4-18 Outline of the 120 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to APMA
Table 4-24 Pin assignment of 120 trunk cable from PV8/PV4 to APMA
W1
Conn.X1
Conn.X3
31
32
33
34
27
28
29
30
10
23
11
24
12
25
13
26
14
19
15
20
16
21
17
22
Remarks
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair
W1
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair
4-27
Conn.X1
Conn.X3
34
47
35
48
36
49
37
50
38
43
39
44
40
45
41
46
43
39
44
40
45
41
46
42
47
35
48
36
49
37
50
38
Remarks
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair

W2
Conn.X2
Conn.X3
66
65
68
67
62
61
64
63
10
58
11
57
12
60
13
59
14
54
15
53
16
56
17
55
Remarks
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair
W2
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair
Conn.X2
Conn.X3
34
14
35
13
36
16
37
15
38
10
39
40
12
41
11
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
Remarks
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair
4.1.10 Trunk Cable From H601ATUB to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect H601ATUB to DDF: 75 and 120.
Both can provide eight E1 interfaces.
I. 75 trunk cable from H601ATUB to DDF

assignment.
4-28

(1) View A (2) DB-68 male connector

(3) Main label
(4)-(19) Labels
Figure 4-19 Outline of the 75 trunk cable from H601ATUB to DDF
Table 4-25 Pin assignment of the 75 trunk cable from H601ATUB to DDF
Conn. X1
W1
Coax. & Serial

No.
34
Tip
33
Ring
32
Tip
31
Ring
30
Tip
29
Ring
28
Tip
27
Ring
26
Tip
25
Ring
24
Tip
23
Ring
22
Tip
21
Ring
20
Tip
19
Ring
Label
R0
T0
R1
T1
Conn. X1
W2
5
R2
T2
R3
T3
4-29
Coax. & Serial

No.
50
Tip
49
Ring
48
Tip
47
Ring
46
Tip
45
Ring
44
Tip
43
Ring
42
Tip
41
Ring
40
Tip
39
Ring
38
Tip
37
Ring
36
Tip
35
Ring
Label
R4
T4
R5
T5
R6
T6
R7
T7

II. 120 trunk cable from H601ATUB to DDF

assignment.
(1) View A
(3) Main label
(4)-(19) Labels
Figure 4-20 Outline of the 120 trunk cable from H601ATUB to DDF
Table 4-26 Pin assignment of the 120 trunk cable from H601ATUB to DDF
Conn. X1
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
Color
pink
orange
green
blue
gray
pink
orange
green
Label
red*
black*
red*
black*
red*
black*
red*
black*
red*
black*
red**
black**
red**
black**
red**
black**
R0
T0
R1
T1
R2
T2
R3
T3
4-30
Conn. X1
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
Color
blue
gray
pink
orange
green
blue
gray
blue
Label
red**
black**
red**
black**
red***
black***
red***
black***
red***
red***
red***
black***
red***
black***
red***
black***
R4
T4
R5
T5
R6
T6
R7
T7

4.1.11 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H521SDLto DDF

There are two types of E1/SHDSL cable connected H521SDL to DDF: 75 and 120.
Both can provide four E1 interfaces and four SHDSL interfaces.
I. 75 E1/SHDSL trunk cable frome H521SDL to DDF

Figure 4-21 shows the outline of the cable, Table 4-27 and Table 4-28 show the pin
assignment.

W: Coaxial cable
(2) Main label
(3) Cable connector-DB-68-male

W1 Twisted pairs
Figure 4-21 Outline of the 75 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF
Table 4-27 Pin assignment of the 75 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF(1)
Conn.X
Coax. cable W & Serial No.
34
Tip
33
Ring
32
Tip
31
Ring
30
Tip
29
Ring
28
Tip
27
Ring
26
Tip
25
Ring
24
Tip
23
Ring
22
Tip
4-31
Label
T0
R0
T1
R1
T2
R2
T3

Conn.X
Coax. cable W & Serial No.
21
Ring
20
Tip
19
Ring
Label
R3
Table 4-28 Pin assignment of the 75 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF(2)
Conn.X
Twisted cable W1 Color
42
pink/red*
41
pink/black*
40
orange /red*
39
orange /black*
38
green/red*
37
green/ black *
36
blue/red*
35
blue/ black *
Remarks
Remarks
one pair
H521SDL channel 0
one pair
H521SDL channel 1
one pair
H521SDL channel 2
one pair
H521SDL channel 3
Table 4-29 and Table 4-30 describe the labels on the trunk cable.
Table 4-29 Labels on the 75 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF(1)
Label
Label 1
Label 2
Label 3
Label 4
Label 5
Label 6
Label 7
Label 8
Content
T0
R0
T1
R1
T2
R2
T3
R3
Descrip
tion
Transmit
of the
first E1
link
Receive
of the
first E1
link
Transmit
of the
second
E1 link
Receive
of the
second
E1 link
Transmit
of the
third E1
link
Receive
of the
third E1
link
Transm
it of the
fourth
E1 link
Receiv
e of the
fourth
E1 link
Table 4-30 Labels on the 75 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF(2)
Label
Label 9
Label 10
Label 11
Label 12
Content
H521SDL
channel 0
H521SDL
channel 1
H521SDL channel
2
H521SDL channel 3
Description
The first SHDSL

interface
The second
SHDSL interface
The third SHDSL

interface
The forth SHDSL

interface
4-32

II. 120 E1/SHDSL trunk cable frome H521SDL to DDF

Figure 4-22 shows the outline of the cable, and Table 4-31 shows the pin assignment of
the symmetrical twisted cable W. The pin assignment of the symmetrical twisted cable
W1 is the same as the 75 trunk cable, as shown in Table 4-28.

W ,W1 :Twisted pairs
(2) Main label
(3) Cable connector-DB-68-male
Figure 4-22 Outline of the 120 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF
Table 4-31 Pin assignment of the 120 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF
Conn. X3
Cable W
34
white
33
blue
32
white
31
orange
30
white
29
green
28
white
27
brown
26
white
25
gray
24
red
23
blue
22
red
21
orange
4-33
Label
one pair
T0
one pair
R0
one pair
T1
one pair
R1
one pair
T2
one pair
R2
one pair
T3

Conn. X3
Cable W
20
red
19
green
Label
one pair
R3
Table 4-29 and Table 4-30 describe the labels of the trunk cable.
4.1.12 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H303HSL to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect the H303HSL to DDF: 75 and
120. Both can provide two E1 interfaces and two SHDSL interfaces.
I. 75 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Figure 4-23 shows the outline of the cable, Table 4-32 and Table 4-33 show the pin
assignment.
(1) Heat-shrinkable tube

(4) View B
W: Coaxial cable
W1: Twisted pairs
(2) Main label

(5)-(10) Labels 1- 6
Figure 4-23 Outline of the 75 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF
Table 4-32 Pin assignment of the 75 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF(1)
Conn. X
Coax. W & Serial No.
34
Tip
33
Ring
32
Tip
31
Ring
30
Tip
29
Ring
4-34
Label
1
Label 1
Label 2
Label 3

Conn. X
Coax. W & Serial No.
28
Tip
27
Ring
Label
4
Label 4
Table 4-33 Pin assignment of the 75 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF (2)
Conn. X
Color of the twisted pair W1
38
pink/red*
37
pink/black*
36
orange/red*
35
orange/black*
Label
Remarks
Label 5
One pair
Label 6
One pair
Table 4-34 describes the labels on the cable.

Table 4-34 Labels on the 75E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF
Label
Label 1
Label 2
Label 3
Label 4
Label 5
Label 6
Contents
T0
R0
T1
R1
H303HSL
channel 0
H303HSL
channel 1
Description
Transmitting
end of the
first E1
Receiving
end of the
first E1
Transmitting
end of the
second E1
Receiving
end of the
second E1
First
SHDSL
Second
SHDSL
II. 120 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Figure 4-24 shows the outline of the trunk cable, and Table 4-35 shows the pin
assignment of the symmetrical twisted cable W. The pin assignment of the symmetrical
twisted cable W1 is the same as the 75 trunk cable, as shown in Table 4-33.
4-35


(4) View B
W: Twisted pairs
W1: Twisted pairs
(2) Main label

(5)-(10) Labels 1 6
Figure 4-24 Outline of the 120E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF
Table 4-35 Pin assignment of the 120 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF
Conn. X
Coaxial cable W
34
White
33
Blue
32
White
31
Orange
30
White
29
Green
28
White
27
Brown
Label
One pair
Label 1
One pair
Label 2
One pair
Label 3
One pair
Label 4
4.1.13 E1/SHDSL Trunk Cable From H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H
SS42SP1: 75 and 120. Both can provide two E1 interfaces and two SHDSL
interfaces.
4-36

I. 75 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1

Figure 4-25 shows the outline of the trunk cable, Table 4-36 and Table 4-37 show the
pin assignment.
(1) View A
(4) Cable tie
W: Coaxial cable
W1: Twisted pairs

(8) View B
(3) 2-mm-long FB connector

(6) Main label
(9)-(10) Labels 1- 2
Figure 4-25 Outline of the 75 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
Table 4-36 Pin assignment of the 75 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H
SS42SP1 (1)
Conn. X
Coaxial cable W & Serial No.
34
Tip
33
Ring
32
Tip
31
Ring
30
Tip
29
Ring
28
Tip
27
Ring
4-37
Conn. X1
d3
d4
a6
a5
d1
d2
a4
a3

Table 4-37 Pin assignment of the 75E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H
SS42SP1 (2)
Conn. X
Color of twisted pairs W1
38
pink/red*
37
pink/black*
36
orange/red*
35
orange/black*
Label
Remarks
Label 1
One pair
Label 2
One pair
Table 4-38 describes of the labels on the trunk cable.

Table 4-38 Labels on the 75 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
Label
Label 5
Label 6
Contents
H303HSL channel 0
H303HSL channel 1
Description
First SHDSL
Second SHDSL
II. 120 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
(1) View A
(4) Cable tie
W: Twisted pair

(8) View B
W1: Twisted pair
(3) 2-mm-long FB connector

(6) Main label
(9)-(10) labels 12
Figure 4-26 Outline of the 120 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
4-38

Table 4-39 Pin assignment of the 120 E1/SHDSL trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H
SS42SP1
Conn. X
Conn. X1
34
d3
33
d4
32
a6
31
a5
30
d1
29
d2
28
a4
27
a3
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
4.1.14 V.35 DCE/FE1 Trunk Cable From H302HSL to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables used to connect the H302HSL to DDF: 75 and
120. Both can provide two E1 interfaces and two V.35 interfaces.
I. 75 V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF

Figure 4-27 shows the outline of the trunk cable, and Table 4-40 and Table 4-41 show
its pin assignment.
(1) View A
(2) 34-PIN V.35 connector
(4) Main label
(7)-(12) Labels 16
W: Coaxial cable; W1, W2: Twisted pairs
(3) Screw and nut

(6) View B
Figure 4-27 Outline of the 75 V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF
4-39

Table 4-40 Pin assignment of the 75 V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF (1)
W
1
Conn
. X1
Color
Conn
. X3
Yellow
25
Yellow/blac
k
26
Red
28
Red/black
27
Brown
33
Brown/white
34
Blue/green
30
AA
Blue/yellow
29
Blue
32
Blue/black
31
Green
24
Remar
ks
Conn
. X2
Color
Conn
. X3
Yellow
41
Yellow/blac
k
42
Red
44
Red/black
43
Brown
49
Brown/white
50
Blue/green
46
AA
Blue/yellow
45
Blue
48
Blue/black
47
Green
40
One
pair
One
pair
One
pair
W
2
One
pair
One
pair
Table 4-41 Pin assignment of the 75 V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF (2)
Conn. X3
Coaxial cable & Serial No.
22
Tip
21
Ring
20
Tip
19
Ring
38
Tip
37
Ring
36
Tip
35
Ring
Label 1
Label 2
Label 3
Label 4
4-40
Label
Rema
rks
One
pair
One
pair
One
pair
One
pair
One
pair

Table 4-42 Labels on the 75 V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF
Label
Label 1
Label 2
Label 3
Label 4
Label 5
Label 6
Contents
R1
T1
R2
T2
1#V.35 DCE
Cable
2#V.35 DCE
Cable
Description
Receiving
end of the
first E1
Transmitting
end of the
first E1
Receiving
end of the
second
E1
Transmitting
end of the
second E1
First V.35
Second
V.35
II. 120 V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF

(1) View A
(2) 34-PIN V.35 connector
(4) Main label
(7)-(12) Labels 1 6
W: Twisted pair; W1, W2: Twisted pairs
(3) Screw and nut

(6) View B
Figure 4-28 Outline of the 120 V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF
Table 4-43 Pin assignment of the 120 V.35 DCE/FE1 trunk cable from H302HSL to DDF
Conn. X3
Cable W
22
White
21
Blue
20
White
19
Orange
38
White
37
Green
4-41
Label
One pair
Label 1
One pair
Label 2
One pair
Label 3

Conn. X3
Cable W
36
White
35
Brown
Label
One pair
Label 4
4.2 Subscriber Lines

The subscriber line includes:
z
shielded subscriber line for 32-port subscriber board (CC0HASL)
shielded subscriber line for 16-port subscriber board

(CC09ASL/CC01CDI/CB02VFB/H601SDLA)
shielded subscriber line for 8-port subscriber board (CB03DSL)
ATIA subscriber line
CSLA subscriber line
ADLA subscriber line
4.2.1 Shielded Subscriber Line for 32-port Subscriber Board

Figure 4-29 shows the outline of this shielded subscriber line.
(1) View A
(4) Cable tie

(3) Label
Figure 4-29 Outline of the shielded subscriber line for the 32-port subscriber board
Since the colors and patterns of the cable cores are different, it is easy to distinguish
subscriber ports according to their cable cores. Table 4-44 shows its pin assignment.
4-42

Table 4-44 Pin assignment of the shielded subscriber line for the 32-port subscriber board
Conn.X1
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
68
67
66
65
64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
Cable Color
Pink
Orange
Green
Blue
Gray
Pink
Orange
Green
Blue
Gray
Pink
Orange
Green
Blue
Gray
Pink
Conn.X1
Red*
16
Black*
15
Red*
14
Black*
13
Red*
12
Black*
11
Red*
10
Black*
Red*
Black*
Red**
Black**
Red**
Black**
Red**
Black**
Red**
50
Black**
49
Red**
48
Black**
47
Red***
46
Black***
45
Red***
44
Black***
43
Red***
42
Black***
41
Red***
40
Black***
39
Red***
38
Black***
37
Red****
36
4-43
Cable Color
Orange
Green
Blue
Gray
Pink
Orange
Green
Blue
Gray
Pink
Orange
Green
Blue
Gray
Pink
Blue
Red****
Black****
Red****
Black****
Red****
Black****
Red****
Black****
Red*****
Black*****
Red*****
Black*****
Red*****
Black*****
Red*****
Black*****
Red*****
Black*****
RedBlackRedBlackRedBlackRedBlackRedBlackRed-Black-Red--

Conn.X1
Cable Color
53
Pink
Conn.X1
Black****
35
Cable Color
Blue
Black--
In the column of Cable Color of Table 4-44:

z
The left sub-column indicates the color of the cable.
The right sub-column indicates the color of dotted line or short line on the sheath of
the cable.
* indicates the number of dotted lines.
- indicates the number of short lines.

The outline of the shielded subscriber line for the 16-port subscriber board is almost the
same as that for the 32-port subscriber board, as shown in Figure 4-29.
The difference between these two subscriber lines is that the former uses 32-core
communication cable, and the latter uses 64-core communication cable. Table 4-45
shows its pin assignment.
Conn.X1
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
Cable Color
Pink
Orange
Green
Blue
Gray
Pink
Orange
Green
Conn.X1
Red*
50
Black*
49
Red*
48
Black*
47
Red*
46
Black*
45
Red*
44
Black*
43
Red*
42
Black*
41
Red**
40
Black**
39
Red**
38
Black**
37
Red**
36
Black**
35
4-44
Cable Color
Blue
Gray
Pink
Orange
Green
Blue
Gray
Blue
Red**
Black**
Red**
Black**
Red***
Black***
Red***
Black***
Red***
Black***
Red***
Black***
Red***
Black***
Red****
Black****

The CC0ICDI board provides 16 direct-dial-in subscriber interfaces.

The CB02VFB also uses the 16-port subscriber line to provide 16 2-wire VF ports or
eight 4-wire VF ports. One 4-wire port consists of two adjacent 2-wire ports.

The outline of the shielded subscriber line for the 8-port subscriber board is almost the
same as that for 32-port subscriber board, as shown in Figure 4-29.
The difference between these two subscriber lines is that the former uses 16-core
communication cable. Table 4-46 shows its pin assignment.
Conn.X1
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
Cable Color
Pink
Orange
Green
Blue
Conn.X1
Red*
26
Black*
25
Red*
24
Black*
23
Red*
22
Black*
21
Red*
20
Black*
19
Cable Color
Gray
Orange
Green
Blue
Red*
Black*
Red**
Black**
Red**
Black**
Red**
Black**
4.2.4 ATIA Communication Cable

The outline of the ATIA communication cable is almost the same as that of the shielded
subscriber line for the 32-port subscriber board, as shown in Figure 4-29.
The difference between these two subscriber lines is that the former can provide 32
pairs of subscriber lines, but only 24 pairs will be used. Table 4-47 shows its pin
assignment.
4-45

Table 4-47 Pin assignment of the ATIA subscriber line

Conn.
X1
34
32
30
28
26
24
22
20
Cable Color
Pink
Orange
Green
Blue
68
67
Pink
66
65
Orange
64
63
Green
62
61
Blue
Conn.
X1
Red*
33
Black*
31
Red*
29
Black*
27
Red*
25
Black*
23
Red*
21
Black*
19
Red**
50
Black*
*
48
Red**
46
Black*
*
44
Red**
42
Black*
*
40
Red**
38
Black*
*
36
Cable Color
Pink
Orange
Green
Blue
Pink
Orange
Green
Blue
Conn.
X1
Red***
Black***
Red***
Black***
Red***
Black***
Red***
Black***
Red****
49
Black****
47
Red****
45
Black****
43
Red****
41
Black****
39
Red****
37
Black****
35
Cable Color
Pink
Ora
nge
Gre
en
Blue
Red*****
Black*****
Red*****
Black*****
Red*****
Black*****
Red*****
Black*****
Red-
Pink
Ora
nge
Gre
en
BlackRedBlackRedBlackRed-
Blue
Black-
4.2.5 ADLA Subscriber Line

The outline of the subscriber line for H601ADLA is the same as that of the shielded
subscriber line for the 32-port subscriber board, as shown in Figure 4-29.
Table 4-44 shows its pin assignment. The first 16 ports are ADSL subscriber ports; the
last 16 ports are POTS subscriber ports.
4.2.6 ADMB/ADMC Subscriber Line

The outline of the subscriber line for H601ADMB/ADMC is the same as that of the
shielded subscriber line for the 32-port subscriber board, as shown in Figure 4-29.
4-46

Table 4-44 shows its pin assignment. The first 16 ports are ADSL subscriber ports; the
last 16 ports are POTS subscriber ports.
4.2.7 CSLA Subscriber Line

The outline of the subscriber line for the H601CSLA is the same as that of the shielded
subscriber line for 16-port subscriber board, as shown in Figure 4-29.
Table 4-45 shows its pin assignment.
4.2.8 SDLA Subscriber Line

The outline of the subscriber line for the H601SDLA is the same as that of the shielded
4.2.9 VDLA Subscriber Line

The outline of the subscriber line for the H601VDLA is the same as that of the shielded
4.3 Maintenance Cables and Network Cables

4.3.1 Local Maintenance Serial Port Cable
z
The serial port cable is front accessed for the debugging and remote maintenance.
One end of the cable is an 8-PIN RJ-45 connector, connected to the board.
The other end is a DB-9 or DB-25 female connector. To be connected with the
computer, the DB-9 female connector should be used.
Figure 4-30 shows the outline of the serial port cable.
4-47

(1) View A
(2) DB-25 connector
(5) View B
(6) Side C
(3) Label
(7) DB-9 connector
Figure 4-30 Outline of local maintenance serial port cable

Table 4-48 Pin assignment of the local maintenance serial port cable
Connector
Relationship
X2
Shell
X1
20
Shell
X3
Shell
4.3.2 Network Cable

There are two types of network cables: straight through cable and cross over cable.
z
The straight through cable is used to connect the data terminal equipment (DTE)
with the network.
The cross over cable is used to directly connect two maintenance terminals.
These two types of network cables have the same structure and use the RJ-45
connector at both ends. Figure 4-31 shows the outline of the straight through cable.
Figure 4-31 Outline of straight through cable

4-48

The straight through cable has different pin assignment from the cross-over cable.
Refer to the following description:
The line sequences at two ends of the straight through cable are completely the same.
The pin assignment of the eight pins of Connectors X1 is consistent with that of
Connectors X1. See Table 4-49.
Table 4-49 Pin assignment of the straight through cable
Connector X1
8-core category 5 twisted pair
Connector X2
Pin 1
White (Orange)
Pin 1
Pin 2
Orange
Pin 2
Pin 3
White (Green)
Pin 3
Pin 4
Blue
Pin 4
Pin 5
White (Blue)
Pin 5
Pin 6
Green
Pin 6
Pin 7
White (Brown)
Pin 7
Pin 8
Brown
Pin 8
However, the line sequences at two ends of the cross-over cable are crossed to some
extent. Table 4-50 shows its pin assignment.
Table 4-50 Pin assignment of the cross-over cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Pin 1
White (Orange)
Pin 3
Pin 2
Orange
Pin 6
Pin 3
White (Green)
Pin 1
Pin 4
Blue
Pin 4
Pin 5
White (Blue)
Pin 5
Pin 6
Green
Pin 2
Pin 7
White (Brown)
Pin 7
Pin 8
Brown
Pin 8
RJ-45 connectors are used to connect Ethernet interfaces. They can be connected with
Category-3 and Category-5 Unshielded Twisted Pairs (UTP-3 and UTP-5) or Shielded
Twisted Pair (STP).
4-49

Caution:
z
For the Category-5 UTP, the maximum transmission distance of single segment without repeater is
100 m. When the repeaters are used, the maximum space between repeaters is 5 m. Due to the delay
and signal timing, a maximum of two repeaters can be used. Therefore, the maximum distance
between two sites is 205 m.
To get the best electrical transmission characteristics, make sure that 1 and 2, 3 and 6 are just two
cable cores of the twisted pair.
4.4 Signal Cables

4.4.1 HW Cable
One end of the HW cable is a DB-100 connector, and the other end has two DB-50
connectors. The cables from these two DB-50 connectors do not necessarily have the
same length. Figure 4-32 shows the outline of this cable, and Table 4-51 shows its pin
assignment.

(4) Label 2
(2) Main label

(5) DB-50-male connector
(3) Label 1
Figure 4-32 Outline of the HW cable
Table 4-51 Pin assignment of the HW cable

Conn.
X1
Conn.
X2
26
Remark
s
One pair
Conn.
X1
Conn.
X2
Remark
s
Conn.
X1
Conn.
X2
17
35
18
18
34
One
pair
36
43
4-50
Remarks
One pair

Conn.
X1
Conn.
X2
27
28
29
10
30
11
12
31
13
14
32
15
16
33
Conn.
X1
Conn.
X2
51
52
26
53
54
27
55
56
28
57
58
29
59
60
30
61
62
31
63
64
32
65
Remark
s
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Remark
s
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Conn.
X1
Conn.
X2
Remark
s
Conn.
X1
Conn.
X2
19
10
37
19
20
35
One
pair
38
44
21
11
39
20
22
36
One
pair
40
45
23
12
41
21
24
37
One
pair
42
46
27
14
43
22
28
39
One
pair
44
47
29
15
45
23
30
40
One
pair
46
48
31
16
47
24
32
41
One
pair
48
49
33
17
49
25
34
42
One
pair
49
25
Conn.
X1
Conn.
X2
Remar
ks
Conn.
X1
Conn.
X2
67
85
18
68
34
One
pair
86
43
69
10
87
19
70
35
One
pair
88
44
71
11
89
20
72
36
One
pair
90
45
73
12
91
21
74
37
One
pair
92
46
77
14
93
22
78
39
One
pair
94
47
79
15
95
23
80
40
One
pair
96
48
81
16
97
24
82
41
One
pair
98
49
83
17
One
99
25
4-51
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair

Conn.
X1
Conn.
X2
66
33
Remark
s
Conn.
X1
Conn.
X2
Remar
ks
Conn.
X1
Conn.
X2
84
42
pair
100
50
Remarks
Table 4-52 shows the contents and descriptions of labels on the HW cable.
Table 4-52 Labels on the HW cable
Label
Print
1#HWC
Label 1
8HW-1
1#HWC
Label 2
8HW-2
Description
The cable is connected to a nearer frame.
The cable is connected to a farther frame.
4.4.2 Test Alarm Cable

Figure 4-33 shows the outline of test alarm cable, and Table 4-53 shows its pin
assignment.
(2) Main label
Figure 4-33 Outline of test alarm cable
Table 4-53 Pin assignment of the test alarm cable

Connector X1
Connector X2
4-52
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair

Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear Access Cable
Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear Access Cables

5.1 Digital Trunk Cable
5.1.1 IMA E1 Cable From APMA to OptiX155/622H
The OptiX155/622H has two types of E1 interface boards: SS42SP1 and SS42SP2.
Accordingly, there are two types of E1 cables connecting APMA to OptiX155/622H,
both using the 2mmFB wire connector with 4 6 PINs. Each connector in the
SS42SP1 board provides two E1 interfaces, while each connector in the SS42SP2
board provides four E1 interfaces.
The 2mmFB connector (J4 and J8) connected with cables at the bottom of the APMA
board provides E1 interface. Cable connectors are plugged to pin rows "96" and
"41" of J4/J8, providing eight E1 interfaces totally.
Note:
Pins 1 to 25 of J4/J8 are arranged from the bottom upward.
I. Cable connecting APMA to SS42SP1

There are two types of trunk cables from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1: 75
and 120, as shown in Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2.
Table 5-1 and Table 5-2 show the pin assignment.
5-1

(1) View A
(2) 2mmFB wire connector -4 6 PINs
(4) Lable 4
(5) Lable 3
(6) Lable 2
(9) Main lable
(10) Lable 5
(12) 2mmFB wire connector-5 4 PINs
(3) Cable tie

(7) Lable 1
(11) Lable 6
(13) View B
Figure 5-1 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
Table 5-1 Pin assignement of the 8-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H
(SS42SP1)
Conn. X3
Conn. X5
Remarks
a5
d3
Ring
a6
e3
Tip
d4
a3
Ring
d3
b3
Tip
a3
d1
Ring
a4
e1
Tip
d2
a1
Ring
d1
b1
Tip
Conn. X1
Conn. X5
a5
d4
Ring
a6
e4
Tip
d4
a4
Ring
d3
b4
Tip
a3
d2
Ring
a4
e2
Tip
d2
a2
Ring
d1
b2
Tip
Conn. X4
10
11
12
Remarks
Conn. X6
Remarks
a5
d3
Ring
a6
e3
Tip
d4
a3
Ring
d3
b3
Tip
a3
d1
Ring
a4
e1
Tip
d2
a1
Ring
d1
b1
Tip
Conn. X2
Conn. X6
13
14
15
16
Remarks
a5
d4
Ring
a6
e4
Tip
d4
a4
Ring
d3
b4
Tip
a3
d2
Ring
a4
e2
Tip
d2
a2
Ring
d1
b2
Tip
5-2

(1) View A
(3) Cable tie
(7) Label1
(11) Label 6
(13) View B
(2) 2mmFB wire connector -4 6 PINs

(4) Label 4
(5) Label 3
(9) Main label (L)
(12) 2mmFB wire connector-5 4 PINs
(6) Label 2
(10) Label 5
Figure 5-2 Outline of the8-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
Table 5-2 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H
SS42SP1
Conn. X3
Conn. X5
a5
d3
a6
e3
d4
a3
d3
b3
a3
d1
a4
e1
d2
a1
d1
b1
Conn. X1
Conn. X5
a5
d4
a6
e4
d4
a4
d3
b4
a3
d2
a4
e2
d2
a2
d1
b2
Remarks
Conn. X4
Conn. X6
Remarks
a5
d3
a6
e3
One pair
d4
a3
One pair
One pair
d3
b3
One pair
a3
d1
a4
e1
d2
a1
d1
b1
One pair
One pair
One pair
Remarks
Conn. X2
Conn. X6
One pair
One pair
One pair
Remarks
a5
d4
a6
e4
One pair
d4
a4
One pair
One pair
d3
b4
One pair
a3
d2
a4
e2
d2
a2
d1
b2
One pair
One pair
One pair
5-3
One pair
One pair
One pair

II. Cable connecting APMA to SS42SP2

There are two types of trunk cables from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1: 75
and 120, as shown in Figure 5-3 and Figure 5-4.
(1) View A
(4) Label 2
(7) Label 3
(2) Cable tie

(8) Label 4
(3) Label 1
(6) Main label (L)
(9) View B
Figure 5-3 Outline of the8-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
SS42SP2
Conn. X2
Conn. X3
Remarks
Conn. X2
a6
d3
Ring
a2
d3
Ring
b6
e3
Tip
a3
e3
Tip
d6
a3
Ring
d2
a3
Ring
c6
b3
Tip
d3
b3
Tip
a4
d1
Ring
b1
d1
Ring
a5
e1
Tip
a1
e1
Tip
d4
a1
Ring
c1
a1
Ring
d5
b1
Tip
d1
b1
Tip
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
a6
d4
Ring
b6
e4
Tip
d6
a4
Ring
c6
b4
Tip
a4
d2
Ring
10
11
12
Remarks
Conn. X1
2
3
5-4
Conn. X4
Remarks
Conn. X4
13
14
15
16
Remarks
a2
d4
Ring
a3
e4
Tip
d2
a4
Ring
d3
b4
Tip
b1
d2
Ring
6
7

Conn. X1
Conn. X3
a5
e2
Tip
d4
a2
Ring
d5
b2
Tip
(1) View A
(4) Label 2
(7) Label 3
Remarks
Conn. X1
Conn. X4
Remarks
a1
e2
Tip
c1
a2
Ring
d1
b2
Tip
(2) Cable tie

(8) Label 4
(3) Label 1
(6) Main label (L)
(9) View B
Figure 5-4 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
SS42SP2
Conn. X2
Conn. X3
a6
d3
b6
e3
d6
a3
c6
b3
a4
d1
a5
e1
d4
a1
d5
b1
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
a6
d4
b6
e4
d6
a4
c6
b4
Remarks
Conn. X2
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
a2
d3
a3
e3
d2
a3
d3
b3
b1
d1
a1
e1
c1
a1
d1
b1
Remarks
Conn. X1
One pair
One pair
5-5
Conn. X4
Conn. X4
a2
d4
a3
e4
d2
a4
d3
b4
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair

Conn. X1
Conn. X3
a4
d12
a5
e2
d4
a2
d5
b2
Remarks
Conn. X1
One pair
One pair
Conn. X4
b1
d12
a1
e2
c1
a2
d1
b2
Remarks
One pair
One pair
5.1.2 IMA E1 Cable From APMA to OptiX155C (H601ATU)

There are two types of trunk cables from APMA to OptiX155C (H601ATU): 75 and
120, as shown in Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6.
(1) View A
(4) Label 2
(7) Label 3
(2) Cable tie

(8) Label 4
(3) Label 1
(6) Main label (L)
(9) View B
Figure 5-5 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from APMA to H601ATU
Table 5-5 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from APMA to H601ATU
Conn. X2
Conn. X3
Remarks
c2
d3
Ring
a2
e3
Tip
c1
a3
Ring
a1
b3
Tip
c4
d1
Ring
a4
e1
Tip
c3
a1
Ring
a3
b1
Tip
Conn. X2
Conn. X4
c6
d3
Ring
a6
e3
Tip
c5
a3
Ring
a5
b3
Tip
c8
d1
Ring
a8
e1
Tip
12
c7
a1
Ring
16
12
a7
b1
Tip
16
10
11
5-6
Remarks
13
14
15

Conn. X1
Conn. X3
c2
d4
Ring
a2
e4
Tip
c1
a4
Ring
a1
b4
Tip
c4
d2
Ring
a4
e2
Tip
c3
a2
Ring
a3
b2
Tip
(1) View A
(4) Label 2
(7) Label 3
Remarks
Conn. X1
Conn. X4
Remarks
c6
d4
Ring
a6
e4
Tip
c5
a4
Ring
a5
b4
Tip
c8
d2
Ring
a8
e2
Tip
c7
a2
Ring
a7
b2
Tip
(2) Cable tie

(8) Label 4
(3) Label 1
(6) Main label (L)
(9) View B
Figure 5-6 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from APMA to H601ATU
Table 5-6 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from APMA to H601ATU
Conn. X2
Conn. X3
c2
d3
a2
e3
c1
a3
a1
b3
c4
d1
a4
e1
c3
a1
a3
b1
Remarks
Conn. X2
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
5-7
Conn. X4
c6
d3
a6
e3
c5
a3
a5
b3
c8
d1
a8
e1
c7
a1
a7
b1
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair

Conn. X1
Conn. X3
c2
d4
a2
e4
c1
a4
a1
b4
c4
d2
a4
e2
c3
a2
a3
b2
Remarks
Conn. X1
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Conn. X4
c6
d4
a6
e4
c5
a4
a5
b4
c8
d2
a8
e2
c7
a2
a7
b2
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
5.1.3 Cable From APMA to OptiX 155/622B

There are two types of trunk cables from APMA to OptiX 155/622B: 75 and 120, as
shown in Figure 5-7 and Figure 5-8.
(1) View A
(4) Label 2
(7) Label 3
(2) Cable tie

(8) Label 4
(3) Label 1
(6) Main label (L)
(9) View B
Figure 5-7 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622B
Table 5-7 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622B
Conn. X2
Conn. X3
Remarks
Conn. X2
b4
d3
Ring
b2
d3
Ring
13
a4
e3
Tip
a2
e3
Tip
13
e4
a3
Ring
e2
a3
Ring
d4
b3
Tip
d2
b3
Tip
b3
d1
Ring
b1
d1
Ring
10
11
5-8
Conn. X4
Remarks
14
15

Conn. X2
Conn. X3
Remarks
a3
e1
Tip
e3
a1
Ring
d3
b1
Tip
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
b4
d4
Ring
a4
e4
Tip
e4
a4
Ring
d4
b4
Tip
b3
d2
Ring
a3
e2
Tip
e3
a2
Ring
d3
b2
Tip
Conn. X2
12
Remarks
(1) View A
(4) Label 2
(7) Label 3
Conn. X4
Remarks
a1
e1
Tip
e1
a1
Ring
d1
b1
Tip
Conn. X1
Conn. X4
Remarks
b2
d4
Ring
a2
e4
Tip
e2
a4
Ring
d2
b4
Tip
b1
d2
Ring
a1
e2
Tip
e1
a2
Ring
d1
b2
Tip
(2) Cable tie

(8) Label 4
16
(3) Label 1
(6) Main label (L)
(9) View B
Figure 5-8 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622B
Table 5-8 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from APMA to OptiX 155/622B
Conn. X2
Conn. X3
b4
d3
a4
e3
e4
a3
d4
b3
Remarks
Conn. X2
One pair
One pair
5-9
Conn. X4
b2
d3
a2
e3
e2
a3
d2
b3
Remarks
One pair
One pair

Conn. X2
Conn. X3
b3
d1
a3
e1
e3
a1
d3
b1
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
b4
d4
a4
e4
e4
a4
d4
b4
b3
d2
a3
e2
e3
a2
d3
b2
Remarks
Conn. X2
One pair
One pair
Remarks
b1
d1
a1
e1
e1
a1
d1
b1
Conn. X1
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Conn. X4
Connector .X4
b2
d4
a2
e4
e2
a4
d2
b4
b1
d2
a1
e2
e1
a2
d1
b2
Remarks
One pair
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
5.1.4 Cable From APMA to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables from APMA to DDF: 75 and 120, both have
five scales: 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m and 50 m, as shown in Figure 5-9 and Figure
5-10.
(1) Label 1
(5) Label 18
(9) View B
(2) Label 16
(6) Cable tie
(3) Main label

Figure 5-9 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from APMA to DDF
5-10
(4) Label 17

Table 5-9 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from APMA to DDF
Conn. X1
Remarks
a1
Ring
b1
Tip
a2
Ring
b2
Tip
a3
Ring
b3
Tip
a4
Ring
b4
Tip
Conn. X2
Ring
b1
Tip
a2
Ring
b2
Tip
a3
Ring
b3
Tip
a4
Ring
b4
Tip
(2) Label 16
(6) Label 18
Remarks
d1
Ring
e1
Tip
d2
Ring
e2
Tip
d3
Ring
e3
Tip
d4
Ring
e4
Tip
Remarks
a1
(1) Label 1
(5) Label 17
(9) View B
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
Ring
e1
Tip
d2
Ring
e2
Tip
d3
Ring
e3
Tip
d4
Ring
e4
Tip
(3) Main label

(7) Cable tie

(8) 2 mm FB wire connector
Figure 5-10 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from APMA to DDF
5-11
Remarks
d1

Table 5-10 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from APMA to DDF
Conn. X1
Cable W
a1
Pink/Red***
b1
Pink/Black***
a2
Green/Red*
b2
Green/Black*
a3
Blue/Red**
b3
Blue/Black**
a4
Pink/Red*
b4
Pink/Black*
Conn. X2
Cable W
a1
Gray/Red***
b1
Gray/Black***
a2
Orange/Red**
b2
Orange/Black**
a3
Green/Red***
b3
Green/Black***
a4
Gray/Red*
b4
Gray/Black*
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Conn. X1
Cable W
d1
Orange/Red***
e1
Orange/Black***
d2
Blue/Red*
e2
Blue/Black*
d3
Gray/Red**
e3
Gray/Black**
d4
Orange/Red*
e4
Orange/Black*
Conn. X2
Cable W
d1
Blue/Red****
e1
Blue/Black****
d2
Green/Red**
e2
Green/Black**
d3
Blue/Red***
e3
Blue/Black***
d4
Pink/Red**
e4
Pink/Black**
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
5.1.5 Cable From APMA to MD5500 E8IT

Figure 5-11 shows the 4-E1-interface 75 trunk cable connecting APMA to E8IT. It is
used to connect with the upstream equipment for test. For example, to connect the
AMPA to the E8IT subboard of the MD5500 directly.
5-12

(1) View A
(4) Main label (L)
(2) Cable tie

(5) View B
Figure 5-11 Outline of the 4-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from APMA to E8IT
Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the 4-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from APMA to E8IT
Conn. X1
Coax.&Serial No.
a4
Ring
b4
Tip
d4
Ring
e4
Tip
a2
Ring
b2
Tip
d2
Ring
e2
Tip
Conn. X2
Conn. X1
Coax.&Serial No.
Conn. X2
31
a3
Ring
43
30
b3
Tip
d3
Ring
e3
Tip
37
a1
Ring
36
b1
Tip
d1
Ring
e1
Tip
42
15
14
49
48
21
20
5.1.6 CES E1 Cable From PV8 to APMA

There are two types of CES E1 cables from PV8 to APMA: 75 and 120, as shown
in Figure 5-12 and Figure 5-13.
5-13

(1) View A
(4) Cable tie
(7) Main label 2
(10) View B
(2) Label 1
(5) Main label 1
(8) Label 3
(3) Label 2
(9) Label 4
Figure 5-12 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from PV8 to APMA
Table 5-12 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from PV8 to APMA
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
a1
a4
c1
b4
a3
d4
c3
e4
a5
a2
c5
b2
a7
d2
c7
e2
a2
a3
c2
b3
a4
d3
c4
e3
a6
a1
c6
b1
a8
d1
c8
e1
Remarks
1
Conn. X2
Conn. X4
Ring
a1
a3
Tip
c1
b4
Ring
a3
d4
Tip
c3
e4
Ring
a5
a2
Tip
c5
b2
Ring
a7
d2
Tip
c7
e2
Ring
a2
a3
Tip
c2
b3
Ring
a4
d3
Tip
c4
e3
Ring
a6
a1
Tip
c6
b1
Ring
a8
d1
Tip
c8
e1
5-14
Remarks
1
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip

(1) View A
(4) Cable tie
(7) Label 3
(2) Label 1
(5) Main label 1
(8) Label 4
(3) Label 2
(6) Main label 2
(9) View B
Figure 5-13 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from PV8 to APMA
Table 5-13 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from PV8 to APMA
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
a1
a4
c1
b4
a3
d4
c3
e4
a5
a2
c5
b2
a7
d2
c7
e2
a2
a3
c2
b3
a4
d3
c4
e3
a6
a1
c6
b1
a8
d1
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Conn. X2
Conn. X4
a1
a3
c1
b4
a3
d4
c3
e4
a5
a2
c5
b2
a7
d2
c7
e2
a2
a3
c2
b3
a4
d3
c4
e3
a6
a1
c6
b1
a8
d1
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
5.1.7 CES E1 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to APMA

There are two types of CES E1 cables from PV4/RSP0 to APMA: 75 and 120, as
5-15

(1) View A
(4) Label 3
(7) Main label 1
(10) Main label 2
(2) Label 1
(5) Label 4
(8) Cable tie
(11) Label 6
(3) Label 2
(9) Label 5
(12) View B
Figure 5-14 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to APMA
Table 5-14 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to APMA
Conn. X1
Conn. X5
a1
a4
c1
b4
a3
d4
c3
e4
a5
a2
c5
b2
a7
d2
c7
e2
Conn. X3
Conn. X6
a1
a4
c1
b4
a3
d4
c3
e4
a5
a2
c5
b2
a7
d2
c7
e2
Remarks
Conn. X2
Conn. X5
Remarks
Ring
a1
a3
Tip
c1
b3
Ring
a3
d3
Tip
c3
e3
Ring
a5
a1
Ring
Tip
c5
b1
Tip
Ring
a7
d1
Tip
c7
e1
Remarks
1
Conn. X4
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Conn. X6
Ring
a1
a3
Tip
c1
b3
Ring
a3
d3
Tip
c3
e3
Ring
a5
a1
Tip
c5
b1
Ring
a7
d1
Tip
c7
e1
5-16
Ring
Remarks
5
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip

(1) View A
(4) Label 3
(7) Main label 1
(10) Main label 2
(2) Label 1
(5) Label 4
(8) Cable tie
(11) Label 6
(3) Label 2
(9) Label 5
(12) View B
Figure 5-15 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to APMA
Table 5-15 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to APMA
Conn. X1
Conn. X5
a1
a4
c1
b4
a3
d4
c3
e4
a5
a2
c5
b2
a7
d2
c7
e2
Conn. X3
Conn. X6
a1
a4
c1
b4
a3
d4
c3
e4
a5
a2
c5
b2
a7
d2
c7
e2
Remarks
Conn. X2
Conn. X5
Remarks
a1
a3
c1
b3
a3
d3
c3
e3
a5
a1
c5
b1
One pair
a7
d1
One pair
One pair
c7
e1
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
5-17
Conn. X4
One pair
One pair
One pair
Conn. X6
a1
a3
c1
b3
a3
d3
c3
e3
a5
a1
c5
b1
a7
d1
c7
e1
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair

5.1.8 IPMA Subtending Cable

The IPMA subtending cables consists of the cable connecting the master frame (as
shown in Figure 5-16) and the cable connecting the slave frame (as shown in Figure
5-17).
(5)
B
X2
B
(1)
(4)
(2)
W1
(7)
(6)
W2
X1
(3)
X3
(1) Power connector

(4) Main label HUBM (14)/(69) PINs
(2) Cable tie

(5) Label 1: 1#FE
W1 and W2: twisted pair

(6) Label 2: 2#FE
Figure 5-16 IPMA subtending cable connecting with master frame

Table 5-16 Pin assignment of IPMA subtending cable connecting with master frame
Cable
W1
X1
X2
Color
b4
Blue
a4
White/Blue
e4
Green
d4
White/Green
5-18
Cable
W2
X1
X3
Color
b2
Blue
a2
White/Blue
e2
Green
d2
White/Green

(2)
(1)
W1
(4)
X1
(6)
(5)
B
B
(3)
X3
W2
(7)
X2

(4) Main label HUBS (14)/(69) PINs
(7) Power connector
(2) Label 1: 1#FE

W1 and W2: twisted pair
(3) Label 2: 2#FE

(6) Cable tie
Figure 5-17 IPMA subtending cable connecting with slave frame

Table 5-17shows its pin assignment.
Table 5-17 Pin assignment of IPMA subtending cable connecting with slave frame
Cable
W1
Color
Rema
rks
X1
X3
b4
Blue
RX0+
a4
White/Blue
RX0-
e4
Green
TX0+
d4
White/Green
TX0-
Cable
W2
Color
Remar
ks
X2
X3
b2
Blue
RX1+
a2
White/Blue
RX1-
e2
Green
TX1+
d2
White/Green
TX1-
5.1.9 FE Upstream Cable of IPMA

The straight through cable is used as the FE upstream cable of the IPMA.
5.1.10 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622H

Accordingly, there are two types of cables from PV8 to OptiX155/622H, both using the
4 6-PIN 2mmFB connector.
5-19

I. Cable connecting PV8 to SS42SP1

)
2
(
(1) View A
(4) Main label
(2) Cable tie

(5) Label 2
(3) Label 1
(6) View B
Figure 5-18 Outline of the E1 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
Table 5-18 shows the pin assignment.
Table 5-18 Pin assignment of the E1 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
Remarks
a3
a2
Ring
a4
c2
Tip
a5
a1
Ring
a6
c1
Tip
d1
c4
Ring
d2
a4
Tip
d3
c3
Ring
d4
a3
Tip
Conn. X2
Conn. X3
W1
W2
W3
W4
Remarks
a3
a6
Ring
a4
c6
Tip
a5
a5
Ring
a6
c5
Tip
d1
c8
Ring
d2
a8
Tip
d3
c7
Ring
d4
a7
Tip
5-20
W5
W6
W7
W8

II. Cable connecting PV8 to SS42SP2

There are two types of E1 cables from PV8 to SS42SP2: 75 and 120, as shown in
Figure 5-19 and Figure 5-20.
(1) View A
(4) Label
(7) View B
(8) C-C(without shell)
W: 16-core coaxial cable, W2: communication cable
(3) Cable tie

(6) Wire connector
Figure 5-19 Outline of the 75 E1 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
Table 5-19 Pin assignment of the 75 E1 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
Cable W
Conn. X1
Conn. X4
Cable W
a6
a1
Ring
a2
a1
Ring
b6
c1
Tip
a3
c1
Tip
d6
a3
Ring
d2
a3
Ring
c6
c3
Tip
d3
c3
Tip
a4
a5
Ring
b1
a5
Ring
a5
c5
Tip
a1
c5
Tip
d4
a7
Ring
c1
a7
Ring
d5
c7
Tip
d1
c7
Tip
Conn. X2
Conn. X3
Cable W
Conn. X2
Conn. X4
Cable W
a6
a2
Ring
a2
a2
Ring
b6
c2
Tip
a3
c2
Tip
d6
a4
Ring
d2
a4
Ring
c6
c4
Tip
d3
c4
Tip
a4
a6
Ring
b1
a6
Ring
5-21

Conn. X2
Conn. X3
Cable W
Conn. X2
Conn. X4
Cable W
a5
c6
Tip
a1
c6
Tip
d4
a8
Ring
c1
a8
Ring
d5
c8
Tip
d1
c8
Tip
Table 5-20 Connectors and their labels

Connector
Label
X1
X2
X3
PV8:UP (1724)
X4
PV8:UP (2532)
(1) View A
(4) Label
W: twisted cable

(5) Wire connector
(3) Cable tie

(6) View B
Figure 5-20 Outline of the 120 E1 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
Table 5-21 Pin assignment of the 75 E1 trunk cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
a6
a1
b6
c1
d6
a3
c6
c3
a4
a5
a5
c5
d4
a7
d5
c7
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
5-22
Conn. X1
Conn. X4
a2
a1
a3
c1
d2
a3
d3
c3
b1
a5
a1
c5
c1
a7
d1
c7
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair

Conn. X1
Conn. X3
Remarks
Conn. X1
Conn. X4
Remarks
a6
a2
One pair
a2
a2
One pair
b6
c2
One pair
a3
c2
One pair
d6
a4
d2
a4
c6
c4
d3
c4
a4
a6
b1
a6
a5
c6
a1
c6
d4
a8
c1
a8
d5
c8
d1
c8
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Table 5-22 Connectors and their labels

Connector
Label
X1
X2
X3
PV8:UP (1724)
X4
PV8:UP (2532)
5.1.11 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622B

Figure 5-21 shows the cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622B.
(1) View A
(4) Main label (L)
(7) View B
(2) Label 3
(5) Heat shrink tube (2pcs) L=2 cm
(8) Label 4
(3) Cable tie 2PCS

(6) Label 1
(9) Label 2
Figure 5-21 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622B
5-23

Table 5-23 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622B
Con
n.
X1
Con
n.
X3
a1
a1
b1
c1
d1
a3
e1
c3
a2
a5
b2
c5
d2
a7
e2
c7
Cabl
eW
Con
n. X1
Con
n. X4
Cabl
eW
Con
n. X2
Con
n. X3
Cabl
eW
Conn.
X2
Conn. X4
One
pair
a3
a1
a1
a2
a2
c1
b1
c2
One
pair
a3
b3
One
pair
b3
c2
One
pair
d3
a3
d1
a4
a4
c3
e1
c4
One
pair
d3
e3
One
pair
e3
c4
One
pair
a4
a5
a2
a6
a6
c5
b2
c6
One
pair
a4
b4
One
pair
b4
c6
One
pair
d4
a7
d2
a8
a8
c7
e2
c8
One
pair
d4
e4
One
pair
e4
c8
Table 5-24 describes the labels.

Table 5-24 Labels on the 8-E1-interface 120 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622B
Label 1
14E1
Label 2
58E1
Label 3
PV8: UP (1724)
Note:
The stripped part of the cable is wrapped in a heat shrink tube.
5.1.12 Cable From PV8 to OptiX 155/622

Figure 5-22 shows the cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622.
5-24
Label 4
PV8: UP (2532)
Cabl
eW
One
pair
One
pair
One
pair
One
pair

(1) View A
(4) Label 2
(7) Main label
(2) Label 1
(8) View B
(3) Cable tie

(6) UNC4-40
Figure 5-22 Outline of the 8-E1-interface 120 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H
Table 5-25 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface 120 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
c1
21
a1
22
c3
a3
c2
29
a2
30
c4
11
a4
12
c5
23
a5
24
c7
a7
c6
31
a6
32
c8
13
a8
14
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
5-25
Conn. X2
Conn. X3
c1
25
a1
26
c3
a3
c2
33
a2
34
c4
15
a4
16
c5
27
a5
28
c7
a7
10
c6
35
a6
36
c8
17
a8
18
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair

Table 5-26 Labels on the 8-E1-interface 120 cable from PV8 to OptiX 155/622
Label 1
Label 2
PV8 UP(1724)
PV8 UP(2532)
5.1.13 Cables From PV8 to OptiX 155C

The OptiX 155C consists of H301ASU and H302ASU.
I. E1 cable connecting PV8 to H301ASU

Figure 5-23 shows the E1 cable from PV8 to H301ASU.
(14) Labels 1 to 4
W1 and W2: Twisted pairs
(5) 3 x 8-PIN wire connector
Figure 5-23 Outline of the 8-E1-interface cable from PV8 to H301ASU

Table 5-27 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface cable from PV8 to H301ASU
Con
n.
X1
Conn
. X4
Rem
arks
Con
n. X1
Con
n. X3
Rem
arks
Con
n. X2
Con
n. X4
a1
c3
a5
c3
c4
a3
c5
a3
One
pair
a1
c1
One
pair
c1
a4
a2
c1
a6
c1
c2
a1
c6
a1
One
pair
a2
c2
One
pair
c2
a2
a3
c7
a7
c7
c8
a7
c7
a7
One
pair
a3
c3
One
pair
c3
a8
a4
c5
a8
c5
c6
a5
c8
a5
One
pair
a4
c4
One
pair
c4
a6
5-26
Remark
s
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Con
n. X2
Conn.
X3
Rem
arks
a5
c4
c5
a4
One
pair
a6
c2
c6
a2
a7
c8
c7
a8
a8
c6
c8
a6
One
pair
One
pair
One
pair


Table 5-28 Labels on the 8-E1-interface cable from PV8 to H301ASU
Label 1
Label 2
ASU UP (18)
ASU DOWN (2532)
Label 3
Label 4
PV8 DOWN (2532)
PV8 UP (1724)
II. E1 cable connecting PV8 to H302ASU

The E1 cable (for E1 interfaces 1-8) from PV8 to H302ASU is the same as the cable
connecting PV8 to H301ASU. Figure 5-24 shows the outline of the E1 cable (for E1
interfaces 916) from PV8 to H302ASU.
(1) 3x8PIN wire connector

(67) Labels 56
W: Twisted pair
(25) Labels 14
(5) Cable tie
Figure 5-24 Outline of the 8-E1-interface cable from PV8 to H302ASU

Table 5-29 Pin assignment of the 8-E1-interface cable from PV8 to H302ASU
Conn. X1
Conn. X5
b1
a3
b2
c3
b3
a1
b4
c1
b5
a7
b6
c7
b7
a5
b8
c5
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
5-27
Conn. X2
Conn. X6
b1
a3
b2
c3
b3
a1
b4
c1
b5
a7
b6
c7
b7
a5
b8
c5
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair

Conn. X3
Conn. X5
b1
a4
b2
c4
b3
a2
b4
c2
b5
a8
b6
c8
b7
a6
b8
c6
Remarks
Conn. X4
Conn. X6
b1
a4
b2
c4
b3
a2
b4
c2
b5
a8
b6
c8
b7
a6
b8
c6
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair

Table 5-30 Labels on the 8-E1-interface cable from PV8 to H302ASU
Label
Content
Label 1
ASU UP (9-16)
Label 2
ASU UP (25-32)
Label 3
ASU DOWN (1-8)
Label 4
ASU DOWN (17-24)
Label 5
PV8 UP (17-24)
Label 6
PV8 UP (25-32)
5.1.14 Cable From PV8 to B75

Figure 5-25 shows the E1 cable from PV8 to B75.
(1) View A
(2) View B
Figure 5-25 Outline of the E1 cable connecting PV8 to B75
5-28
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair


Table 5-31 Pin assignment of the E1 cable from PV8 to B75
Conn. X1
Conn. Remar Conn. Conn. Remark Conn.

X2
ks
X1
X2
s
X1
c1
a1
c5
a5
11
c2
12
a2
13
c6
14
a6
One
pair
One
pair
One
pair
One
pair
21
c3
22
a3
23
c7
24
a7
29
c4
30
a4
31
c8
32
a8
Conn. Remark
Conn. X1 Conn. X3 Remarks
X3
s
c1
a1
c5
10
a5
One
pair
15
c2
16
a2
One
pair
17
c6
18
a6
One
pair
One
pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
25
c3
26
a3
27
c7
28
a7
33
c4
34
a4
35
c8
36
a8
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Connect the 37-PIN female connector of the cable to the B75 board, and the AMP
connector to the 17th24th or 25th32nd rows of pins in the upper HEADER.
5.1.15 Cable From PV8 to DDF

Figure 5-26 shows the cable from PV8 to DDF.
(1) Main label

(3) Label 1
W: coaxial cable
(2) Cable tie

(4) View A
Figure 5-26 Outline of the 75 E1 cable from PV8 to DDF

5-29

Table 5-32 Pin assignment of the 75 E1 cable from PV8 to DDF

Conn. X1
Remarks
a1
Ring
c1
Tip
a3
Ring
c3
Tip
a5
Ring
c5
Tip
a7
Ring
c7
Tip
Conn. X1
Remarks
a2
Ring
c2
Tip
a4
Ring
c4
Tip
a6
Ring
c6
Tip
W.4
a8
Ring
W.8
W.4
c8
Tip
W.8
W.1
W.2
W.3
W.5
W.6
W.7
5.1.16 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H

There are two types of cables from RSP/PV4 to OptiX 155/622H:
z
Dual-E1-interface cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
Dual-E1-interface cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
Figure 5-27 and Figure 5-28 show the outline of dual-E1-interface cable from
PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H:
z
One end of the cable is the 4X6PIN 2mmFB connector, connected to the OptiX
155/622H.
The other end is the 4X8PIN AMP connector, connected to the 17th24th or
25th32nd rows of pins in the upper HEADER.
I. Dual-E1-interface cable connecting PV4/RSP0 and SS42SP1
Figure 5-27 Outline of the dual-E1-interface cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
5-30

Table 5-33 Pin assignment of the dual-E1-interface cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
a3
a5
a4
c5
a5
a1
a6
c1
d1
c7
d2
a7
d3
c3
d4
a3
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
II. Dual-E1-interface cable from PV4/RSP0 to SS42SP2
(1) View A
(2) Cable tie

(7) Label 1
(3) Main label

(8) Label 2

(9) View B
(5) C-C (without shell)
Figure 5-28 Outline of the dual-E1 cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
Table 5-34 Pin assignment of the dual-E1-interface cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
Conn. X
Coaxial cable
Conn. X1
a6
Ring
a1
b6
Tip
c1
d6
Ring
a3
c6
Tip
c3
a4
Ring
a5
a5
Tip
c5
d4
Ring
a7
5-31

Conn. X
d5
Coaxial cable
Conn. X1
Tip
Conn. X
c7
Coaxial cable
Conn. X2
a2
Ring
a1
a3
Tip
c1
d2
Ring
a3
d3
Tip
c3
b1
Ring
a5
a1
Tip
c5
c1
Ring
a7
d1
Tip
c7

Table 5-35 Labels on the dual-E1-interface cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
Label
Print
Label 1
RSP(1):UP(1724)/(2532)
Label 2
RSP(2):UP(1724) /(2532)
Note:
z
Bind the cable tie in the direction as illustrated in the figure;
Cut off about 200 mm connecting the cable jacket at X end of the connector;
Short circuit b2 and b3, b4 and b5, c2 and c3, c4 and c5 in Conn. X with the tip of 32-core subscriber
cable W2.
5.1.17 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622B

Figure 5-29 shows the E1 trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622B.
5-32

(1) View A
(2) View B
Figure 5-29 Outline of the E1cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX155/622B

Table 5-36 Pin assignment of the E1 cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX155/622B
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
a1
a1
b1
c1
d1
a3
e1
c3
a2
a5
b2
c5
d2
a7
e2
c7
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
a3
a1
b3
c1
d3
a3
e3
c3
a4
a5
b4
c5
d4
a7
e4
c7
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
5.1.18 Cable Connecting PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622

Figure 5-30 shows the E1 trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622. The cable
has four AMP connectors.
(1) View A
(2) View B
Figure 5-30 Outline of the E1 cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622
5-33


Table 5-37 Pin assignment of the E1 cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155/622
Conn.
X1
Conn. Rema
X5
rks
c1
21
a1
22
c3
a3
c5
23
a5
24
c7
a7
Conn.
X2
Conn. Remar
X5
ks
One
pair
c1
25
a1
26
One
pair
c3
a3
One
pair
c5
27
a5
28
One
pair
c7
a7
10
Conn.
X3
Conn. Rema
X5
rks
One
pair
c1
29
a1
30
One
pair
c3
11
a3
12
One
pair
c5
31
a5
32
One
pair
c7
13
a7
14
Conn.
X4
Conn. Remar
X5
ks
One
pair
c1
33
a1
34
One
pair
c3
15
a3
16
One
pair
c5
35
a5
36
One
pair
c7
17
a7
18
One
pair
One
pair
One
pair
One
pair
The 37-PIN male connector of the cable connects to the OptiX 155/622, and the AMP
connector connects to the 17th24th or 25th32nd rows of pins of the RSP slot.
5.1.19 Cables From PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155C

Figure 5-31 shows the cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155C.
(1) View A
(4) Label 3
(2) Cable tie

(5) View B
Figure 5-31 Outline of the E1 cable from PV4/RSP0to OptiX 155C
5-34
(3) Label 2
(6) Label 1


Table 5-38 Pin assignment of the E1 cable from PV4/RSP0 to OptiX 155C
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
a1
a3
c1
c3
a2
a1
c2
c1
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
a5
a3
c5
c3
a6
a1
c6
c1
Remarks
One pair
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
a3
a7
c3
c7
a4
a5
c4
c5
Conn. X1
One pair
One pair
Conn. X3
a7
a7
c7
c7
a8
a5
c8
c5
Remarks
Remarks
One pair
One pair

Table 5-39 Labels on the E1 cable from RSP/PV4 to OptiX 155C
Notes on Label 1
Notes on Label 2
ASU(18) DL4925 04026534-V0 XXXXXX
RSP1(1724)
Note:
Cables W1 and W2 are made of cable W.
5.1.20 Cable From PV4/RSP0 to B75

Figure 5-32 shows the E1 trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to B75.
5-35
Notes on Label 3
RSP2(1724)

(1) View A
(2) View B
Figure 5-32 Outline of the E1 trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to B75

Table 5-40 Pin assignment of the E1 trunk cable from PV4/RSP0 to B75
Conn.
X1
Conn. Remark Conn.

X5
s
X2
c1
a1
c3
21
a3
22
c5
a5
c7
23
a7
24
Conn. Remark Conn.

X5
s
X3
c1
a1
One
pair
c3
25
a3
26
One
pair
c5
a5
10
c7
27
a7
28
One
pair
One
pair
Remark
Conn. Remark
Conn. X4 Conn. X5
s
X5
s
c1
11
a1
12
One
pair
c3
29
a3
30
One
pair
c5
13
a5
14
c7
31
a7
32
One
pair
One
pair
c1
15
a1
16
One
pair
c3
33
a3
34
One
pair
c5
17
a5
18
c7
35
a7
36
One
pair
One
pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
The 37-PIN male connector of the cable connects to the B75 board, and the AMP
connector connects to the 17th24th or 25th32nd rows of pins of the RSP slot.
5.1.21 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622H

The OptiX 155/622H has two types of E1 interface boards: SS42SP1 and SS42SP2.
Accordingly, there are two types of cables from PV8 to OptiX 155/622H, both using
the 4 6-PIN 2mmFB connector.
Figure 5-33 and Figure 5-34 show the single-E1-interface cable from RSPA to OptiX
155/622H.
5-36

One end of the cable is the 4 6-PIN 2mmFB connector, connected with the
OptiX 155/622H.
The other end is the 4X8PIN AMP connector, connected with the 17th24th or
25th32nd rows of pins of upper HEADER in the backplane of the subscriber

frame.
I. Single-E1-interface cable from RSPA to SS42SP1
Figure 5-33 Outline of the single-E1-interface cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
Table 5-41 Pin assignment of the single-E1-interface cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
a5
a1
a6
c1
d3
c3
d4
a3
Conn. X1
Remarks
One pair
One pair
Conn. X3
a3
a1
a4
c1
d1
c3
d2
a3
Remarks
One pair
One pair
5-37

II. Single-E1-interface cable from RSPA to SS42SP2

There are two types of single-E1-interface cables from RSPA to SS42SP2: 75 and
120, as shown in Figure 5-34 and Figure 5-35.
(1) View A
(2) 4 6-PIN female connector
(4) Main label
(7) View B
(8) D-D
W: mini coaxial cable, numbers 18 are printed on the tip protection layer.
(3) Cable tie

(9) C-C (without shell)
Figure 5-34 Outline of the single-E1-interface 75 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
Table 5-42 Pin assignment of the single-E1-interface 75 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622H
SS42SP2
Conn. X
Coax.&Serial No.
a6
Ring
b6
Tip
d6
Ring
c6
Tip
Conn. X
Coax.&Serial No.
a2
Ring
a3
Tip
d2
Ring
d3
Tip
Conn. X1
Conn. X
a1
a4
Ring
c1
a5
Tip
a3
d4
Ring
c3
d5
Tip
Conn. X3
Conn. X
a1
b1
Ring
c1
a1
Tip
a3
c1
Ring
c3
d1
Tip
5-38
Coax.&Serial No.
3
Coax.&Serial No.
7
Conn. X2
a1
c1
a3
c3
Conn. X4
a1
c1
a3
c3

Table 5-43 Connectors and labels

Connector
Label
X1
RSP(1)
X2
RSP(2)
X3
RSP(3)
X4
RSP(4)
Note:
z
Cut off about 200 mm from the cable jacket at X end of the connector;
Short circuit b2 and b3, b4 and b5, c2 and c3, c4 and c5 in Conn. X with the tip of 32-core subscriber
cable W2.
(1) View A
(4) Main label
W: twisted cable

(3) Cable tie

(6) View B
Figure 5-35 Outline of the 120 E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
Table 5-44 Pin assignment of the 120 E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP2
Conn. X
Conn. X1
a6
a1
b6
c1
d6
a3
c6
c3
a4
a5
a5
c5
d4
a7
d5
c7
Remarks
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair
5-39
Conn. X
Conn. X2
a2
a1
a3
c1
d2
a3
d3
c3
b1
a5
a1
c5
c1
a7
d1
c7
Remarks
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair

Table 5-45 Connectors and labels

Connector
Label
X1
RSP(1):UP(1724)/(2532)
X2
RSP(2):UP(1724)/(2532)
5.1.22 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622B

Figure 5-36 shows the cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622B.
(1) View A
(4) Label 3
(7) Main label
(2) Label 4
(5) Label 2
(3) Cable tie

(6) Label 1
(9) View B
Figure 5-36 Outline of the 4-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622B
Table 5-46 Pin assignment of the 4-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622B
Cable
W1
X2
X1
a1
a1
c1
b1
a3
d1
c3
e1
Remarks
Cable
one pair
W3
one pair
5-40
X4
X1
a1
a1
c1
b3
a3
d3
c3
e3
Remarks
one pair
one pair

Cable
W2
X3
X1
a1
a2
c1
b2
a3
d2
c3
e2
Remarks
Cable
one pair
W4
one pair
X5
X1
a1
a41
c1
b4
a3
d4
c3
e4
Remarks
one pair
one pair

Table 5-47 Labels on the 4-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622B
Label
Label 1
Label 2
Label 3
Label 4
Content
RSPA-1
RSPA-2
RSPA-3
RSPA-4
Note:
When connecting the 4*5 connector, first peel part of the sheath from the cable, then wrap the peeled
part with a Heat shrink tube. See Figure 5-45.
5.1.23 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155/622

There are two types of E1 cables from RSPA to OptiX 155/622: 75 and 120.
z
Figure 5-37 shows the 75 E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622.
Figure 5-38 shows the 120 E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622, which is the
same as the cable connecting RSPA to B75.
1)
75 E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622
(1) View A
(4) Main label
(2) Label 1: RSP

(5) Label 2: R
Figure 5-37 Outline of the 75 E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622
5-41
(3) Cable tie

(6) Label 3: T


Table 5-48 Pin assignment of the 75 E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622
Conn. X1
c1
a1
c3
a3
2)
Cable
W1
W2
Tip
Remarks
Conn. X2
Ring
Tip
Conn. X3
Ring
120 E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622
(18) Labels 18
(11) 37-PIN wire connector
W: twisted pair
(9) Cable tie

(12) Wire connector-4 8 PINs
(10) Main label
Figure 5-38 Outline of the 120 E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622
5-42

Table 5-49 Pin assignment of the 120 E1 cable from RSPA to OptiX 155/622
Conn.
X1
Conn. Rema
X9
rks
c1
a1
c3
21
a3
22
Conn.
X5
One
pair
One
pair
Conn. Rema
X9
rks
c1
11
a1
12
c3
29
a3
30
One
pair
One
pair
Conn.
X2
Conn. Remar
X9
ks
c1
a1
c3
23
a3
24
Conn.
X6
One
pair
One
pair
Conn.
X3
c1
a1
c3
25
a3
26
Conn. Remar
X9
ks
c1
13
a1
14
c3
31
a3
32
Conn. Rema
X9
rks
Conn.
X7
c1
15
a1
16
One
pair
c3
33
a3
34
Conn. Remar
X9
ks
One
pair
c1
a1
10
One
pair
c3
27
a3
28
Conn. Rema
X9
rks
One
pair
Conn.
X4
Conn.
X8
One
pair
One
pair
Conn. Remar
X9
ks
One
pair
c1
17
a1
18
One
pair
c3
35
a3
36
One
pair
One
pair
The 37-PIN male connector of the cable connects to OptiX155/622, and the AMP
connector to the RSP slot.
5.1.24 Cable From RSPA to OptiX 155C

There are two types of E1 cables from RSPA to OptiX 155C (H302ASU), according to
the cable connection position. Figure 5-39 and Figure 5-40 show the outline of the two
types of cables respectively.

(4) Label 2
W: Twisted pair
(1) Label 1
(3) Cable tie
Figure 5-39 Outline (1) of the E1 cable from RSPA to H302ASU

Table 5-50 shows the pin assignment (1).
5-43

Table 5-50 Pin assignment (1) of the E1 cable from RSPA to H302ASU
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
b1
a3
b2
c3
b3
a1
b4
c1
Remarks
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
b5
a3
b6
c3
b7
a1
b8
c1
One pair
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair
Table 5-51 describes the labels on the E1 cable (1).

Table 5-51 Labels (1) on the E1 cable from RSPA to H302ASU
Label
Content
ASU UP (916)/(2532)
Label 1
DOWN (18)/DOWN (1724)
Label 2
RSP1 UP (1724)
Label 3
RSP2 UP (1724)

(2) Cable tie

W: Twisted pair
(37) Labels 15
Figure 5-40 Outline (2) of E1 cable from RSPA to H302ASU

Table 5-52 shows the pin assignment of the cable (2).
Table 5-52 Pin assignment (2) of the E1 cable from RSPA to H302ASU
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
a1
c3
c1
a3
Remarks
One pair
5-44
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
a3
c3
c3
a3
Remarks
One pair

Conn. X1
Conn. X2
a2
c1
c2
a1
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
a5
c3
c5
a3
a6
c1
c6
a1
Remarks
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
a4
c1
c4
a1
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
a7
c3
c7
a3
a8
c1
c8
a1
Table 5-53 describes of the labels on the cable (2).

Table 5-53 Labels (2) on the E1 cable from RSPA to H302ASU
Label
Content
Label 1
ASU UP (18)
Label 2
RSP1 UP (1724)
Label 3
RSP2 UP (1724)
Label 4
RSP3 UP (1724)
Label 5
RSP4 UP (1724)
5-45
Remarks
One pair
Remarks
One pair
One pair

5.1.25 Cable From RSPA to B75
(18) Labels 18
(11) 37-PIN wire connector
W: twisted pair
(9) Cable tie

(12) Wire connector-4 8 PINs
(10) Main label
Figure 5-41 Outline of the E1 trunk cable from RSPA to B75

Table 5-54 Pin assignment of the E1 trunk cable from RSPA to B75
Conn.
X1
Conn. Rema
X9
rks
c1
a1
c3
21
a3
22
One
pair
One
pair
Conn.
X2
Conn. Remar
X9
ks
c1
a1
c3
23
a3
24
One
pair
One
pair
Conn.
X3
Conn. Rema
X9
rks
c1
a1
c3
25
a3
26
5-46
Conn.
X4
Conn. Remar
X9
ks
One
pair
c1
a1
10
One
pair
c3
27
a3
28
One
pair
One
pair

Conn. X5
Conn. Rema
X9
rks
c1
11
a1
12
c3
29
a3
30
One
pair
One
pair
Conn.
X6
Conn. Remar
X9
ks
c1
13
a1
14
c3
31
a3
32
Conn.
X7
Conn. Rema
X9
rks
One
pair
c1
15
a1
16
One
pair
c3
33
a3
34
Conn.
X8
Conn. Remar
X9
ks
One
pair
c1
17
a1
18
One
pair
c3
35
a3
36
One
pair
One
pair
The 37-PIN male connector of the cable is connected to the B75 board, and the AMP
connector is connected to the RSP slot of subscriber frame.
Table 5-55 Label contents
Label
Label1
Label2
Label3
Label4
Label5
Label6
Label7
Label8
Content
RSP1
RSP2
RSP3
RSP4
RSP5
RSP6
RSP7
RSP8
5.1.26 16-E1-Interface Cable From ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF

There are two types of 16-E1-interface cables from ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF: 75
and 120.
5-47

I. 16-E1-interface 75 cable from ATUA/AIUA to DDF

Figure 5-42 shows the 16-E1-interface 75 cable from ATUA/AIUA to DDF.
(1) A direction
(5) Main label
(9) Label 4
(13) Label 34
W: Coaxial cable

(6) Label 1
(10) Label 5
(14) Label 35
(3) Tie
(7) Label 2
(11) Label 32
(15) Label 36

(8) Label 3
(12) Label 33
Figure 5-42 Outline of the 16-E1-interface 75 cable from ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF

Table 5-56, Table 5-57 and Table 5-58 show the pin assignment of the cable.
Table 5-56 Pin assignment of the 16-E1-interface 75 cable from ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF(1)
ConnectorX
1
Coax.&Serial
No
a1
Tip
c1
Ring
a2
Tip
c2
Ring
a3
Tip
c3
Ring
a4
Tip
c4
Ring
a5
Tip
c5
Ring
Label
R0
T0
R1
T1
R2
5-48
ConnectorX
4
Coax.&Serial No
a1
Tip
c1
Ring
a2
Tip
c2
Ring
a3
Tip
c3
Ring
a4
Tip
c4
Ring
a5
Tip
c5
Ring
Label
R4
10
T4
11
R5
12
T5
13
R6

ConnectorX
1
Coax.&Serial
No
a6
Tip
c6
Ring
a7
Tip
c7
Ring
a8
Tip
c8
Ring
Label
T2
R3
T3
ConnectorX
4
Coax.&Serial No
a6
Tip
c6
Ring
a7
Tip
c7
Ring
a8
Tip
c8
Ring
Label
14
T6
15
R7
16
T7
ConnectorX
1
Coax.&Serial No
b1
Ring
b2
Tip
b3
Ring
b4
Tip
b5
Ring
b6
Tip
b7
Ring
b8
Tip
Labe
l
17
R8
18
T8
19
R9
20
T9
Connector.X
2
Coax.&Serial
No
b1
Ring
b2
Tip
b3
Ring
b4
Tip
b5
Ring
b6
Tip
b7
Ring
b8
Tip
Label
21
R10
22
T10
23
R11
24
T11
ConnectorX
3
Coax.&Serial
No.
b1
Ring
b2
Tip
b3
Ring
b4
Tip
b5
Ring
b6
Tip
b7
Ring
b8
Tip
Label
25
R12
26
T12
27
R13
28
T13
5-49
ConnectorX
4
Coax.&Serial
No.
b1
Ring
b2
Tip
b3
Ring
b4
Tip
b5
Ring
b6
Tip
b7
Ring
b8
Tip
Label
29
R14
30
T14
31
R15
32
T15

Table 5-59 describes Labels 3336.

Table 5-59 Labels on the 16-E1-interface 75 cable from ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF
Label
Description
Label 33
UP(18)
Label 34
UP(916)
Label 35
DOWN(1724)
Label 36
DOWN(2532)
II. 16-E1-interface 120 cable from ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF

Figure 5-43 shows the outline of the 16-E1-interface 120 cable from
ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF.
(1) A direction
(5) Main label
(9) Label 32
(13) Label 36

(6) Label 1
(10) Label 33
W1 W2: Symmetrical cables
(3) Tie
(7) Label 2
(11) Label 34

(8) Label 31
(12) Label 35
Figure 5-43 Outline of the 16-E1-interface 120 cable from ATUA/AIUA to DDF
5-50

Table 5-60, Table 5-61 and Table 5-62 show the pin assignment.
ConnectorX1
W1
Cable W1
a1
Pink/Red*
c1
Pink/Black*
a2
Orange/Red*
c2
Orange/Black*
a3
Green/Red*
c3
Green/Black*
a4
Blue/Red*
c4
Blue/Black*
a5
Gray/Red*
c5
Gray/Black*
a6
Pink/Red**
c6
Pink/Black**
a7
Orange/Red**
c7
Orange/Black**
a8
Green/Red**
c8
Green/Black**
Label
ConnectorX4
R0
T0
R1
T1
W1
R2
T2
R3
T3
Cable W1
a1
Blue/Red**
c1
Blue/Black**
a2
Gray/Red**
c2
Gray/Black**
a3
Pink/Red***
c3
Pink/Black***
a4
Orange/Red***
c4
Orange/Black***
a5
Green/Red***
c5
Green/Black***
a6
Blue/Red***
c6
Blue/Black***
a7
Gray/Red***
c7
Gray/Black***
a8
Blue/Red****
c8
Blue/Black****
Label
R4
T4
R5
T5
R6
T6
R7
T7
ConnectorX1
w2
Cable W2
b1
Pink/Red*
b2
Pink/Black*
b3
Orange/Red*
b4
Orange/Black*
b5
Green/Red*
b6
Green/Black*
b7
Blue/Red*
b8
Blue/Black*
Label
ConnectorX2
R8
T8
R9
T9
5-51
w2
Cable W2
b1
Gray/Red*
b2
Gray/Black*
b3
Pink/Red**
b4
Pink/Black**
b5
Orange/Red**
b6
Orange/Black**
b7
Green/Red**
b8
Green/Black**
Label
R10
T10
R11
T11

ConnectorX3
W
2
Cable W2
b1
Blue/Red**
b2
Blue/Black**
b3
Gray/Red**
b4
Gray/Black**
b5
Pink/Red***
b6
Pink/Black***
b7
Orange/Red**
*
b8
Orange/Black*
**
Label
ConnectorX4
R12
T12
W
2
R13
Cable W2
b1
Green/Red***
b2
Green/Black**
*
b3
Blue/Red***
b4
Blue/Black***
b5
Gray/Red***
b6
Gray/Black***
b7
Blue/Red****
T13
R14
T14
R15
T15
b8
Blue/Black****

Table 5-63 Labels on the 16-E1-interface 120 cable from ATUA/AIUA/DEHA to DDF
Label
Description
Label 33
UP (18)
Label 34
UP (916)
Label 35
DOWN (1724)
Label 36
DOWN (2532)
5-52
Label

5.1.27 4-E1-interface 75 Trunk Cable from H521SDL to DDF

Figure 5-44 shows the 4-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF.
(1) A direction
(9) Label 4
(13) Label 8

(6) Label 1
(10) Label 5
W: Coaxial cable
(3) Main label

(7) Label 2
(11) Label 6
(4) Tie
(8) Label 3
(12) Label 7
Figure 5-44 Outline of the 75 4-E1-interface trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF
Table 5-64 Pin assignment of the 75 4-E1-interface trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF
Conn. X
Coax.&Serial No
a1
Tip
c1
Ring
a2
Tip
c2
Ring
a3
Tip
c3
Ring
a4
Tip
c4
Ring
Label
T0
R0
T1
R1
Conn. X
Coax.&Serial No
a5
Tip
c5
Ring
a6
Tip
c6
Ring
a7
Tip
c7
Ring
a8
Tip
c8
Ring
Label
T2
R2
T3
R3

Table 5-65 Labels on the 4-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from H521SDL to DDF
Label
Description
Label 1
Label 2
Label 3
Label 4
Label 5
Label 6
Label 7
Label 8
T0
R0
T1
R1
T2
R2
T3
R3
5-53

5.1.28 Cable From H303HSL to OptiX155/622H

Accordingly, there are two types of cables from H303HSL to OptiX155/622H, both
using the 4 6-PIN 2mmFB connector.
I. Cable from H303HSL to SS42SP1

There are two types of trunk cables from H303HSL to SS42SP1: 75 and 120, as
(1) View A
(2) Wire connector
(3) Main label

(6) View B
(4) Cable tie

W: coaxial cable
Figure 5-45 Outline of the 2-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
Table 5-66 Pin assignment of the 2-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H
SS42SP1
Conn. X1
Coaxial cable W and serial No.
a1
Tip
c1
Ring
a2
Tip
c2
Ring
a3
Tip
c3
Ring
a4
Tip
c4
Ring
5-54
Conn. X2
d3
d4
a6
a5
d1
d2
a4
a3

(1) View A
(2) Wire connector (3) Main label
(4) Cable tie
(6) View B
W: communication cable-4-pair (8-core) twisted cable
Figure 5-46 Outline of the 2-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H SS42SP1
Table 5-67 Pin assignment of the 2-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155/622H
SS42SP1
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
a1
d3
c1
d4
a2
a6
c2
a5
a3
d1
c3
d2
a4
a4
c4
a3
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
II. 4-E1-interface cable from H303HSL to SS42SP2

There are two types of trunk cables from H303HSL to SS42SP2: 75 and 120, as
5-55

(1) View A
(2) Wire connector
(3) Cable tie
(5) Main label
W: coaxial cable, W1-8: communication cable

(7) View B
Figure 5-47 Outline of the 4-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155622H SS42SP2
Table 5-68 Pin assignment of the 4-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155622H
SS42SP2 HSL
Conn. X1
Coaxial cable W and

serial No.
a1
Tip
c1
Ring
a2
Tip
c2
Ring
a3
Tip
c3
Ring
a4
Tip
c4
Ring
Conn. X3
Conn. X2
Coaxial cable W and

serial No.
c6
a1
Tip
d6
c1
Ring
b6
a2
Tip
a6
c2
Ring
d5
a3
Tip
d4
c3
Ring
a5
a4
Tip
a4
c4
Ring
(1) View A
(2) Wire connector (3) Cable tie
(5) Main label
W: communication cable-120 twisted cable
Conn. X3
d3
d2
a3
a2
d1
c1
a1
b1

(7) View B
Figure 5-48 Outline of the 4-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155622H SS42SP2
5-56

Table 5-69 Pin assignment of the 4-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from H303HSL to OptiX 155622H
SS42SP2
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
a1
c6
c1
d6
a2
b6
c2
a6
a3
d5
c3
d4
a4
a5
c4
a4
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Conn. X2
Conn. X3
a1
d3
c1
d2
a2
a3
c2
a2
a3
d1
c3
c1
a4
a1
c4
b1
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
5.1.29 Trunk Cable From H303HSL to DDF

There are two types of trunk cables from H303HSL to DDF: 75 and 120.
I. 75 trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Figure 5-49 shows the outline of the 2-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from H303HSL to
DDF.
(1) Wire connector

(5)-(8) Labels 1-4
(2) Main label
(3) Cable tie

Figure 5-49 Outline of the 2-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF
Table 5-70 Pin assignment of the 2-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF
Connector .X1
a1
Tip
c1
Ring
5-57

Connector .X1
a2
Tip
c2
Ring
a3
Tip
c3
Ring
a4
Tip
c4
Ring

Table 5-71 Labels on the 2-E1-interface 75 trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF
Label
Content
Label 1
T0
Label 2
R0
Label 3
T1
Label 4
R1
II. 120 trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF

Figure 5-50 shows the outline of 2-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from H303HSL to
DDF.
(1) View A
(6) Label
(2) Wire connector

(3) Main label
(4) Cable tie
W: Communication cable-120 shielded twisted pair
Figure 5-50 Outline of the 2-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF
5-58

Table 5-72 Pin assignment of the 2-E1-interface 120 trunk cable from H303HSL to DDF
Conn. X1
Cable W
a1
White
c1
Blue
a2
White
c2
Orange
a3
White
c3
Green
a4
White
c4
Brown
Label content
T0
R0
T1
R1
5.2 Subscriber Line

5.2.1 16-port Subscriber Line
The 16-port subscriber line has 64 cores (32 pairs), which are connected to four AMP
connectors. These connectors are plugged in two adjacent subscriber-board slots at
the back of the backplane, as follows:
z
The AMP connectors at the top are plugged into pins 18 of the upper HEADER
respectively.
The AMP connectors at the bottom are plugged into pins 2532 of the lower
HEADER.
5-59

Figure 5-51 shows the outline of the 16-port subscriber line.
(1) Upper right
(2) Lower right
(3) Upper left
(4) Lower left
(5) View A
Figure 5-51 Outline of the 16-port subscriber line

Table 5-73 Pin assignment of the 16-port subscriber line
Conn. X1
Color
a1
Red*
Pink
c1
Black
*
a2
Red*
c2
Orang
e
Black
*
a3
Red*
Green
Conn. X2
Blue
c1
a2
Red*
*
a2
Grey
c2
Blac
k**
a3
Pink
a4
Red*
a4
Grey
Black
*
c4
Red*
a5
Red****
Orang
e
Black***
*
Red****
Green
Conn. X4
c1
a3
Red****
a3
Blac
k***
c3
Black***
*
c3
Red****
a4
k***
Red*
**
c4
a5
5-60
Pink
Red
Pink
Red*
**
Grey
Black*
(full)
a2
c2
a4
Red*(ful
l)
Grey
c2
Blue
Color
a1
Black***
*
Red*
Orang **
e
Blac
Green
Color
a1
c1
c3
a5
Conn. X3
Blac
k**
c3
c4
Red*
*
a1
Black
*
Blue
Color
Black
Orang
e
Red
Black
Red
Green
Black***
*
c4
Red*(full
)
a5
Black
Blue
Red

Conn. X1
Color
Conn. X2
Color
Conn. X3
c5
Black
*
c5
Blac
k***
c5
a6
Red**
a6
Red*
**
a6
Pink
c6
Black
**
a7
Red**
c7
Orang
e
Black
**
a8
Red**
Green
c8
Black
**
Blue
c6
Blac
k***
c6
a7
Red*
**
a7
Grey
c7
c7
a8
Red*
***
a8
c8
Blac
k****
Black*
(full)
Red*(full
)
Orang
e
Black*
(full)
Red*(full
)
Green
Blac
k***
Pink
Color
Black*
(full)
Red*(full
)
Blue
c8
Black*
(full)
Conn. X4
Color
c5
Black
a6
Red
Grey
c6
Black
a7
Red
Pink
c7
Black
a8
Red
Blue
c8
Black
5.2.2 32-port Subscriber Line

The 32-port subscriber line has 64 cores, which are connected to four AMP
connectors respectively. These connectors are plugged in two adjacent subscriber
slots at the back of the backplane, as follows.
Two longer lines are plugged in pins 18 and pins 916 of the upper HEADER
respectively.
The other two lines are plugged in pins 1724 and pins 2532 of the lower HEADER
respectively.
The pin assignment is different from that of the 16-port subscriber board. Figure 5-52
shows the outline of the 32-port subscriber line.
5-61

(1) View A
Figure 5-52 Outline of the 32-port subscriber line

Table 5-74 Pin assignment of the 32-port subscriber line
Connec
Color
t-orX1.1
a1
Connecto
rX1.2
Red*
Color
Red**
*
b1
Pink
Green
Connecto
rX1.3
c1
Black*
b2
a2
Red*
b3
Red**
*
b3
Blue
c2
Black*
b4
Black
***
a3
Red*
b5
Red**
*
Green
Grey
Red***
*
b1
Black
***
Orange
Color
b2
Orang
e
Black*
***
ConnectorX1.4
Pink
b2
b3
b4
Black*
***
b4
b5
Red***
*
b5
Blue
c3
Black*
b6
Black
***
b6
Black*
***
b6
a4
Red*
b7
Red**
**
b7
Red***
*
b7
Blue
Pink
c4
Black*
a5
Red*
b8
Black
****
Grey
b8
Black*
***
Red*(full
Oran )
ge
Black*(f
ull)
Red*(full
)
Gree
n
Black*
(full)
Red*(full
)
b8
Red*(full
)
Grey
c1
5-62
Black*
(full)
a1
Black*
Black*
(full)
Blue
Grey
c5
Red*(full
)
b1
Red***
*
Green
Color
Black*
(full)

Connec
Color
t-orX1.1
a6
c6
a7
c7
a8
c8
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
b8
Pink
Orange
Green
Blue
Grey
Pink
Orange
Connecto
rX1.2
Color
Connecto
rX1.3
Color
ConnectorX1.4
Red**
a2
Black**
c2
Red**
a3
Black**
c3
Red**
a4
Black**
c4
Red**
a5
Black**
c5
Red**
a6
Black**
c6
Red***
a7
Black***
c7
Red***
a8
Black***
c8
5.2.3 ATI Cable

Figure 5-53 shows the outline of the ATI cable.
(1) View B
Figure 5-53 Outline of the ATI cable

5-63
Color
Pink
Red
Black
Oran Red
ge
Black
Gree Red
n
Black
Blue
Grey
Pink
Blue
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Black

Table 5-75 Pin assignment of the ATI cable

Connector
X1
Color
a1
a2
a3
a4
Pink
Orang
e
a5
a6
Green
a7
a8
Conn.
X2
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
a8
Blue
Color
Pink
Orange
Green
Blue
Remarks
Connector
X1
Red*
b1
Black*
b2
Red*
b3
Black*
b4
Red*
b5
Black*
b6
Red*
b7
Black*
b8
Remarks
Conn.
X2
Red****
b1
Black****
b2
Red****
b3
Black****
b4
Red****
b5
Black****
b6
Red****
b7
Black****
b8
Color
Pink
Orang
e
Green
Blue
Color
Pink
Orange
Green
Blue
5.2.4 SRX Cable

Figure 5-54 shows the SRX cable.
5-64
Remarks
Connector
X1
Red**
c1
Black**
c2
Red**
c3
Black**
c4
Red**
c5
Black**
c6
Red**
c7
Black**
c8
Remarks
Conn.
X2
Red*****
c1
Black*****
c2
Red*****
c3
Black*****
c4
Red*****
c5
Black*****
c6
Red*****
c7
Black*****
c8
Color
Remar
ks
Red***
Pink
Orang
e
Black**
*
Red***
Black**
*
Red***
Green
Black**
*
Red***
Blue
Color
Pink
Orange
Green
Blue
Black**
*
Remarks
RedBlackRedBlackRedBlackRedBlack-

(1) View A
(2) View B
Figure 5-54 Outline of the SRX cable

Table 5-76 Pin assignment of the SRX cable
Conn. X1
Conn. X3
Color
a1
Blue
a2
Blue-white
a3
Green
a8
Green-whit
e
a4
20
Brown
a6
Brown-whit
e
a5
17
Orange
a7
15
Orange-whi
te
Remar
ks
Pair
Pair
Pair
Pair
Note: Pins 4 and 5 of Conn. X3 are short

connected inside the connector.
5-65
Conn. X1
Conn. X4
Color
c1
Blue
c2
Blue-white
c3
Green
c8
Green-whit
e
c4
20
Brown
c6
Brown-whit
e
c5
17
Orange
c7
15
Orange-whi
te
Rem
arks
Pair
Pair
Pair
Pair


Conn. X2
Connect
orX5
a1
Blue
c1
Blue
a8
Blue
a2
20
Orange
c3
20
Orange
a7
20
Orange
a3
Green
c2
Green
c6
Green
a4
Brown
c5
Brown
c7
Brown
a5
15
Brown-whit
e
c4
15
Brown-white
c8
15
Brown-whit
e
Color
Note: Pins 4 and 5 of Conn. X5 are

short connected in the connector.
Pins 15 and 17 of Conn. X5 are
Pins 6, 8 and 20 of Conn. X5 are
short connected inside the
connector.
Conn. X1 Conn. X6
Color

connected in the connector.
Pins 15 and 17 of Conn. X6 are short
connected in the connector.
Pins 6, 8 and 20 of Conn. X6 are short
Conn. X2 Conn. X7
Note: Pins 4 and 5 of Conn. X7 are

Pins 15 and 17 of Conn. X7 are
Pins 6, 8 and 20 of Conn. X7 are
short connected inside the
connector.
5.2.5 H302HSL Cable

I. H302HSL V.35 DCE/FE1 cable
(1) View A
(5) Main label
(2) Label 3
(6) Cable tie
(3) Label 2
(7) View B
Figure 5-55 Outline of the H302HSL V.35 DCE/FE1 cable

5-66
Color
(4) Label 1

Table 5-77 Pin assignment of the H302HSL V.35 DCE/FE1 cable

Conn. X1
Color
Conn. X2
Yellow
c5
Yellow/Black
a5
Red
a4
Red/Black
c4
Brown
c1
Brown/White
a1
Blue
a3
AA
Blue/Yellow
c3
Blue
a2
Blue/Black
c2
Green
a6
Remarks
Pair
Pair
Pair
Pair
Pair
Short in Conn. X1 with wires
D
E
Short in Conn. X1 with wires
F
H
Conn. X2
Remarks
A7
Tip
C7
Ring
A8
Tip
C8
Ring
Cable
W1
W2

Table 5-78 Labels on the H302HSL cable
Label
Label 1
Label 2
Label 3
Content
HSL V.35DCE/FE1 cable
5-67

II. H302HSL 75 FE1 cable
(1) Label 2
(2) Cable tie
(3) Main label
(4) A view
(5) Label 1
Figure 5-56 Outline of the H302HSL 75 FE1 cable

Table 5-79 Pin assignment of the H302HSL 75 FE1 cable
Conn. X
Remarks
a7
Tip
c7
Ring
a8
Tip
c8
Ring
Cable
W1
W2

Table 5-80 Label description of the H302HSL 75 FE1 cable
Label
Label 1
Label 2
Content
III. H302HSL 120 FE1 cable
(1) Label 3
(2) Main label
(3) Cable tie
(4) Label 1
Figure 5-57 Outline of the H302HSL 120 FE1 cable
5-68
(5) A view
(6) Label 2


Table 5-81 Pin assignment of the H302HSL 120 FE1 cable
Conn. X1
Remarks
a7
Cable
Pair
c7
W1
b4
Grounding cable
b4
Grounding cable
a8
W2
Pair
c8

Table 5-82 Labels on the H302HSL 120 FE1 cable
Label
Label 1
Label 2
Label 3
Content
HSL 120 FE1 cable
IV. H302HSL V.35DCE cable
(1) A view
(2) Plastic cover
(3) Main label
Figure 5-58 Outline of the H302HSL V.35DCE cable

5-69
(4) Label 1
(5) B view

Table 5-83 Pin assignment of the H302HSL V.35DCE cable

Conn. X1
Conn. X2
c1
a1
a2
c2
a3
AA
c3
a4
c4
Remarks
Pair
Pair
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
c5
a5
a6
E
F
Pair
H
C
Pair
Remarks
Pair
In the Conn.X1, short Pins E and F with

cable W2. Short Pins F and H with
cable W3.
In the Conn.X1, short Pins C and D with
cable W4.
5.2.6 H303HSL Cable

Figure 5-59 shows the outline of the 2-SHDSL-interface cable of the H303HSL board.
(1) Cable tie

W: Twisted pair
(3) Main label
(4)(15) Labels 112
Figure 5-59 Outline of the 2-SHDSL-interface cable of the H303HSL board

5-70

Table 5-84 Pin assignment of the 2-SHDSL-interface cable of the H303HSL board
Conn. X1
Cable color
a7
Pink/red*
Remark
s
Label
Label
1
One pair
c7
Pink/black*
a8
Orange/red*
c8
Orange/blac
k*
Conn. X2
Cable color
a7
Green/red*
One pair
Label
2
Remark
s
Label
Label
3
One pair
c7
Green/black*
a8
Blue/red*
c8
Blue/black*
Label
4
One pair
Conn. X3
Cable
color
Label 2
HSL-1 Channel1
Label 3
HSL-2 Channel0
Label 4
HSL-2 Channel1
Label 5
HSL-3 Channel0
Label 6
HSL-3 Channel1
Label 7
HSL-4 Channel0
Label 8
HSL-4 Channel1
Label 9
HSL-1
Label 10
HSL-2
Label 11
HSL-3
Label 12
HSL-4
5-71
Label 5
c7
Grey/bla
ck*
a8
Pink/red*
c8
Pink/blac
k*
One pair
Label 6
Cable
color
Remark
s
Label
One pair
Label 7
One pair
Label 8
Conn. X4
a7
Green/re
d*
c7
Green/bl
ack*
a8
Blue/red*
c8
Blue/blac
k*
Content
HSL-1 Channel0
One pair
Grey/red
*
Table 5-85 Labels on the 2-SHDSL-interface cable of the H303HSL board
Label 1
Label
a7
Label
Remark
s

5.2.7 DDU Cable

Figure 5-60 shows the DDU V.35 cable.
(1) View A
(2) View B
Figure 5-60 Outline of the DDU V.35 cable

Table 5-86 Pin assignment of the DDU V.35 cable
Conn. X1 Conn. X2
B
a6
C
D
E
F
H
P
c2
c1
Conn.
Conn. X2
X1
Remarks
c4
c3
In the Conn. X1, short Pins C

and D.
a8
a7
In the Conn. X1, short Pins E,

F, and H.
c8
c7
c6
AA
c5
Twisted pair 12
Twisted pair 1
Figure 5-61 shows the DDU V.24 cable.
(1) View A
(2) View B
Figure 5-61 Outline of the DDU V.24 cable

5-72
Remarks
Twisted pair 2
Twisted pair 5
Twisted pair 4
Twisted pair 3

Table 5-87 Pin assignment of the DDU V.24 cable

Conn. X1 Conn. X2
4
Remarks
Conn. X1 Conn. X2
In the Conn. X1, short

Pins 4 and 5.
5
6
In the Conn. X1, short

Pins 6, 8 and 20.
8
20
Remarks
c1
Twisted pair 5
c3
Twisted pair 9
17
a7
Twisted pair 7
15
a8
Twisted pair 8
a6
Twisted pair 1
5.2.8 SDL Subscriber Line

Figure 5-62 shows the outline of 4-SHDSL-interface subscriber line of the H521SDL
board.
(1) A direction
(5) Main label
(6) Label 1
(9) Label 4
(10) Label 5
(13) Label 8
(14) Label 9
(3) Tie
(7) Label 2
(11) Label 6
(15) Label 10

(8) Label 3
(12) Label 7
Figure 5-62 Outline of the 4-SHDSL-interface subscriber line of the H521SDL board
Table 5-88 Pin assignment of the 4-SHDSL-interface subscriber line of the H521SDL board
Conn. X1
Cable color
a5
pink/red*
c5
pink/black*
a6
orange/red*
c6
orange/black*
a7
green/red*
Remarks
one pair
one pair
one pair
5-73

Conn. X1
Cable color
c7
green/black*
a8
blue/red*
c8
blue/black*
Remarks
one pair
Conn. X2
Cable color
a5
pink/red*
c5
pink/black*
a6
orange/red*
c6
orange/black*
a7
green/red*
c7
green/black*
a8
blue/red*
c8
blue/black*
Remarks
one pair
one pair
one pair
one pair

Table 5-89 Label description of H521SDL four SHDSL interface cable
Label
Descri
ption
Label 1
Label 2
Label 3
Label 4
Label 5
Label 6
Label 7
Label 8
Label 9
Label
10
H521S
DL-1
H521S
DL-1
H521S
DL-1
H521S
DL-1
H521S
DL-2
H521S
DL-2
H521S
DL-2
H521S
DL-2
H521S
DL-1
H521S
DL-2
Channe
l0
Channe
l1
Channe
l2
Channe
l3
Channe
l0
Channe
l1
Channe
l2
Channe
l3
Down(2
532)
Down(2
532)
5.2.9 ADLA Subscriber Line

The subscriber line used for the H601ADLA is the same as the narrowband 32-port
subscriber line. Refer to Figure 5-52 and Table 5-74. The fore 16 ports are ADSL
signals, and the latter 16 ports are POTS signals.
5.2.10 ADMB/ADMC Subscriber Line

The subscriber line used for the H601ADLA is the same as the narrowband 32-port
subscriber line. Refer to Figure 5-52 and Table 5-74. The fore 16 ports are ADSL
signals, and the latter 16 ports are POTS signals.
5-74

5.2.11 CSLA Subscriber Line

The subscriber line used for the H601CSLA is the same as the narrowband 16-port
subscriber line. Refer to Figure 5-51 and Table 5-73.
5.2.12 SDLA Subscriber Line

The subscriber line used for the H601SDLA is the same as the narrowband 16-port
subscriber line. Refer to Figure 5-51 and Table 5-73.
5.2.13 VDLA Subscriber Line

The subscriber line used for the H601VDLA is the same as the narrowband 32-port
subscriber line.
5.3 Maintenance Cable and Network Cable

5.3.1 Serial Port Cable
A serial port cable is front-access-cabled from the front panel of the board. It can be
used for debugging and remote maintenance. One end of such cable is an 8-PIN
RJ-45 connector, which is used to connect the board, and the other end is a DB-9 or
DB-25 female connector. For connection with computer, the DB-9 female connector is
used.
Figure 5-63 shows the cable.
(1) View A
(2) DB-25 connector
(5) View B
(6) View C
(3) Label
(7) DB-9 connector
Figure 5-63 Outline of serial port cable
5-75


Table 5-90 Pin assignment of the serial port cable
Connector
Relationship
X2
Shell
X1
20
Shell
X3
Shell
5.3.2 Network Cable

There are two types of network cables: straight through cable and cross over cable.
z
The straight through cable is used to connect the data terminal equipment (DTE)
with the network.
The cross over cable is used to directly connect two maintenance terminals.
These two types of network cables have the same structure and use the RJ-45
connector at both ends. Figure 5-64 shows the outline of the straight through cable.
Figure 5-64 Outline of straight through cable

The straight through cable has different pin assignment from the cross-over cable.
Refer to the following description.
The line sequences at two ends of the straight through cable are completely the same.
The pin assignment of the eight pins of Connectors X1 is consistent with that of
Connectors X1. See Table 5-91.
Table 5-91 Pin assignment of the straight through cable
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
Pin 1
White (Orange)
Pin 1
Pin 2
Orange
Pin 2
Pin 3
White (Green)
Pin 3
Pin 4
Blue
Pin 4
Pin 5
White (Blue)
Pin 5
5-76

Conn. X1
Conn. X2
Pin 6
Green
Pin 6
Pin 7
White (Brown)
Pin 7
Pin 8
Brown
Pin 8
However, the line sequences at two ends of the cross-over cable are crossed to
some extent. Table 5-92 shows its pin assignment.
Table 5-92 Pin assignment of the cross over cable
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
Pin 1
White (Orange)
Pin 3
Pin 2
Orange
Pin 6
Pin 3
White (Green)
Pin 1
Pin 4
Blue
Pin 4
Pin 5
White (Blue)
Pin 5
Pin 6
Green
Pin 2
Pin 7
White (Brown)
Pin 7
Pin 8
Brown
Pin 8
RJ-45 connectors are used to connect Ethernet interfaces. They can be connected
with Category-3 and Category-5 Unshielded Twisted Pairs (UTP-3 and UTP-5) or
Shielded Twisted Pair (STP).
Caution:
z
For the Category-5 UTP, the maximum transmission distance of single segment without repeater is
100 m. When the repeaters are used, the maximum space between repeaters is 5 m. Due to the
delay and signal timing, a maximum of two repeaters can be used. Therefore, the maximum distance
between two sites is 205 m.
To get the best electrical transmission characteristics, make sure that 1 and 2, 3 and 6 are just two
cable cores of the twisted pair.
5-77

5.4 HW Cable
The PV8 board provides 32 differential HW interfaces. The HWC board has two types
of HW cables: one that can subtend four RSP frames; the other that can subtend eight
RSP frames.
I. HW cable subtending four RSP frames

The HW cable provides four HW interfaces for each RSP board. Figure 5-65 shows its
outline, and Table 5-93 and Table 5-94 show its pin assignment.
(1) View A (2) Wire connector-4 8-PIN Female

W: flat cable-twisted pair
(3) Label 1
(4) Cable tie
(5) Label 2
Figure 5-65 Outline of the HW cable subtending four RSP frames
Table 5-93 Pin assignment 1 of the HW cable subtending four RSP frames
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
b1
a1
d1
c1
b2
a2
d2
c2
b3
a3
d3
c3
b4
a4
d4
c4
b5
a5
d5
c5
b6
a6
d6
c6
b7
a7
d7
c7
5-78
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair

Conn. X1
Conn. X2
b8
a8
d8
c8
Remarks
One pair
Table 5-94 Pin assignment 1 of the HW cable subtending four RSP frames
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
c1
b1
c5
b5
c2
b2
c6
b6
c3
b3
c7
b7
c4
b4
c8
b8
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Table 5-95 describes the label.

Table 5-95 Label on the HW cable subtending four RSP frames
Label 1
Label 2
HWC
RSP DOWN(17-24)/(25-32)
II. HW cable subtending eight RSP frames

The HW cable provide two HW interfaces for each RSP board, one PV8 board can
subtend up to eight RSP frames. Figure 5-66 shows its outline, Table 5-96 and Table
5-97 show its pin assignment.
5-79

(1) View A
(2) Label 1
(3) Label 2
(4) Label 3
(5) Cable tie
(6) Wire connector -4 8-PIN

female
W: flat cable twisted pair
Figure 5-66 Outline of the HW cable subtending eight RSP frames
Table 5-96 Pin assignment (1) of the HW cable subtending eight RSP frames
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
b5
a5
d5
c5
b6
a6
d6
c6
b7
a7
d7
c7
b8
a8
d8
c8
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
b1
a1
d1
c1
b2
a2
d2
c2
b3
a3
d3
c3
b4
a4
d4
c4
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
Table 5-97 Pin assignment (2) of the HW cable subtending eight RSP frames
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
b5
a5
d5
c5
b6
a6
d6
c6
b7
a7
d7
c7
b8
a8
d8
c8
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair
5-80
Conn. X1
Conn. X2
b1
a1
d1
c1
b2
a2
d2
c2
b3
a3
d3
c3
b4
a4
d4
c4
Remarks
One pair
One pair
One pair
One pair

Table 5-98 describes the label.

Table 5-98 Label on the HW cable subtending eight RSP frames
Label 1
HWC
Label 2
RIGHT RSP(DOWN)(1724)/(2532)
5-81
Label 3
LEFT RSP(DOWN)(1724)/(2532)

Appendix A Abbreviations
A
AC
Alternating Current
ADSL
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
B
BIOS
Basic Input Output System
BRA
Basic Rate Access
C
CES
Circuit Emulation Service
CPE
Customer Premises Equipment
CPU
Center Processing Unit
CQT
Circuit Quality Test
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
D
DC
Direct Current
DCE
Data Connection Equipment
DDF
Digital Distribution Frame
DDN
Digital Data Network
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
E
F
FE
Fast Ethernet
FXO
Foreign Exchange Office
FXS
Foreign Exchange Subscriber
G
GND
Ground
H
HW
Highway
A-1

IMA
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
J
K
L
LE
Local Exchange
LVDS
Low Voltage Differential Signal
M
N
O
OLT
Optical Line Terminal
ONU
Optical Network Unit
P
PGND
Protection Ground
PON
Passive Optical Network
POTS
Plain Old Telephone Service
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
PWX
Q
R
S
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SHDSL
Single-pair High-speed Digital Subscriber Line
STM-1
Synchronous Transfer Mode 1
STP
Shielded Twisted Pair
T
TDM
Time Devision Multiplex
TTL
Transistor-Transistor Logic (TTL) level
U
UTP
Unshielded Twisted Pair
V
W
X
A-2

Y
Z
A-3

UA5000 Hardware Description Manual PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

UA5000 Hardware Description Manual PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Chapter 1 Overview .........................................................................................

1.1 ONU Introduction....................................................................................

Chapter 2 Introduction to Frames ..................................................................

2.1 UAFM Frame ..........................................................................................

2.7 PV8-10 Control Frame ...........................................................................

Chapter 3 Introduction to Boards ..................................................................

3.1 ATM Service Processing Board (H601APMA) .......................................

3.5.3 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................

3.14.1 Overview ......................................................................................

3.23 High Speed Subscriber Board (H302HSL) ...........................................

3.32.1 Overview ......................................................................................

3.41.2 Front Panel ..................................................................................

Chapter 4 Introduction to Front Access Cables ...........................................

4.1 Digital Trunk Cables ...............................................................................

Chapter 5 Introduction to Rear Access Cables ............................................

5.1 Digital Trunk Cable .................................................................................

5.2.9 ADLA Subscriber Line ....................................................................

Appendix A Abbreviations ..............................................................................

HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit

HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Copyright 2004 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET,

, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium,

About This Manual

HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-60A User Manual

HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-F01D100 User Manual

HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-F01D200 User Manual

HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-F01D500 user manual

HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-F01D600 User Manual

HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-F01D1000 User Manual

HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-F01&02AF User Manual

HONET Integrated Services Access Network ONU-F01&02A User Manual

HONET UA5000 Universal Access Unit Hardware Description Manual

Technical engineers of HONET Integrated Services Access Network

Installation and maintenance engineers of HONET Integrated Services Access

Normal paragraphs are in Arial.

Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips are in Arial Narrow.

Headings are in Boldface.

Caution: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.

Hardware Description Manual

Hardware Description Manual

2.6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 2-16

Hardware Description Manual

3.5.2 Front Panel............................................................................................................ 3-32

Hardware Description Manual

3.14.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-69

Hardware Description Manual

3.23.2 Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 3-91

Hardware Description Manual

3.33 Environment & Power Monitoring Board (H303ESC) .................................................. 3-118

Hardware Description Manual

3.42.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 3-162

Hardware Description Manual

5.1.6 CES E1 Cable From PV8 to APMA....................................................................... 5-13

Hardware Description Manual

Appendix A Abbreviations ...........................................................................................................A-1

Hardware Description Manual

1.1 ONU Introduction

According to the environment: Indoor series and Outdoor series.

According to the maintenance mode: Rear access and Front access.